2006 hyundai azera owners manual

A010A03A-AAT

WARRANTIES FOR YOUR HYUNDAI VEHICLE

Please consult your Owner's Handbook & Warranty Information booklet for your vehicle'sspecific warranty coverage.

A020A01A-AAT

RESPONSIBILITY FOR MAINTENANCE

The maintenance requirements for your new Hyundai are found in Section 5. As the owner, it is yourresponsibility to see that all maintenance operations specified by the manufacturer are carried outat the appropriate intervals. When the vehicle is used in severe driving conditions, more frequentmaintenance is required for some operations. Maintenance requirements for severe operatingconditions are also included in Section 5.

OWNER'S MANUAL

A030A01TG-AAT

OperationMaintenanceSpecifications

All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. However, Hyundai reserves the right to make changesat any time so that our policy of continual product improvement may be carried out.

This manual applies to all Hyundai models and includes descriptions and explanations of optional as well as standard equipment.As a result, you may find material in this manual that does not apply to your specific vehicle.

A030A01TG-A

A070A01A-AAT

CAUTION: MODIFICATIONS TO YOUR HYUNDAI

Your Hyundai should not be modified in any way. Such modifications may adversely affect theperformance, safety or durability of your Hyundai and may, in addition, violate conditions of the limitedwarranties covering the vehicle. Certain modifications may also be in violation of regulationsestablished by the U.S. Department of Transportation and other federal or state agencies.

A080A01S-AAT

TWO-WAY RADIO OR CELLULAR TELEPHONE INSTALLATION

Your vehicle is equipped with electronic fuel injection and other electronic components. It is possiblefor an improperly installed/adjusted two-way radio or cellular telephone to adversely affect electronicsystems. For this reason, we recommend that you carefully follow the radio manufacturer's instruc-tions or consult your Hyundai dealer for precautionary measures or special instructions if you chooseto install one of these devices.

!

A090A01A-AAT

SAFETY AND VEHICLE DAMAGE WARNING

This manual includes information titled as WARNING, CAUTION and NOTE.These titles indicate the following:

WARNING:This indicates that a condition may result in harm, serious injury or death to you or other personsif the warning is not heeded. Follow the advice provided with the warning.

CAUTION:This indicates that a condition may result in damage to your vehicle or its equipment if the cautionis not heeded. Follow the advice provided with the caution.

NOTE:This indicates that interesting or helpful information is being provided.

!

!

A110A01A-AAT

VEHICLE DATA COLLECTION AND EVENT DATA RECORDERS

Your Hyundai vehicle is equipped with many high technology, electronically controlled systems thathelp to ensure your vehicle operates properly and provides the performance that you expect. Thesesystems utilize computers to monitor the operation of various systems and components and help tocontrol their operation. These computerized system operations are wide-ranging and involvecomponents to reduce emissions, to continuously evaluate the readiness of the airbag and seat beltpretensioner systems, to determine when the airbag and seat belt pre-tensioner systems should bedeployed and then to activate the deployment, and if equipped, to operate anti-lock braking, tractioncontrol and electrical stability control to assist the driver to control the vehicle in difficult drivingsituations. These systems electronically store information that is useful to service technicians whenthey need to diagnose and repair these systems. Additional information is stored only when a crashoccurs that results in the deployment of the airbags or seat belt pre-tensioners. This type of datastorage is done by devices called event data recorders(EDR).

After a crash event, the airbag and seat belt pre-tensioner computer system, known as theSupplemental Restraint System Control Module (SRSCM) or Airbag Control Unit (ACU), may recordsome information about the condition of the vehicle and how it was being operated. This informationconsists of data related to seat belt usage and if there was diagnostic information in the airbag or seatbelt systems at the time that a crash occurred, and if the ACU sensed that a crash of sufficient severityoccurred to require seat belt pre-tensioner or airbag deployment.

To retrieve this information, special equipment is needed and access to the vehicle or the device thatstores the data is required. Hyundai will not access information about a crash event or share it withothers except:

o in response to an official request of police or similar government office, oro with the consent of the vehicle owner or, if the vehicle is leased, with the consent of the lessee,

oro as part of Hyundai’s defense of litigation, oro as required by law.

A040A01A-AAT

FOREWORD

Thank you for choosing Hyundai. We are pleased to welcome you to the growing number of discriminatingpeople who drive Hyundais. The advanced engineering and high-quality construction of each Hyundai webuild is something of which we're very proud.

Your Owner's Manual will introduce you to the features and operation of your new Hyundai. It is suggestedthat you read it carefully because the information it contains can contribute greatly to the satisfaction youreceive from your new car.

The manufacturer also recommends that all service and maintenance on your car be performed by anauthorized Hyundai dealer. Hyundai dealers are prepared to provide high-quality service, maintenance andany other assistance that may be required.A050A04A-AAT

HYUNDAI MOTOR COMPANY

Note : Because future owners will also need the information included in this manual, if you sell this Hyundai,please leave the manual in the vehicle for their use. Thank you.

CAUTION:Severe engine and transaxle damage may result from the use of poor quality fuels and lubricants thatdo not meet Hyundai specifications. You must always use high quality fuels and lubricants that meetthe specifications listed on Page 9-4 in the Vehicle Specifications section of the Owner's Manual andwhich also appear in the Service Station Information on the back cover of the Owner's Manual.

Copyright 2005 Hyundai Motor Company. All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced,stored in any retrieval system or transmitted in any form or by any means without the prior written permissionof Hyundai Motor Company.

!

A100A03A-AAT

Guide to Hyundai Genuine Parts1. What are Hyundai Genuine Parts?

Hyundai Genuine Parts are the sameparts used by Hyundai Motor Companyto manufacture vehicles. They are de-signed and tested for the optimum safety,performance, and reliability to our cus-tomers.

2. Why should you use genuine parts?

Hyundai Genuine Parts are engineeredand built to meet rigid manufacturingrequirements. Using imitation, counter-feit or used salvage parts is not coveredunder the Hyundai New Vehicle Lim-ited Warranty or any other Hyundai

warranty. In addition, any damage to orfailure of Hyundai Genuine Parts causedby the installation or failure of an imita-tion, counterfeit or used salvage part isnot covered by any Hyundai Warranty.

3. How can you tell if you are purchasingHyundai Genuine Parts?

Look for the Hyundai Genuine PartsLogo on the package (see below).

Hyundai Genuine Parts exported to theUnited States are packaged with labelswritten only in English.

Hyundai Genuine Parts are only soldthrough authorized HyundaiDealerships.

To find the closest authorized dealercall 1-800-826-CARS

A100A01L A100A02L A100A04L

A100A03L

TABLE OF CONTENTS

SECTION 5

1

2

3

4

6

7

8

9

10

FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI

WHAT TO DO IN AN EMERGENCY

CORROSION PREVENTION & APPEARANCE CARE

VEHICLE MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS

DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE

EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEMS

CONSUMER INFORMATION, REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS &BINDING ARBITRATION OF WARRANTY CLAIMS

VEHICLE SPECIFICATIONS

INDEX

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS (I)

B250A01TG-AAT

B250A01TG-A

1. Panel Brightness Control Knob (Rheostat Switch) ........ 1-872. Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Switch (If Installed) ... 2-113. Power Adjustable Pedals Switch (If Installed) ................ 2-104. Steering Wheel Tilt & Telescopic Lever ....................... 1-1175. Hood Release Lever ..................................................... 1-1136. Cigarette Lighter ............................................................. 1-877. Front Ashtray ................................................................... 1-88

CAUTION:When installing a container of liquid air freshener inside the vehicle, do not place it near the instrument clusternor on the instrument panel surface. If there is any leakage from the air freshener onto these areas(Instrument cluster, instrument panel or air ventilator), it may damage these parts. If the liquid from the airfreshener does leak onto these areas, wash them with water immediately.

!

8. Front Seat Warmer Switches (If Installed) ...................... 1-24 9. Rear Window Curtain Switch (If Installed) .................... 1-11710. Passenger's Seat Belt Warning Light ............................. 1-7011. Digital Clock .................................................................... 1-8712. "PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF" Indicator ......................... 1-5213. Hazard Warning Switch .................................................. 1-8614. Power Outlet ................................................................... 1-88

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS (II)

B250B01TG-AAT

B250B01TG-A

1. Fuse Box ......................................................................... 6-192. Instrument Cluster ........................................................... 1-623. Parking Brake Pedal ..................................................... 1-1074. Brake Pedal .................................................................... 2-105. Accelerator Pedal ........................................................... 2-106. Multi-Function Light/Front Fog Light Switch ................... 1-817. Audio Remote Control Switch (If Installed) ................... 1-1218. Horn and Driver's Front Airbag ........................... 1-116, 1-459. Cruise Control Switch ................................................... 1-118

CAUTION:When installing a container of liquid air freshener inside the vehicle, do not place it near the instrument clusternor on the instrument panel surface. If there is any leakage from the air freshener onto these areas(Instrument cluster, instrument panel or air ventilator), it may damage these parts. If the liquid from the airfreshener does leak onto these areas, wash them with water immediately.

!

10. Windshield Wiper/Washer Switch .................................. 1-8411. Audio System (If Installed) ............................................ 1-13612. Passenger's Front Airbag ............................................... 1-4513. Heating/Air Conditioning Control Panel ....................... 1-12414. Glove Box ........................................................................ 1-9615. Accessory Box ................................................................ 1-9716. Shift Lever ......................................................................... 2-517. Drink Holder .................................................................... 1-8918. Center Console ............................................................... 1-97

YOUR VEHICLE AT A GLANCE

B255A01TG-AAT

INDICATOR SYMBOLS ON THE INSTRUMENT CLUSTER

* More detailed explanations of these items will be found beginning on page 1-66.

Turn Signal Indicator Lights

High Beam Indicator Light

Low Oil Pressure Warning Light

Parking Brake/Low Brake Fluid Level

Warning Light

Charging System Warning Light

Door Ajar Warning Light

Trunk Lid Open Warning Light

Low Fuel Level Warning Light

Low Windshield Washer Fluid Level Warning Light

Seat Belt Warning Light

Front Fog Light Indicator Light

Check Engine - Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)

SRS (Airbag) Warning Light

ABS Service Reminder Indicator (If Installed)

Electronic Stability Control (ESC) IndicatorLights (If Installed)

Cruise Indicator Light

Cruise SET Indicator Light

Immobilizer Warning Light

1Fuel Recommendations ....................................................1-2Breaking in Your New Hyundai .........................................1-3Immobilizer System ...........................................................1-3Door Locks ........................................................................1-8Theft-Alarm System ........................................................1-11Windows ..........................................................................1-14Seats ................................................................................1-18I.M.S (Intergrated Memory System) ...............................1-22Seat Belts ........................................................................1-27Child Restraint System ....................................................1-34Advanced Supplemental Restraint (AIRBAG) System (SRS) ................................................................1-44Instrument Cluster and Indicator Lights .........................1-62Warning and Indicator Lights ..........................................1-66Trip Computer .................................................................1-77Multi-Function Light Switch .............................................1-81Windshield Wiper and Washer Switch ............................1-84Sunroof ............................................................................1-91Mirror ...............................................................................1-98Homelink Mirror ............................................................ 1-101Hood Release ............................................................... 1-113Cruise Control ............................................................... 1-118Heating and Cooling Control ........................................ 1-122Stereo Sound System .................................................. 1-134Audio System................................................................ 1-136Antenna ........................................................................ 1-166

FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

1

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

2

B010A01TG-A

FUEL RECOMMENDATIONS

CAUTION:Your Hyundai's New Vehicle Limited War-ranty may not cover damage to the fuelsystem and any performance problemsthat are caused by the use of fuels con-taining methanol or fuels containingMTBE (Methyl Tertiary Butyl Ether) over15.0% vol. (Oxygen Content 2.7% weight.)

B010B01A-AAT

What About Gasohol?

Gasohol (a mixture of 90% unleaded gaso-line and 10% ethanol or grain alcohol)may be used in your Hyundai. However, ifyour engine develops driveability prob-lems, the use of 100% unleaded gasolineis recommended. Fuels with unspecifiedquantities of alcohol, or alcohols otherthan ethanol, should not be used.

B010A01NF-AAT

Use Unleaded Gasoline

Unleaded gasoline with a Pump OctaneRating of 87 (Research Octane Number91) or higher must be used in yourHyundai.

B010C01A-AAT

Use of MTBE

Hyundai recommends that fuels contain-ing MTBE (Methyl Tertiary Butyl Ether)over 15.0% vol. (Oxygen Content 2.7%weight) should not be used in yourHyundai.Fuel containing MTBE over 15.0% vol.(Oxygen Content 2.7% weight) may re-duce vehicle performance and producevapor lock or hard starting.

B010D01A-AAT

Do Not Use Methanol

Fuels containing methanol (wood alco-hol) should not be used in your Hyundai.This type of fuel can reduce vehicle perfor-mance and damage components of thefuel system.

!

!

UNLEADEDFUEL ONLY

CAUTION:o Do not "TOP-OFF" after the first nozzle

shut off when refueling.o The fuel cap must be tightened until

cap clicks, otherwise " " light willilluminate.


3BREAKING IN YOUR NEWHYUNDAI

B010F01A-AAT

Operation in Foreign Countries

If you are going to drive your Hyundai inanother country, be sure to:

o Observe all regulations regarding reg-istration and insurance.

o Determine that acceptable fuel is avail-able.

B010E01A-AAT

Gasolines for Cleaner Air

To help contribute to cleaner air, Hyundairecommends that you use gasolinestreated with detergent additives, whichhelp prevent deposit formation in the en-gine. These gasolines will help the enginerun cleaner and enhance performance ofthe Emission Control System.

B020A01TG-AAT

During the First 1,200 Miles (2,000Km)

No formal "break-in" procedure is requiredwith your new Hyundai. However, you cancontribute to the economical operationand durability of your Hyundai by observ-ing the following recommendations dur-ing the first 1,200 miles (2,000 km).

o Don't drive faster than 55 MPH (88 km/h).

o While driving, keep your engine speed(rpm, or revolutions per minute) be-tween 2,000 rpm and 4,000 rpm.

o Use moderate acceleration. Don't startquickly or depress the accelerator pedalfully.

o For the first 200 miles (300 km), try toavoid hard stops.

o Whether going fast or slow, vary yourspeed from time to time.

o Don't let the engine idle longer than 3minutes at one time.

o Don't tow a trailer during the first 1,200miles (2,000 km) of operation.

IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM

B880A01TG-AAT

The immobilizer system is an anti-theftdevice, designed to deter automobile theft.

NOTE:This device complies with Part 15 of theFCC rules. Operation is subject to thefollowing two conditions:(1) This device may not cause harmfulinterference, and (2) this device mustaccept any interference received, in-cluding interference that may causeundesired operation.

CAUTION:Changes or modifications not expresslyapproved by the party responsible forcompliance could void the user's au-thority to operate the equipment.

!


4

!

2) Sub keySimilar to the master key, this key willonly function in the ignition and the doorlocks, but it will not operate the trunk andthe glove box. One side of the key hasthe Hyundai logo and the other side hasan "S" symbol.Leaving your sub key with a parkingattendant will ensure that your vehicle'strunk, trunk lid release, glove box com-partment and rear trunk access may notbe unlocked in your absence.

CAUTION:o If you make your own duplicate key,

you will not be able to cancel the sys-tem or start the engine.

o When starting the engine, do not usethe key with other immobilizer keys inclose proximity; otherwise, the en-gine may not start or may stop soonafter it starts.Keep each key separated from oneanother.

B031A01TG-AAT

Before leaving sub key with parkingattendant

When leaving the sub key with a parkingattendant, the following procedures willensure that your vehicle's trunk and glovebox can not be unlocked in your absence.

1. Unlock the glove box with the masterkey and open it.

2. Set the trunk lid control button in theglove box to the "OFF" position (notdepressed). In the "OFF" position, thetrunk can not be unlocked with eitherthe trunk release lever or trunk openbutton of transmitter.

B541A01TG

B880B01TG-AAT

Two Types of Keys

For greater convenience, your Hyundaihas two types of keys as shown in theillustration.

1) Master keyThis key is for general use. It will open alllocks on your vehicle. One side of the keyhas the Hyundai logo and the other sidehas the "M" symbol.

B880B01TGSub keyMaster key


5

3. Close the glove box, and lock the glovebox using the master key.

4. Switch the rear seatback knobs to the"LOCK" position (refer to page 1-26).

5. Leave the sub key with the attendant.Trunk and glove box are secured be-cause the sub key only allows ignitionand door lock operation.

B880C01NF-GAT

Key Numbers

The vehicle key number is recorded on anumber tag attached to the keys when thevehicle is first delivered to you.The key number should be recorded andkept in a safe place in case the need toorder further keys arises. New keys areavailable from any Hyundai dealer byquoting the relevant key number.In the interest of security, the number tagattached to the keys which bears the keynumber should be removed from the keystring after you receive your new vehicle.In addition, key numbers cannot be pro-vided by Hyundai for security reasons.

B880C01TG

If you need additional keys or if you shouldlose your keys, your authorized Hyundaidealer can make new keys if you cansupply the key number and master key.


6

4. If all of the four password digits havebeen successfully entered, turn the ig-nition key "ON" and check that the im-mobilizer indicator illuminates. Fromthis time, you have to start your enginewithin 30 seconds. If you try to start yourengine after 30 seconds, your enginewill not start.

NOTE:If the engine stalls while driving in the"limp home" mode, you can start yourengine within 3 seconds without re-en-tering the password.

If the immobilizer indicator blinks for fiveseconds, you must re-enter the password(steps 1~4).

After performing the limp home activationprocedure, consult with your authorizedHyundai dealer as soon as possible.

If the immobilizer warning indicator blinksfor five seconds when the ignition key isturned to the "ON" position, this indicatesthe immobilizer system requires service.The engine cannot be started without us-ing the procedure below.The following procedure describes how tostart the engine using the limp home func-tion (0, 1, 2, 3 as a sample password).

NOTE:You can get a limp home password whenthe vehicle is first delivered to you. If youdo not have a password, consult yourauthorized Hyundai dealer.

1. To activate the password, turn the igni-tion key "ON" and "OFF" according tothe digit numbers. The immobilizer indi-cator will blink along with the operationof the ignition key. For example, turn theignition key once for digit number "1",and twice for "2", and so on. For the digitnumber "0", you must cycle the ignitionkey 10 times.

2. Wait for 3~10 seconds.3. You may set the remaining number of

digits by following steps 1 and 2.

B880D01TG-AAT

"Limp Home" Mode and RelatedProcedures

B880D01TG-A

B880D02TG-A

Conventional Type

Super - Vision Type


7

! CAUTION:o If the password is entered incorrectly

three consecutive times, wait for aboutone hour to perform the limp homeactivation procedure again.

o If you cannot start your engine usingthe limp home activation procedure,have your vehicle towed by an autho-rized Hyundai dealer.

B030C01JM-AAT

ILLUMINATED IGNITION SWITCH

Whenever either front door is opened, theignition switch will be illuminated for yourconvenience, provided the ignition switchis not in the "ON" position.The light will go off approximately 10 sec-onds after closing the door or when theignition switch is turned on.

B030C01E

DOOR LOCKS

!B040A01TG-AAT

WARNING:o Before you drive away (especially if

there are children in the car), be surethat all the doors are securely closedand locked so that the doors cannotbe opened from the inside. This helpsensure that the doors will not beopened accidentally. Also, when com-bined with the proper use of seat belts,locking the doors helps keep occu-pants from being ejected from the carin case of an accident.

o Before opening the door, always lookfor and avoid oncoming traffic.


8

B040C02Y-AAT

Locking from the Outside

The doors can be locked without a key. Tolock the doors from the outside, first pushthe inside lock switch to the "LOCK" posi-tion, so that the red mark on the switch is notvisible, then close the door.The door will not lock if the key is left in theignition switch when the front doors areclosed. This is normal operation.

B040C01TG-A

B040B01O-AAT

Locking, unlocking front doors witha key

o The door can be locked or unlockedwith a key.

o Lock the door by turning the key towardthe front of the vehicle and unlock it byturning the key toward the rear.

NOTE:The driver's door can be unlocked byturning the key once toward the rear. Ifyou wish to unlock all doors, turn the keyagain toward the rear within 4 seconds.

HTG2008

LOCK

UNLOCK

NOTE:o When locking the door this way, be

careful not to lock the door with thekey left in the vehicle.

o To discourage theft, always removethe ignition key, close all windows andlock all doors when leaving your ve-hicle unattended.


9

WARNING:Be careful not to pull the inside doorhandle while driving. If you pull the insidedoor handle, the door can be opened andyou may be ejected from the vehicle andcan be injured or killed.

!B040D01NF-AAT

Locking from the Inside

To lock the doors from the inside, simplyclose the door and push the lock switch tothe "LOCK" position.

NOTE:o When the door is locked, the red mark

on the switch is not visible.o The driver's and front passenger's

doors can be opened by pulling theinside door handle even if the insidelock switch is pushed to the "LOCK"position.

HTG2009

LOCKUNLOCK

B040E04A-AAT

Child-Protector Rear Door Lock

Your Hyundai is equipped with left andright side "child-protector" rear door locks.When the lock mechanism is engaged, therear door cannot be opened from the in-side. Its use is recommended wheneverthere are small children in the rear seat.

To engage the child-protector feature sothat the door cannot be opened from theinside, move the child-protector lever tothe " " position and close the door. Movethe lever to the " " position when normaldoor operation is desired.

To open the door from the outside, pull theoutside door handle.

HTG2011-1


10

B070F01NF-AAT

KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM

NOTE:This device complies with Part 15 of theFCC rules. Operation is subject to thefollowing two conditions:(1) This device may not cause harmfulinterference, and (2) this device mustaccept any interference received, in-cluding interference that may causeundesired operation.

CAUTION:Changes or modifications not expresslyapproved by the party responsible forcompliance could void the user's au-thority to operate the equipment.

!

B040G01NF-AAT

Central Door Locks

The central door locking switch is locatedon the driver's and front passenger's arm-rest. It is operated by depressing the doorlock switch. If any door is open when theswitch is depressed to the "LOCK" posi-tion, the door will remain locked whenclosed.

NOTE:o When depressing the front portion of

the driver's or front passenger's doorlock switch, all vehicle doors will lock.

o When depressing the rear portion ofthese switches, all vehicle doors willunlock.

B040G01TG

Driver's side

Front passenger's sideLOCK UNLOCK

LOCKUNLOCK

! WARNING:Be careful not to pull the inside doorhandle while driving. If you pull the in-side door handle, the door can be openedand you may be ejected from the ve-hicle and can be injured or killed.

o The driver's and front passenger'sdoors can be opened by pulling theinside door handle even if the frontportion of the driver's or frontpassenger's central door lockingswitch has been depressed to lockthe doors.


11THEFT-ALARM SYSTEM

B070A01A-AAT

This system is designed to provide protec-tion from unauthorized entry into the car.This system is operated in three stages :the first is the "Armed" stage, the second isthe "Alarm" stage and the third is the "Dis-armed" stage. If triggered, the system pro-vides an audible alarm with blinking of theturn signal lights.

B070B01TG-AAT

Armed Stage

B070B01TG-A

Lock

UnlockTrunk Unlock

Park the car and stop the engine. Arm thesystem as described below.

Locking doors

1. Close all doors.2. Push the "LOCK ( )" button on the

transmitter.3. At the same time, all doors lock and the

turn signal lights will blink once to indi-cate that the system is armed.

Unlocking doors

1. Push the "UNLOCK ( )" button onthe transmitter.

2. At the same time, the driver's door un-locks and the turn signal lights will blinktwice to indicate that the system is dis-armed.

NOTE:If you wish to unlock all the doors, pressthe "UNLOCK" button on the transmitteragain within 4 seconds.

Releasing the trunk lid

Push the trunk lid release button ( ) onthe transmitter for longer than 1 second.

1) Remove the ignition key from the igni-tion switch.

2) Make sure that the engine hood andtrunk lid are closed and latched.

3) Lock the doors using the transmitter ofthe keyless entry system or lock thedriver's door using the key after closingthe all doors.

If the steps are completed as above, thesecurity LED lamp on the passenger’scrash pad will illuminate for about 30 sec-onds, and then the lamp will blink continu-ously when the system is entered into thearmed stage. The turn signal lights willblink and audible alarm will sound once toindicate that the system is armed.

NOTE:1) If any door, trunk lid or engine hood

remains open, the system will not bearmed.

2) If this happens, rearm the system aspreviously described.


12

B070C01NF-AAT

Alarm Stage

The alarm will be activated if any of thefollowing occurs while the car is parkedand the system is armed.

B070C01TG-A

CAUTION:Avoid trying to start the engine while thesystem is armed.

!

NOTE:Do not arm the system until all passen-gers have left the car. If the system isarmed while a passenger(s) remains inthe car, the alarm may be activated whenthe remaining passenger(s) leaves thecar.

B070D01TG-AAT

Disarmed Stage

The system can be disarmed by using thetransmitter or the ignition key.

Only the driver's door is unlocked by de-pressing once the "UNLOCK ( )" buttonon the transmitter. If you wish to unlock alldoors, press the "UNLOCK ( )" buttonon the transmitter again within 4 seconds.

Whenever the step above is completed,the turn signal lights will blink and audiblealarm will sound twice to indicate that thesystem is disarmed.

NOTE:Although the system is disarmed, thesecurity LED lamp will blink continu-ously. Insert the key in the ignition keycylinder to turn off the lamp.

If any door, trunk lid or engine hood is notopened or the ignition key is not insertedin the ignition switch within 30 seconds,the system will be rearmed.

1) A front or rear door is opened withoutusing the transmitter or the ignition key.

2) The trunk lid is opened without usingthe transmitter or the ignition key.

3) The engine hood is opened.

The alarm horn will sound and the turnsignal lights will blink continuously for 27seconds (This will repeat 3 times). To turnoff the system, unlock the door or trunk lidwith the transmitter or the ignition key.


13

NOTE:When the system is disarmed while the"DOOR" button for the interior light switchis depressed, the interior light will illumi-nate for 30 seconds.

B070E01TG-AAT

Panic Warning

1. Push the "PANIC" button on the trans-mitter.

2. At the same time, the alarm horn willsound and the turn signal lights willblink continuously for 30 seconds.

3. To turn off the system, push the "PANIC"button again on the transmitter.

B070E02TG-A

HTG2006

Battery

2. Remove the old battery from the caseand note the polarity. Make sure thepolarity of the new battery is thesame(+side facing up), then insert it inthe transmitter.

B070E01NF-GAT

Replacing the battery

When the transmitter's battery begins toget weak, it may take several pushes onthe button to lock or unlock the doors, andthe LED will not light. Replace the batteryas soon as possible.

Battery type : CR2032

Replacement instructions:

1. Carefully separate the case with a coinas shown in the illustration.

B070E01TG-A


14 WINDOWS

B060D01TG

1. Driver's door power window switch2. Front passenger's door power window

switch3. Rear passenger's door power window

switch (left side)4. Rear passenger's door power window

switch (right side)5. Window lock switch

B060D01NF-GAT


15

B060A01TG-GAT

POWER WINDOWS

The power windows operate when theignition key is in the "ON" position. Themain switches are located on the driver'sarmrest and control the front and rear win-dows on both sides of the vehicle. Thewindows may be opened by depressingthe appropriate window switch and closedby pulling up the switch. To open the win-dow on the driver's side, press the switchhalfway down. The window moves as longas the switch is operated.

B060A01TG

Open Close

Front Auto Up/Down Windows

The auto up/down window is controlled bythe window switch on the driver's and frontpassenger's armrest.To fully open the window automatically,press the switch fully down. To fully closethe window automatically, pull the switchfully up. In automatic operation, the win-dow will fully open or close even if you letgo of the switch. To stop the window at thedesired position while the window is inoperation, pull up or depress and releasethe switch to the opposite direction of themovement.

NOTE:If the battery has been recharged ordisconnected, the auto up/down windowsystem must be reset as follows;

1. Turn the ignition key to "ON" position.2. Close each window and continue pull-

ing up on each power window switchfor at least 0.5 second after the win-dow is completely closed.

If the auto up/down window is not reset,the feature may not operate properly.

B060A02TG

Driver's side

Front passenger's side


16

!

B060A03TG

Close Open WARNING:o The automatic reverse feature will

only operate when the automatic upwindow operation feature is used. Theautomatic reverse feature of the win-dow will not operate if the window israised using the halfway position onthe power window switch.

o If an object less than 0.16 in.(4 mm) indiameter is caught between the win-dow glass and the upper window chan-nel, the automatic reverse windowmay not detect the resistance and willnot stop and reverse direction. There-fore, always check for any obstruc-tions before raising any window.

B060C01TG-AAT

Front Window Automatic ReverseFeature

If the upward movement of the window isblocked by an object or part of the body, thewindow will detect the resistance and willstop upward movement. The window willthen lower approximately 11.8 in.(30cm)to allow the object to be cleared.

NOTE:The power windows can be operated for30 seconds after the ignition key isturned to the "ACC" or "LOCK" posi-tions, or removed from the ignitionswitch.If the front doors are opened during this30 second period, the power windowscan no longer be operated without theignition key turned to the "ON" position.

Window Lock

B060A04TG

In order to prevent operation of the pas-senger front and rear windows, a windowlock switch is provided on the armrest ofthe driver's door. To disable the powerwindows, press the window lock switch. Torevert to normal operation, press the win-dow lock switch a second time.


17

! WARNING:o Be careful that someone's head,

hands and body are not trapped by aclosing window.

o Never try to operate the main switchon the driver's door and the individualdoor window switch in opposing di-rections at the same time. If this isdone, the window will stop and cannotbe opened or closed.

o Do not leave children alone in the car.o Never leave the vehicle unattended

with the ignition key in the car.


18 SEATS

Driver’s seat

1. Lumbar support control knob2. Seatback recliner control knob3. Seat forward/rearward lock release

knob, Seat height control knob4. Seat warmer switch (If Installed)

Front passenger’s seat

5. Seatback recliner control lever6. Seat forward/rearward lock release

lever7. Seat warmer switch (If Installed)

B080A01TG-AAT

B080A01TG-A


19

!

B090A01TG-AAT

FRONT POWER SEATS

The front seats can be adjusted appropri-ately by using the control knob of the seat.Before driving, adjust the seat to the properposition so as to easily control the steeringwheel, pedals and switches on the instru-ment panel.

CAUTION:Do not operate two knobs at the sametime.

WARNING:o Never attempt to adjust the seat while

the vehicle is moving. This could re-sult in loss of control or an accidentcausing death, serious injury, or prop-erty damage.

o Do not sit or lean unnecessarily closeto the airbag.

!

B090B01NF-GAT

Adjusting Seat Forward and Rear-ward

Pull the control knob forward or rearwardto move the seat forward or rearward to thedesired position. Release the control knoband the seat will remain at that position.

HTG2037

B090D01NF-GAT

Adjusting Seatback Angle

Pull the upper portion of the control knobforward or backward to recline the seatbackto the desired position. Release the con-trol knob and the seatback will remain inthat position.

HTG2040


20

! WARNING:To minimize the risk of personal injury inthe event of a collision or a sudden stop,both the driver's and passenger'sseatback should remain in an uprightposition while the car is in motion. Theprotection provided by the seat beltsand airbags may be reduced significantlywhen the seatbacks are reclined. Thereis a greater risk that the seat occupantswill slide under the belt resulting in seri-ous injury if a crash occurs when theseatbacks are reclined. The seat beltcannot provide full protection to an oc-cupant if the seatback is reclined.

B080D02JM-AAT

Adjustable Headrests

Headrests are designed to help reducethe risk of neck injuries.To raise the headrest, pull it up. To lowerthe headrest, push it down while pressingthe lock knob. To remove the headrest,raise it as far as it can go then press the lockknob while pulling upward. This shouldonly be done when the seat is not occu-pied.

B080D01TG

Lock knob

! WARNING:

o For maximum effectiveness in caseof an accident the headrest should beadjusted so the middle of the head-rest is at the same height as the top ofthe occupant's eyes. For this reason,the use of a cushion that holds thebody away from the seatback is notrecommended.

o Do not operate the vehicle with theheadrests removed as injury to theoccupants may occur in the event ofan accident. Headrests may provideprotection against neck injuries whenproperly adjusted.

B080D02TG


21

B081D01LZ-AAT

Tilting Headrest Forward and Rear-ward

The headrest may be tilted forward to threedifferent positions by pulling the headrestforward. To adjust the headrest rearward,pull it fully forward to the farthest positionand release it. Adjust the headrest so thatit properly supports the head and neck.

HTG2045

B090E01TG-AAT

Lumbar Support Control(Driver's seat only)

To adjust the lumbar support, press thecontrol switch on the outboard side of theseat cushion. To increase the amount oflumbar support, press the front portion ofthe switch. To decrease lumbar support,press the rear portion of the switch.

HTG2042-2

B083D01NF-AAT

Active Headrests (If Installed)

The active headrest is designed to moveforward and upward during a rear impact.This helps to prevent the driver's and frontpassenger's head from moving backwardand thus helps prevent neck injuries.

HNF2041-1

! WARNING:o Do not adjust the headrest height

while the vehicle is in motion.


22

NOTE:o If the battery has been recharged or

disconnected, the driving positionmemory will be lost.

o The buzzer sounds 10 times if there isa malfunction of the integratedmemory system. Have the I.M.Schecked by an authorized Hyundaidealer.

I.M.S control switch

Located on the driver's door trim and func-tions as follows;

SET: When the button is pressed, the sys-tem will memorize the position witha beep sound.

1,2 :Used to memorize 2 positions.

I.M.S (INTEGRATEDMEMORY SYSTEM)

B090E01TG-AAT

(If Installed)

The Integrated Memory System controlsare located on the driver's door trim. Afteradjusting the position of the driver's seat,outside rearview mirrors and steeringwheel (with electric tilt and telescopic col-umn), use the I.M.S to memorize thosepositions. Two different driving positionprofiles can be entered in the I.M.S. Afterthe positions are memorized by the sys-tem, when the ignition key is to the "ON"position, the memorized position is ad-justed automatically.

B090E01TG

B090C01Y-AAT

Seat Cushion Height Adjustment(Driver's seat only)

Move the front portion of the control knobup or down to raise or lower the front partof the seat cushion. Move the rear portionof the control knob up or down to raise orlower the rear part of the seat cushion.

HTG2041


23

! CAUTION:In the following conditions, the I.M.S willnot memorize a position.

1. When the "1" or "2" button is notpushed within five seconds.

2. When the seat is being adjusted.3. When the key is not in the "ON" posi-

tion.4. When the shift lever is positioned in

other than "P" position.

To memorize a position

1. Place the shift lever into "P" while theignition switch is ON.

2. Adjust the driver's seat, outside rear-view mirrors and steering wheel (withelectric tilt and telescopic column) to thedesired position.

3. Push the "SET" button on the I.M.S untilthe signal beeps.

4. Within five seconds, push button "1" or"2" until the signal beeps twice. Thebeep sounds mean that the positionsare memorized in the I.M.S.

Reverse Parking Aid Function

While the vehicle is moving backward, theoutside rearview mirror(s) will move down-ward to aid reverse parking. According tothe position of the outside rearview mirrorswitch knob, the outside rearview mirror(s)will operate as follows:

B090E02TG

!

To activate the memorized position

1. Place the shift lever into "P" while theignition switch is ON.

2. When you push button "1" or "2", thedriving position will be automaticallyadjusted to the position recorded forthat button.

CAUTION:In the following conditions, the I.M.S willnot activate.

1. When the key is in the "OFF" positon.2. When the vehicle is running above

1.86 MPH (3 km/h).3. When the seat is being adjusted.4. When the shift lever is positioned in

other than "P" position.


24

!B100A01TG-AAT

SEAT WARMER (If Installed)

The front seats can be electrically heatedindividually when the ignition switch is ON.When the switch is ON, a number rangingfrom 1 to 5 is displayed on the switch (5 =warmest setting).To turn off the seat warmer, set the switchto 0.

NOTE:o The seat warmer may not operate if

the ambient temperature is warm.o If the seat warmer doesn't operate

when the ambient temperature islower than 75.2°F (24°C), it must bechecked at an authorized dealer.

B100A01TG

WARNING:Do not turn on the seat warmers if theseat is occupied by someone who can-not monitor the temperature and turn offthe seat warmer if it becomes too warm.The seat warmers should not be turnedon when children, the elderly, ill people,and sleeping people occupy the seat.

L : When the remote control outside rear-view mirror switch knob is selected tothe "L" position, both outside rearviewmirrors will move downward.

R : When the remote control outside rear-view mirror switch knob is selected tothe "R" position, only the passenger'soutside rearview mirror will movedownward.

Neutral : When the remote control out-side rearview mirror switch knobis placed in the middle position,the outside rearview mirrors willnot operate while the vehicle ismoving backward.

NOTE:The outside rearview mirrors will auto-matically revert to the original positionsunder the following conditions:

1. Ignition key is in the "LOCK" position.2. Shift lever is moved to any position

except "R".3. Remote control outside rearview mir-

ror switch knob is placed in the middleposition.


25

B110A01NF-GAT

REAR SEATFolding Rear Seatbacks

o To unlock the seatback, pull theseatback release lever, then pull for-ward on the seatback panel.

o When you return the seatback to itsupright position, always be sure it haslocked into position by pulling and push-ing on the top of the seatback.

B110A01TG

! WARNING:The purpose of the folding rearseatbacks is to allow you to carry longerobjects than could otherwise be accom-modated. Do not allow passengers to siton top of the folded down seatback, whilethe car is moving as this is not a properseating position and no seat belts areavailable for use. This could result inserious injury or death in case of anaccident or sudden stop. Objects car-ried on the folded down seatback shouldnot extend higher than the top of the frontseats. This could allow cargo to slideforward and cause injury or damageduring sudden stops.

B085D01TG-AAT

Adjustable Headrests

Headrests are designed to help reducethe risk of neck injuries.To raise the headrest, pull it up. To lowerthe headrest, push it down while pressingthe lock knob. To remove the headrest,raise it as far as it can go then press the lockknob while pulling upward. This shouldonly be done when the seat is not occu-pied.

B080D01TG-1

Lock knob


26

!B140A01S-AAT

REAR SEAT WARNING

For the safety of all passengers, luggageor other cargo should not be piled higherthan the top of the seatback. In addition, donot place objects on the rear shelf as theymay move forward during braking or in anaccident and may strike and injure vehiclepassengers.

B140A01TG

B120A01NF-GAT

REAR SEATBACK SAFETY LOCK

If the rear seatback lock knob (located onthe backside of the rear seatback) is in the"LOCK" position when the rear seatbacksare upright and closed, it will not be pos-sible to fold the rear seatback by using theseatback release lever. In this instance,move the lock knob to the "UNLOCK" po-sition and fold the rear seatback. The rearseatback lock knob is designed to provideprotection from unauthorized entry into thetrunk.

B120A01TG

! WARNING:

B080D02TG-1

o For maximum effectiveness in case ofan accident the headrest should beadjusted so the middle of the headrestis at the same height as the top of theoccupant's eyes. For this reason, theuse of a cushion that holds the bodyaway from the seatback should not berecommended.

o Do not operate vehicle with the head-rests removed as injury to the occu-pants may occur in the event of anaccident. Headrests may provide pro-tection against neck injuries whenproperly adjusted.


27SEAT BELTS

B150B03Y-AAT

Infant or Small Child

All 50 states have child restraint laws. Youshould be aware of the specific require-ments in your state. Child and/or infantsafety seats must be properly placed andinstalled in the rear seat. Information aboutthe use of these restraints begins on page1-34.

!

B150A01S-AAT

SEAT BELT PRECAUTIONS

WARNING:All occupants of the vehicle must weartheir seat belts at all times. This vehicleis equipped with a Supplemental Re-straint (Airbag) System as discussedbeginning on page 1-44. The seat beltsmust be used in conjunction with thesupplemental airbag system. State lawsrequire that some or all occupants of thevehicle use seat belts. The possibility ofincreased injury or severity of injury inan accident will be increased if this el-ementary safety precaution is not ob-served. In addition, follow the other in-structions provided in this section.

! WARNING:Every person in your vehicle needs to beproperly restrained at all times, includ-ing infants and children. In a collision, anunrestrained child can become a "mis-sile" inside the car. The force required tohold a child on your lap could be so greatthat you could not hold the child. Anychild riding in the vehicle should alwaysbe in a proper restraint in the rear seat ofthe vehicle.

NOTE:Small children are best protected frominjury in an accident when properly re-strained in the rear seat by a child re-straint system that meets the require-ments of the Federal Motor VehicleSafety Standards. Before buying anychild restraint system, make sure that ithas a label certifying that it meets Fed-eral Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213.The restraint must be appropriate foryour child's height and weight. Checkthe label on the child restraint for thisinformation. See page 1-34.

B150C02A-AAT

Larger Children

Children who are too large for child re-straint systems should always occupy therear seat and use the available lap/shoul-der belts. The lap portion should be fas-tened snug on the hips and as low aspossible. Check belt fit periodically. Achild's squirming could put the belt out ofposition. Children are afforded the mostsafety in the event of an accident whenthey are restrained by a proper restraintsystem in the rear seat. If a larger child(over age 13) must be seated in the frontseat, the child should be securely re-strained by the available lap/shoulder beltand the seat should be placed in therearmost position. Children under the ageof 13 should be restrained securely in therear seat. NEVER place a child under theage of 13 in the front seat. NEVER place arear facing child seat in the front seat of avehicle.


28

B150D01A-AAT

Pregnant Women

The use of a seat belt is recommended forpregnant women to lessen the chance ofinjury in an accident. When a seat belt isused, the lap belt portion should be placedas low and snugly as possible on the hips,not across the abdomen. For specific rec-ommendations, consult a physician.

B150E01A-AAT

Injured Person

A seat belt should be used when an injuredperson is being transported. When this isnecessary, you should consult a physicianfor recommendations.

B150F01A-AAT

One Person Per Belt

Two people (including children) shouldnever attempt to use a single seat belt. Thiscould increase the severity of injuries incase of an accident.

WARNING:Sitting in a reclined position or lying downwhen your vehicle is in motion can bedangerous. Even if you buckle up, yourseat belts can't do their job when you'rereclined.The shoulder belt can't do its job be-cause it won't be against your body.Instead, it will be in front of you. In a crash,you could go into it with great force,receiving serious neck or other injuries.The lap belt can't do its job either. In acrash, the belt could go up over yourabdomen. The belt forces would be ap-plied there, not at your strong pelvicbones. This could cause serious internalinjuries. For proper protection when thevehicle is in motion, have the seatbackupright. Then sit back in the seat andwear your seat belt properly.

!B150G01A-AAT

Do Not Lie Down

To reduce the chance of injuries in theevent of an accident and to achieve maxi-mum effectiveness of the restraint system,all passengers should be sitting up and thefront seats should be in an upright positionwhen the car is moving. A seat belt cannotprovide proper protection if the person islying down in the rear seat or if the front seatis in a reclined position.


29

B160C01A-AAT

Keep Belts Clean and Dry

Seat belts should be kept clean and dry. Ifbelts become dirty, they can be cleaned byusing a mild soap solution and warm wa-ter. Bleach, dye, strong detergents or abra-sives should not be used because theymay damage and weaken the fabric.

B160D01A-AAT

When to Replace Seat Belts

Entire in-use seat belt assembly or assem-blies should be replaced if the vehicle hasbeen involved in an accident. This shouldbe done even if no damage is visible.Additional questions concerning seat beltoperation should be directed to yourHyundai Dealer.

B170A04A-GAT

HEIGHT ADJUSTABLE FRONT SEATSHOULDER BELT

You can adjust the height of the shoulderbelt anchor to one of 4 positions for maxi-mum comfort and safety.If the height of the adjusting seat belt is toonear your neck, you will not be getting themost effective protection. The shoulderportion should be adjusted so that it liesacross your chest and midway over yourshoulder nearest the door and not yourneck.To adjust the height of the seat belt anchor,lower or raise the height adjuster into anappropriate position.

HTG2058

!

B160A01A-AAT

CARE OF SEAT BELTS

Seat belt systems should never be disas-sembled or modified. In addition, careshould be taken to assure that seat beltsand belt hardware are not damaged byseat hinges, doors or other abuse.

WARNING:When you return the rear seatback to itsupright position after the rear seatbackwas folded down, be careful not to dam-age the seat belt webbing or buckle. Besure that the webbing or buckle does notget caught or pinched in the rear seat.

B160B01A-AAT

Periodic Inspection

It is recommended that all seat belts beinspected periodically for wear or damageof any kind. Parts of the system that aredamaged should be replaced as soon aspossible.


30

!

To raise the height adjuster, pull it up. Tolower it, push it down while pressing theheight adjuster button.Release the button to lock the anchor intoposition. Try sliding the height adjusterdown to make sure that it has locked intoposition.

WARNING:o The height adjuster must be in the

locked position when the vehicle ismoving.

o Misadjustment of height of the shoul-der belt could reduce the effective-ness of the seat belt in a crash.

B180A01TG-AAT

SEAT BELT-Driver's 3-Point Systemwith Emergency Locking Retractor

To fasten your seat belt, pull it out of theretractor and insert the metal tab into thebuckle. There will be an audible "click"when the tab locks into the buckle.The seat belt automatically adjusts to theproper length only after the lap belt portionis adjusted manually so that it fits snuglyaround your hips. If you lean forward in aslow, easy motion, the belt will extend andlet you move around. If there is a suddenstop or impact, the belt will lock into posi-tion. It will also lock if you try to lean forwardtoo quickly.

B180A01NF

NOTE:If the driver's seat belt is not fastenedwhen the ignition key is turned to the"ON" position, the seat belt warning lightwill blink and the warning chime will soundfor approximately six seconds to re-mind the driver to fasten the driver'sseat belt. See page 1-70.


31

When the seat belt is fully extended fromthe retractor to allow the installation of achild restraint system, the seat belt opera-tion changes to allow the belt to retract, butnot to extend (Automatic Locking Retrac-tor Type). See page 1-39.

NOTE:o Although the combination retractor

provides the same level of protectionfor seated passengers in either emer-gency or automatic locking modes, itis recommended that seated passen-gers use the emergency locking fea-ture for improved convenience. Theautomatic locking function is intendedto facilitate child restraint installa-tion. To convert from the automaticlocking feature to the emergency lock-ing operation mode, allow the unbuck-led seat belt to fully retract.

o If the front passenger's seat belt is notfastened when the ignition key isturned to the "ON" position, the seatbelt warning light on the center fasciapanel will blink for approximately sixseconds to remind the front passen-ger to fasten the front passenger'sseat belt. See page 1-70.

WARNING:o For maximum restraint system pro-

tection, the seat belts must always beused whenever the car is moving.

o Seat belts are most effective whenseatbacks are in the upright position.

o Children must always be seatbeltedin the rear seats. Never allow childrento ride in the front passenger seat.

o The shoulder belt should be positionedmidway over the shoulder nearestthe door for the most effective protec-tion. Never wear the seat belt underthe arm nearest the door. Wearing thebelt under the arm nearest the doorcould cause serious or fatal injuries inan accident.

o Avoid wearing twisted seat belts. Atwisted belt can't do its job as well. Ina collision, it could even cut into you.Be sure the belt webbing is straightand not twisted.

o Be careful not to damage the beltwebbing or hardware. If the belt web-bing or hardware is damaged, replaceit.

!B190A01TG-AAT

SEAT BELTS-Front Passenger andRear Seat 3-Point System with Com-bination Locking Retractor

Combination retractor type seat belts areinstalled in the rear seat positions to helpaccommodate the installation of child re-straint systems. Although a combinationretractor is also installed in the front passen-ger seat position, Hyundai strongly recom-mends that children always be seated in therear seat. NEVER place any infant restraintsystem in the front seat of the vehicle.This type of seat belt combines the fea-tures of both an emergency locking retrac-tor seat belt and an automatic lockingretractor seat belt. To fasten your seat belt,pull it out of the retractor and insert themetal tab into the buckle. There will be anaudible "click" when the tab locks into thebuckle. When not securing a child restraint,the seat belt operates in the same way asthe driver's seat belt (Emergency LockingRetractor Type). It automatically adjusts tothe proper length only after the lap beltportion of the seat belt is adjusted manu-ally so that it fits snugly around your hips.


32

WARNING:You should place the lap belt portion aslow as possible and snugly across yourhips, not on your waist. If the lap belt islocated too high on your waist, it mayincrease the chance of injury in the eventof a collision. Both arms should not beunder or over the belt. Rather, one shouldbe over and the other under, as shown inthe illustration.Never wear the seat belt under the armnearest the door.

!

B200A01A-AAT

Adjusting Your Seat Belt

B200A01NF

B200A01NF-AAT

SEAT BELTS - Rear Seat Center 3-Point System With CombinationLocking Retractor

1. Pull the seat belt out of the rear seatpackage tray.

2. Before fastening the rear seat centerbelt, confirm the metal tab (a) and buckle(b) are latched together.

B220A01TG

The seat belt is released by pressing therelease button in the locking buckle. Whenit is released, the belt should automaticallydraw back into the retractor.If this does not happen, check the belt to besure it is not twisted, then try again.

B210A01A-AAT

To Release the Seat Belt

B210A01NF


33

There will be an audible "click" when thetab locks in the buckle. The seat belt auto-matically adjusts to the proper length onlyafter the lap belt is adjusted manually sothat it fits snugly around your hips. If youlean forward in a slow, easy motion, thebelt will extend and let you move around.If there is a sudden stop or impact, the beltwill lock into position. It will also lock if youtry to lean forward too quickly.

! WARNING:o When using the rear seat center belt,

you must lock all metal tabs and buck-les. If any metal tab or buckle is notlocked, it will increase the chance ofinjury in the event of collision.

o Never unlock the metal tab (a) and thebuckle (b) with the following excep-tions.(1)In case of folding rear seatbacks

down.(2)If transporting an object on the

rear seat may cause damage tothe rear seat center belt.

o Lock the metal tab (a) and the buckle(b) immediately after folding rearseatbacks up.

B180A01NF-E

3. After confirming that (a) and (b) arelatched, pull the seat belt out of theretractor and insert the metal tab (c) intothe buckle (d).

B220A02TG


34

!

B220A03TG

WARNING:

o To disconnect the metal tab (a) fromthe buckle (b), insert a narrow-endedtool into the groove located on thebuckle (b).

B220C02A-GAT

To Release the Seat Belt

When you want to release the seat belt,press the button in the locking buckle.

! WARNING:When fastening the outboard seat beltsor the center seat belt, make sure theyare inserted into the correct buckles toobtain maximum protection from the seatbelt system and assure proper opera-tion.

CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEM

B230A03Y-AAT

Children riding in the car should sit in therear seat and must always be properlyrestrained to minimize the risk of injury inan accident, sudden stop or sudden ma-neuver. According to accident statisticsprovided by the National Highway TrafficSafety Administration (NHTSA), childrenare safer when properly restrained in therear seats than in the front seat. Largerchildren not in a child restraint should useone of the seat belts provided. All 50 stateshave child restraint laws. You should beaware of the specific requirements in yourstate. Child and/or infant safety seats mustbe properly placed and installed in the rearseat. You must use a commercially avail-able child restraint system that meets therequirements of the Federal Motor VehicleSafety Standards (FMVSS).Children could be injured or killed in acrash if their restraints are not properlysecured. For small children and babies, achild seat or infant seat must be used.Before buying a particular child restraintsystem, make sure it fits your car seat andseat belts, and fits your child. Follow all theinstructions provided by the manufacturerwhen installing the child restraint system.

B220C01TG


35

!WARNING:o Children who are too large to be in a

child restraint should sit in the rearseat and be restrained with the avail-able lap/shoulder belts. Never allowchildren to ride in the front passengerseat.

o Always make sure that the shoulderbelt portion of the lap/shoulder belt ispositioned midway over the shoulderand never across the neck or behindthe back. Moving the child closer to-ward the seat belt buckle may helpprovide a good shoulder belt fit. Thelap belt portion of the lap/shoulder beltmust always be positioned as low aspossible on the child's hips, and assnug as possible.

o If the seat belt will not properly fit thechild, Hyundai recommends the useof an approved booster seat in therear seat in order to raise the child'sseating height so that the seat belt willproperly fit the child.

WARNING:Before purchasing a booster seat,make sure that it meets applicableFederal Motor Vehicle Safety Stan-dards (FMVSS) and that it is satisfac-tory for use with this vehicle.

o Never allow a child to stand up orkneel on the seat.

o Never use an infant carrier or a childsafety seat that "hooks" over aseatback; it may not provide ad-equate security in an accident.

o Never allow a child to be held in aperson's arms while they are in amoving vehicle, as this could result inserious injury to the child in the eventof an accident or a sudden stop. Hold-ing a child in a moving vehicle doesnot provide the child with any meansof protection during an accident, evenif the person holding the child is wear-ing a seat belt.

!! WARNING:o A child restraint system must be

placed in the rear seat. Never installa child or infant seat on the frontpassenger's seat. Should an accidentoccur and cause the passenger'sfront airbag to deploy, it could se-verely injure or kill an infant or childseated in an infant or child seat. Thusonly use a child restraint in the rearseat of your vehicle.

o A safety belt or child restraint systemcan become very hot if it is left in aclosed vehicle on a sunny day, evenif the outside temperature does notfeel hot. Be sure to check the seatcover and buckles before placing achild there.

o When the child restraint system is notin use, store it in the trunk or fasten itwith a safety belt so that it will not bethrown forward in the case of a sud-den stop or an accident.


36

B230B01NF-AAT

Using a Child Restraint System

For small children and babies, the use ofa child seat or infant seat is required. Thischild seat or infant seat should be of appro-priate size for the child and should beinstalled in accordance with themanufacturer's instructions. It is furtherrequired that the seat be placed in thevehicle's rear seat. Your vehicle is pro-vided with three child restraint hook hold-ers for installing the child seat or infantseat.

2. Route the child restraint seat tether strapover the seatback.

B230C02TG

Rear seat package tray

Tether Strap Hook

Child Restraint Hook Holders

B230C04A-AAT

Installing a Child Restraint Seat withthe "Tether Anchorage" System

Three child restraint hook holders are lo-cated on the rear seat package tray.

To install the child restraint seat

1. Open the tether anchor cover on therear seat package tray.

B230C01NF

Tether Anchor Cover Child RestraintHook Holder

Front of Vehicle


37

B230D04E-AAT

Securing the Child Restraint Seatwith the "ISOFIX" system

Some child seat manufacturers make safetyseats that are labeled as ISOFIX or ISOFIX-compatible child seats. These seats in-clude two rigid or webbing mounted at-tachments that connect to two ISOFIX an-chors at specific seating positions in yourvehicle. This type of child seat eliminatesthe need to use seat belts to attach the childseat for forward-facing child seats.ISOFIX anchors have been provided inyour vehicle. The ISOFIX anchors are lo-cated in the left and right outboard rearseating positions.

B230D01NF

! WARNING:o Do not install a child restraint seat at

the center of the rear seat using thevehicle's outboard rear seat ISOFIXanchors. The ISOFIX anchors are onlyprovided for the left and right out-board rear seating positions. Do notmisuse the ISOFIX anchors by at-tempting to attach a child safety seatin the middle of the rear seat positionto the ISOFIX anchors. In a crash, thechild seat ISOFIX attachments maynot be strong enough to secure thechild restraint seat properly in thecenter of the rear seat and may break,causing serious injury or death.

!

For vehicles with adjustable headrests,route the tether strap under the head-rest and between the headrest posts,otherwise route the tether strap over thetop of the seatback.

3. Connect the tether strap hook to thechild restraint hook holder and tightento secure the seat.

WARNING:Do not mount more than one child re-straint to a single tether or to a childrestraint lower anchorage point. The im-proper increased load may cause theanchorage points or tether anchor tobreak, causing serious injury or death.

Their locations are shown in the illustra-tion. There is no ISOFIX anchor providedfor the center rear seating position.


38

!! WARNING:o When using the vehicle’s “ISOFIX”

system to install a child restraint sys-tem in the rear seat, all unused ve-hicle rear seat belt metal latch platesor tabs must be latched securely intheir seat belt buckles and the seatbelt webbing must be retracted be-hind the child restraint to prevent thechild from reaching and taking hold ofunretracted seat belts. Unlatchedmetal latch plates or tabs may allowthe child to reach the unretracted seatbelts which may result in strangula-tion and a serious injury or death tothe child in the child restraint.

o Do not mount more than one childrestraint to a single tether or to a childrestraint lower anchorage point. Theimproper increased load may causethe anchorage points or tether an-chor to break, causing serious injuryor death.

o Attach the ISOFIX or ISOFIX-compat-ible child seat only to the appropriatelocations shown.

The ISOFIX anchors are located betweenthe seatback and the seat cushion of therear seat left and right outboard seatingpositions.

B230D02TG

ISOFIX Anchor

ISOFIX AnchorPosition Indicator

B230D03TG

WARNING:o Always follow the installation and use

instructions provided by the manu-facturer of the child restraint.

Follow the child seat manufacturer's in-structions to properly install safety seatswith ISOFIX or ISOFIX-compatible attach-ments.

Once you have installed the ISOFIX childrestraint seat, assure that the seat is prop-erly attached to the ISOFIX and tetheranchors. Also, test the safety seat beforeyou place the child in it. Tilt the seat fromside to side. Also try to tug the seat forward.Check to see if the anchors hold the seatin place.


39

To install a child restraint system in the rearseats, extend the shoulder/lap belt entirelyfrom its retractor until a "click" is felt. Thiswill engage the seat belt retractor auto-matic locking feature, which allows theseat belt to retract but not extend. Install thechild restraint system, buckle the seat beltand allow the seat belt to take up any slack.Make sure that the lap portion of the belt istight around the child restraint system andthe shoulder portion of the belt is posi-tioned so that it cannot interfere with thechild's head or neck. Also, double check tobe sure that the retractor has engaged theAutomatic Locking feature by trying to ex-tend webbing out of the retractor. If theretractor is in the Automatic Locking mode,the belt will be locked. After installation ofthe child restraint system, try to move it in alldirections to be sure the child restraint sys-tem is securely installed. If you need totighten the belt, pull more webbing towardthe retractor. When you unbuckle the seatbelt and allow it to retract, the retractor willautomatically revert back to its normal seatedpassenger Emergency Locking usage con-dition.

B230G01TG-AAT

Child Restraint System Installationon Rear Seats

B230G01NF

On outboard rear seats

B235G01TG

On rear seat center position

! WARNING:If the child restraint seat is not anchoredproperly, the risk of a child being seri-ously injured or killed in a collision greatlyincreases.


40

! WARNING:o If the retractor is not in the Automatic

Locking mode, the child restraint sys-tem can move when your vehicle turnsor stops abruptly.

o Do not install any child restraint sys-tem in the front passenger seat.Should an accident occur and causethe passenger side airbag to deploy,it could severely injure or kill an infantor child seated in an infant or childseat. Therefore, only use a child re-straint system in the rear seat of yourvehicle.

o Before installing Child Restraint Sys-tems to vehicles fitted with CurtainAirbags, always refer to safety no-tices for Curtain Airbag systems inthis manual. Whenever installing childrestraints, use only approved devicesand refer to the "Child Restraint Sys-tem" section to ensure correct instal-lation and occupant protection is maxi-mized.

NOTE:o Before installing the child restraint

system in any seating position, readthe instructions supplied by the childrestraint system manufacturer.

o If the seat belt does not operate asdescribed, have the system checkedimmediately by your authorizedHyundai dealer.

B180B01TG-AAT

Pre-tensioner Seat Belt

Your Hyundai vehicle is equipped withdriver's and front passenger's pre-tensionerseat belts. The purpose of the pre-tensioneris to make sure that the seat belts fit tightlyagainst the occupant's body in certain fron-tal collisions. The pre-tensioner seat beltscan be activated alone or, where the fron-tal collision is severe enough, togetherwith the airbags.

HXG229


41

!

The seat belt pre-tensioner system con-sists mainly of the following components.Their locations are shown in the illustra-tion:

1. SRS airbag warning light2. Retractor pre-tensioner assembly3. SRS control module4. Buckle pre-tensioner assembly

B180B01TG

1

23

Driver's airbag

Passenger'sairbag WARNING:

To obtain maximum benefit from a pre-tensioner seat belt:

1. The seat belt must be worn correctly.2. The seat belt must be adjusted to the

correct position.3. Be sure you and your passengers

always wear seat belts and wear themproperly.4

! CAUTION:Do not put anything near the buckle.Placing objects near the buckle can ad-versely affect the buckle pre-tensionerand may increase the risk of personalinjury in the event of a collision.

If the system senses excessive seat belttension on the driver or passenger's seatbelt when the pre-tensioner activates, theload limiter inside the pre-tensioner willrelease some of the pressure on the af-fected seat belt.

When the vehicle stops suddenly, or if theoccupant tries to lean forward too quickly,the seat belt retractor will lock into position.In certain frontal collisions, the pre-tensioner will activate and pull the seat beltinto tighter contact against the occupant'sbody. The buckle pre-tensioner (which isinstalled in the buckle) will also pull theseat belt into the buckle.


42

!

AIRBAG

CAUTION:o The sensor that activates the SRS

airbag is connected with the pre-tensioner seat belt. The SRS airbagwarning light on the instrumentpanel will illuminate for approximately6 seconds after the ignition key hasbeen turned to the "ON" position, andthen it should turn off.

o If the pre-tensioner seat belt is notworking properly, this warning lightwill illuminate even if there is no mal-function of the SRS airbag. If the SRSairbag warning light does not illumi-nate when the ignition key is turned tothe "ON" position, remains illuminatedafter approximately 6 seconds whenthe ignition key is turned to the "ON"position, or if it illuminates while thevehicle is being driven, have an au-thorized Hyundai dealer inspect theadvanced SRS airbag system as soonas possible.

! WARNING:o Pre-tensioners are designed to oper-

ate only one time. After activation,pre-tensioner seat belts and seat beltbuckles must be replaced. All seatbelts, of any type, should always bereplaced after they have been wornduring a collision.

o The pre-tensioner seat belt assemblymechanisms become hot during acti-vation. Do not touch the pre-tensionerseat belt assemblies for several min-utes after they have been activated.

o Do not attempt to inspect or replacethe pre-tensioner seat belts yourself.This must be done by an authorizedHyundai dealer.

o Do not strike the pre-tensioner seatbelt or buckle assemblies.

o Do not attempt to service or repair thepre-tensioner seat belt system in anymanner.

NOTE:o Both the driver's and front

passenger's pre-tensioner seat beltswill be activated in certain frontal col-lisions. The pre-tensioner seat beltscan be activated alone or, where thefrontal collision is severe enough,together with the airbags.The pre-tensioners will not be acti-vated if the seat belts are not beingworn at the time of the collision.

o When the pre-tensioner seat belts areactivated, a loud noise may be heardand fine dust, which may appear to besmoke, may be visible in the passen-ger compartment. These are normaloperating conditions and are not haz-ardous.

o Although it is harmless, the fine dustmay cause skin irritation and shouldnot be breathed for prolonged peri-ods. Wash all exposed skin areasthoroughly after an accident in whichthe pre-tensioner seat belts were ac-tivated.


43

! WARNING:o Improper handling of the pre-tensioner

seat belt assemblies, and failure toheed the warnings not to strike, modify,inspect, replace, service or repair thepre-tensioner seat belt and buckleassemblies may lead to improperoperation or inadvertent activationand serious injury.

o Always wear the seat belts when driv-ing or riding in a motor vehicle.


44

B240D01TG-AAT

ADVANCED SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT (AIRBAG) SYSTEM (SRS)

1. Driver's front airbag2. Passenger's front airbag3. Front side impact airbag4. Rear side impact airbag5. Curtain airbag

B240D01TG


45

B240A01TG

The purpose of the SRS is to provide thevehicle's driver and/or the front passengerwith additional protection than that offeredby the seat belt system alone in case of afrontal impact of sufficient severity.The SRS uses sensors to gather informa-tion about the driver's seat position, thedriver's and front passenger's seat beltusage and impact severity.

The driver's seat track position sensor,which is installed on the seat track, deter-mines if the seat is fore or aft of a referenceposition. The seat belt buckle sensors de-termine if the driver and front passenger'sseat belts are fastened. These sensorsprovide the ability to control the SRS de-ployment based on how close the driver'sseat is to the steering wheel, whether or notthe seat belts are fastened, and how se-vere the impact is.

The advanced SRS offers the ability tocontrol the airbag inflation with two levels.A first stage level is provided for moderate-severity impacts. A second stage level isprovided for more severe impacts.

According to the impact severity, seatingposition and seat belt usage, theSRSCM(SRS Control Module) controls theairbag inflation. Failure to properly wearseat belts can increase the risk or severityof injury in an accident.

Additionally, your Hyundai is equippedwith an occupant classification system inthe front passenger's seat. The occupantclassification system detects the presenceof a passenger in the front passenger'sseat and will turn off the front passenger'sairbag under certain conditions. For moredetail, see "Occupant Classification Sys-tem" later in this section.

B240A01TG-AAT

Driver's and Passenger's FrontAirbag

Your Hyundai is equipped with an ad-vanced Supplemental Restraint (Airbag)System. The indications of the system'spresence are the letters "SRS AIRBAG"embossed on the airbag pad cover in thesteering wheel and the passenger's sidefront panel pad above the glove box.

The Hyundai SRS consists of airbags in-stalled under the pad covers in the centerof the steering wheel and the passenger'sside front panel above the glove box.

Driver's Front Airbag


46

CAUTION:If a seat track position sensor or anoccupant classification system is notworking properly, the SRS airbag warn-ing light on the instrument panelwill illuminate because the SRS airbagwarning light is connected with the seattrack position sensor and the occupantclassification system. If the SRS airbagwarning light does not illuminate whenthe ignition key is turned to the "ON"position, remains illuminated after ap-proximately 6 seconds when the ignitionkey is turned to the "ON" position, or if itilluminates while the vehicle is beingdriven, have an authorized Hyundaidealer inspect the advanced SRS airbagsystem as soon as possible.

!

AIRBAG

! WARNING:o Modification to the seat structure can

adversely affect the seat track posi-tion sensor and cause the airbag todeploy at a different level than shouldbe provided.

o Do not place any objects underneaththe front seats as they could damagethe seat track position sensor or in-terfere with the occupant classifica-tion system.

o Do not place any objects that maycause magnetic fields near the frontseat. These may cause a malfunctionof the seat track position sensor.

NOTE:o Be sure to read information about the

SRS on the labels provided on thebackside of the sun visor and in theglove box.

o Advanced airbags are combined withpre-tensioner seat belts to help pro-vide enhanced occupant protectionin frontal crashes. Front airbags arenot intended to deploy in collisions inwhich sufficient protection can be pro-vided by the pre-tensioner seat belt.

o If you are considering modification ofyour vehicle due to a disability, pleasecontact the Hyundai Customer As-sistance Center at 1-800-633-5151.


47

! WARNING:

B240A02TG

Rear impact

Side Impact

Rollover

! WARNING:o The SRS is designed to deploy the

front airbags only when an impact issufficiently severe and when the im-pact angle is within a range as mea-sured from the forward longitudinalaxis of the vehicle. The front airbagswill not deploy in side, rear or rolloverimpacts. Additionally, the airbags willonly deploy once. Seat belts must beworn at all times.

! WARNING:o As its name implies, the SRS is de-

signed to work with, and be supple-mental to the driver's and thepassenger's three point seat belt sys-tems and is not a substitute for them.Therefore, your seat belts must beworn at all times. The airbags deployonly in certain frontal impact condi-tions severe enough to cause signifi-cant injury to the vehicle occupants.

o Sitting too close to a front airbag canresult in serious or fatal injury if thefront airbags inflate. Always sit as farback from airbags as possible.

o Ignoring the SRS airbag warning lightcan result in serious or fatal injury if theairbags, occupant classification sys-tem or pre-tensioners do not work prop-erly. Have your car checked by a dealeras soon as possible if the SRS airbagwarning light alerts you to a potentialproblem.

o Front airbags are not intended to de-ploy in side-impact, rear-impact orrollover crashes. In addition, frontairbags will not deploy in frontalcrashes below the deployment thresh-old.


48

!! WARNING:o The driver should sit back as far as

possible while still maintaining con-trol of the vehicle. If you are sitting tooclose to the airbag, it can cause deathor serious injury when it inflates.

o No objects should be placed over ornear the airbag modules on the steer-ing wheel, instrument panel, and thefront passenger's panel above theglove box, because any such objectcould cause harm if the vehicle is in acrash severe enough to cause theairbags to deploy.

o If the airbags deploy, they must bereplaced by an authorized Hyundaidealer.

o Do not tamper with or disconnect SRSwiring or other components of theSRS system. Doing so could result ininjury, due to accidental deploymentof the airbags or by rendering the SRSinoperative.

o Even though your vehicle is equippedwith the occupant classification sys-tem, do not install a child restraintsystem in the front passenger seatposition. A child restraint systemmust never be placed in the front seat.The infant or child could be severelyinjured or killed by an airbag deploy-ment in case of an accident.

o Do not allow children to ride in thefront passenger seat. If older children(teenagers and older) must ride in thefront seat, make sure they are alwaysproperly belted and the seat is movedback as far as possible.

o For maximum safety protection in alltypes of crashes, all occupants in-cluding the driver should always weartheir seat belts whether or not anairbag is also provided at their seat-ing position to minimize the risk ofsevere injury or death in the event ofa crash. Do not sit or lean unneces-sarily close to the airbag while thevehicle is in motion.

! WARNING:o Sitting improperly or out of position

can result in serious or fatal injury ina crash. All occupants should sit up-right with the seat back in an uprightposition, centered on the seat cush-ion with their seat belt on, legs com-fortably extended and their feet on thefloor until the vehicle is parked andthe ignition key is removed.

o The SRS airbag system must deployvery rapidly to provide protection in acrash. If an occupant is out of positionbecause of not wearing a seat belt, theairbag may forcefully contact the oc-cupant causing serious or fatal inju-

WARNING:


49

10. Driver's and Front Passenger's SeatBelt Buckle Sensors/Buckle Pre-tensioner Assemblies

11. Side Impact Sensor12. Retractor Pre-tensioner Assemblies13. Side Impact Airbag Module14. Curtain Airbag Module

The SRSCM continually monitors all ele-ments while the ignition is "ON" to deter-mine if a frontal or near-frontal impact issevere enough to require front airbag de-ployment or pre-tensioner seat belt de-ployment.

The SRS "AIRBAG" warning light on theinstrument panel will illuminate for ap-proximately 6 seconds after the ignitionkey is turned to the "ON" position or afterthe engine is started, after which the"AIRBAG" warning light should go out.

The airbag modules are located both in thecenter of the steering wheel and in the frontpassenger's panel above the glove box.When the SRSCM detects a sufficientlysevere impact to the front of the vehicle, itwill automatically deploy the front airbags.

B240B01L

B240B01TG-AAT

SRS Components and Functions

The SRS consists of the following compo-nents:

1. Front Impact Sensor2. "PASS AIR BAG OFF" Indicator

(Front passenger's seat only)3. SRS "AIRBAG" warning light4. Knee Bolster5. Passenger's Airbag Module6. Driver's Airbag Module7. SRS Control Module (SRSCM)8. Occupant Classification System

(Front passenger's seat only)9. Driver's Seat Track Position Sensor

B240B02TG


50

B240B02L

Upon deployment, tear seams moldeddirectly into the pad covers will separateunder pressure from the expansion of theairbags. Further opening of the coversthen allows full inflation of the airbags.

A fully inflated airbag, in combination witha properly worn seat belt, slows the driver'sor the passenger's forward motion, reduc-ing the risk of head and chest injury.

After complete inflation, the airbag imme-diately starts deflating, enabling the driverto maintain forward visibility and the abilityto steer or operate other controls.

B240B03L

Passenger's Front Airbag

CAUTION:o Do not install or place any accesso-

ries (drink holder, cassette holder,sticker, etc.) on the front passenger'spanel above the glove box in a vehiclewith a passenger's front airbag. Suchobjects may become dangerous pro-jectiles and cause injury if thepassenger's front airbag inflates.

!

B240B01TG


51

!

Passenger's Front Airbag

B240B05L

!o The SRS can function only when the

ignition key is in the "ON" position. Ifthe SRS "AIRBAG" warning light doesnot illuminate, or continuously re-mains on after illuminating for about 6seconds when the ignition key isturned to the "ON" position, or afterthe engine is started, comes on whiledriving, the SRS is not working prop-erly. If this occurs, have your vehicleimmediately inspected by yourHyundai dealer.

o Before you replace a fuse or discon-nect a battery terminal, turn the igni-tion key to the "LOCK" position andremove the ignition key. Never re-move or replace the airbag relatedfuse(s) when the ignition key is in the"ON" position. Failure to heed thiswarning will cause the SRS "AIRBAG"warning light to illuminate.

o When installing a container of liquidair freshener inside the vehicle, donot place it near the instrument clus-ter nor on the instrument panel sur-face. If there is any leakage from theair freshener onto these areas (in-strument cluster, instrument panel orair ventilator), it may damage theseparts. If the liquid from the air fresh-ener does leak onto these areas, washthem with water immediately.

WARNING:o When the SRS is activated, there may

be a loud noise and fine dust will bereleased throughout the vehicle.These conditions are normal and arenot hazardous. However, the fine dustgenerated during airbag deploymentmay cause skin irritation. Wash allexposed skin areas thoroughly withlukewarm water and a mild soap afteran accident in which the airbags weredeployed.

WARNING:


52

*1) The system judges a person of adultsize as an adult. When a smaller adultsits in the front passenger seat, thesystem may recognize him/her as achild depending on his/her physiqueand posture.

*2) Do not allow children to ride in the frontpassenger seat. When a larger childwho has outgrown a child restraintsystem sits in the front passenger seat,the system may recognize him/her asan adult depending on his/her phy-sique or posture.

*3) Never install a child restraint system onthe front passenger seat.

B990A01TG-AAT

OCCUPANT CLASSIFICATION SYS-TEM

Your vehicle is equipped with an occupantclassification system in the frontpassenger's seat.The Occupant Classification system is de-signed to detect the presence of a prop-erly-seated front passenger and deter-mine if the passenger's front airbag shouldbe enabled (may inflate) or not. The driver'sfront airbag is not affected or controlled bythe Occupant Classification system.

If the front passenger seat is occupied bya person that the system determines to beof adult size sitting properly (sitting uprightwith the seatback in an upright position,centered on the seat cushion with theirseat belt on, legs comfortably extendedand their feet on the floor), the "PASS AIRBAG OFF" indicator will be turned off andthe front passenger's airbag will be able toinflate, if necessary, in frontal crashes.You will find the "PASS AIR BAG OFF"indicator on the center facia panel. Thefollowing table summarizes the function-ing of the system depending on the frontpassenger seat occupant.

B990A01TG-A

Frontpassenger

airbag

Activated

Deactivated

Deactivated

Conditiondetected bythe occupantclassification

system1. Adult*1

2. Child*2 orchild restraintsystem*3

3. Unoccupied

SRSwarning

light

Off

Off

Off

"PASS AIRBAG OFF"

indicator light

Off

On

On


53

! WARNING:!

- Never put a heavy load in the frontpassenger seat.

B990A08O

! WARNING:o Do not do any of the following. Placing

weight on the front passenger's seator sitting out-of-correct position ad-versely affects occupant classifica-tion system operation.

o When an adult is seated in the frontpassenger seat, if the "PASS AIR BAGOFF" indicator is on, turn the ignitionkey to "LOCK" and ask the passen-ger to sit properly (sitting upright withthe seat back in an upright position,centered on the seat cushion withtheir seat belt on, legs comfortablyextended and their feet on the floor).Restart the engine and have the per-son remain in that position for about30 seconds.

Proper seating position

B990A01O

This will allow the system to detect theperson and to enable the passengerairbag. If the "PASS AIR BAG OFF"indicator is still on, turn the ignitionkey to "LOCK" and ask the passengerto sit properly and restart the engineagain. If the "PASS AIR BAG OFF"indicator is still on, ask the passengerto move to the rear seat.

WARNING:


54

NOTE:The "PASS AIR BAG OFF" indicator illu-minates for about 4 seconds after theignition key is turned to the "ON" posi-tion or after the engine is started. If thefront passenger seat is occupied, theoccupant classification sensor will thenclassify the front passenger within ap-proximately 8 seconds after the ignitionis turned on.

- Never lean on the center console.- Never sit on one side of the front

passenger seat.

B990A07O

B990A05O

- Never place feet on the dashboard.

! WARNING:o A smaller-stature adult who is not

seated correctly (for example: seatexcessively reclined, leaning on thecenter console, or hips shifted for-ward in the seat) can cause a condi-tion where the advanced frontal airbagsystem senses less weight than if theoccupant were seated properly (sit-ting upright with the seatback in anupright position, centered on the seatcushion with their seat belt on, legscomfortably extended and their feeton the floor). This condition can resultin an adult potentially beingmisclassified and illumination of the"PASS AIR BAG OFF" indicator.

- Never excessively recline the frontpassenger seatback.

- Never sit with hips shifted towardsthe front of the seat.

B990A03O

B990A02O


55

! CAUTION:If the occupant classification system isnot working properly, the SRS airbagwarning light on the instrumentpanel will illuminate because thepassenger's front airbag is connectedwith the occupant classification system.If there is a malfunction of the occupantclassification system, the "PASS AIRBAG OFF" indicator will illuminate andthe passenger's front airbag will not in-flate in frontal impact crashes even ifthere is no occupant in the frontpassenger's seat. If the SRS airbag warn-ing light does not illuminate when theignition key is turned to the "ON" posi-tion, remains illuminated after approxi-mately 6 seconds when the ignition keyis turned to the "ON" position, or if itilluminates while the vehicle is beingdriven, have an authorized Hyundaidealer inspect the occupant classifica-tion system and the SRS airbag systemas soon as possible.

! WARNING:o Even though your vehicle is equipped

with the occupant classification sys-tem, do not install a child restraintsystem in the front passenger's seat.A child restraint system must neverbe placed in the front seat. Childrenwho are too large for child restraintsystems should always occupy therear seat and use the available lap/shoulder belts. Children are affordedthe most safety in the event of anaccident when they are restrained bya proper restraint system in the rearseat.

o If the "PASS AIR BAG OFF" indicatoris illuminated when the frontpassenger's seat is occupied by anadult sitting properly (sitting uprightwith the seatback in an upright posi-tion, centered on the seat cushionwith their seat belt on, legs comfort-ably extended and their feet on thefloor), have that person sit in the rearseat.

! WARNING:o If you change the weight on the front

passenger seat, the "PASS AIR BAGOFF" indicator may be turned on or offfor a few seconds, disabling or en-abling the passenger airbags.

o Do not modify or replace the frontpassenger seat. Don't place anythingon or attach anything such as a blan-ket or after market seat heater to thefront passenger seat. This can ad-versely affect the occupant classifi-cation system.

o Do not sit on sharp objects such astools when occupying the front pas-senger seat. This can adversely af-fect the occupant classification sys-tem.

o Do not use accessory seat covers onthe front seats.


56

WARNING:o The side impact airbag is supplemen-

tal to the driver's and the passenger'sseat belt systems and is not a substi-tute for them. Therefore your seatbelts must be worn at all times whilethe vehicle is in motion. The airbagsdeploy only in certain side impactconditions severe enough to causesignificant injury to the vehicle occu-pants.

o For best protection from the side im-pact airbag system and to avoid beinginjured by the deploying side impactairbag, both front seat occupantsshould sit in an upright position withthe seat belt properly fastened. Thedriver's hands should be placed onthe steering wheel at the 9:00 and3:00 positions. The passenger's armsand hands should be placed on theirlaps.

o Do not use any accessory seat cov-ers.Use of seat covers could reduce orprevent the effectiveness of the sys-tem.

!

B990B01TGSide impact sensor

Important Safety Notes on the SideImpact Airbag System

Following is a number of safety pointsconcerning this system which should al-ways be observed to ensure risk of injuryis reduced in an accident.

B990B01TG-AAT

Side Impact Airbags

Your Hyundai is equipped with seat-mounted side impact airbag in each frontseat and in the outboard rear seating po-sitions. The purpose of the airbag is toprovide the vehicle's occupants with addi-tional protection than that offered by theseat belt alone. The side impact airbagsare designed to deploy only during certainside-impact collisions, depending on thecrash severity, angle, speed and point ofimpact. The side impact airbags are notdesigned to deploy in all side impact situ-ations, collisions from the front or rear ofthe vehicle or in most rollover situations.

B990B02LZ


57

!o Do not install any accessories on the

side or near the side impact airbag.o Do not use excessive force on the

side of the seat.o Do not place any objects over the

airbag or between the airbag and your-self.

o Do not place any objects (an umbrella,bag, etc.) between the front door andthe front seat. Such objects may be-come dangerous projectiles andcause injury if the supplemental sideimpact airbag inflates.

o To prevent unexpected deploymentof the side impact airbag that mayresult in personal injury, avoid impactto the side impact sensor when theignition key is on.

WARNING:

B990C01JM-AAT

Curtain Airbag

Curtain airbags are located along bothsides of the roof rails above the front andrear doors.They are designed to help protect theheads of the front seat occupants and therear outboard seat occupants in certainside impact collisions.

The curtain airbags are designed to de-ploy only during certain side impact colli-sions, depending on the crash severity,angle, speed and impact. The curtainairbags are not designed to deploy in allside impact situations, collisions from thefront or rear of the vehicle or in most rolloversituations.

HLZ2051

Curtain Airbag

! WARNING:o Before installing child restraints , al-

ways refer to the "Child RestraintSystem" section to ensure correctinstallation and occupant protectionis maximized.

o Make sure that the occupant does nothave any body parts (head, arms &legs) protruding outside the restrain-ing system. If an inflating airbag wasto strike an infant child on the head, itmay cause serious injury.

o Ensure the opening for the CurtainAirbag System remains unobstructedat all times, so that the airbags caninflate properly if needed.

Important Safety Notes for CurtainAirbag Systems

Following is a number of safety pointsconcerning this system which should al-ways be observed to ensure risk of injuryis reduced in an accident.


58

!B240C01NF-AAT

SRS Care

The SRS is virtually maintenance-free andso there are no parts you can safely serviceby yourself. If the SRS "AIRBAG" warninglight does not illuminate, or continuouslyremains on, have your vehicle immedi-ately inspected by your Hyundai dealer.

Any work on the SRS system, such asremoving, installing, repairing, or any workon the steering wheel must be performedby a qualified Hyundai technician. Improperhandling of the SRS system may result inserious personal injury.

HSM393

! WARNING:o The built in coat hooks should only be

used for light weight clothing. Ensurethat clothing pockets are free of anyheavy or sharp objects. When usingcoat hooks, do not hang clothes oncoat hangers.

o The space between the occupant andthe curtain airbag must never be oc-cupied by children, passengers orpets. Occupants should never leanout or have any parts of their bodyprotruding from the window while theengine is running.

o Do not move the sun visor out to coverthe side window if there is an itemattached to it such as garage doorremote control, pens, compact discpocket, air fresheners or the like.These objects may cause injury if theCurtain Airbag is deployed.

o Where sun blinds are fitted to the reardoors, these must not obstruct orimpair the airbag in any way.

o Do not install any accessories orchildren’s toys in the Curtain Airbagdeployment zones, as this may im-pair the operation of the system orthrow parts of them into the vehiclecabin causing injury to occupants ifthe system is deployed.

o To maintain the integrity of the Cur-tain Airbag system, any work, removalor installation of the airbag and asso-ciated components (such as roof lin-ing and side trims) should always beperformed by an authorized Hyundaidealer.

WARNING:


59

WARNING:o Do not install a child restraint system

in the front passenger seat position.A child restraint system must neverbe placed in the front seat. The infantor child could be severely injured byan airbag deployment in case of anaccident.

o Modification to SRS components orwiring, including the addition of anykind of badges to the pad covers ormodifications to the body structure,can adversely affect SRS perfor-mance and lead to possible injury.

o For cleaning the airbag pad covers,use only a soft, dry cloth or one whichhas been moistened with plain water.Solvents or cleaners could adverselyaffect the airbag covers and properdeployment of the system.

! ! WARNING:o No objects should be placed over or

near the airbag modules on the steer-ing wheel, instrument panel, and thefront passenger's panel above theglove box, because any such objectcould cause harm if the vehicle is in acrash severe enough to cause theairbags to inflate.

o If the airbags inflate, they must bereplaced by an authorized Hyundaidealer.

o Do not tamper with or disconnect SRSwiring, or other components of theSRS system. Doing so could result ininjury, due to accidental inflation ofthe airbags or by rendering the SRSinoperative.

o If components of the airbag systemmust be discarded, or if the vehiclemust be scrapped, certain safety pre-cautions must be observed. YourHyundai dealer knows these precau-tions and can give you the necessaryinformation. Failure to follow theseprecautions and procedures could in-crease the risk of personal injury.

! WARNING:o If you sell your vehicle, make certain

that this manual is transferred to thenew owner.

o If your car was flooded and has soakedcarpeting or water on flooring, youshouldn't try to start the engine; havethe car towed to an authorized Hyundaidealer.


60

o Passengers should not place hard orsharp objects between themselvesand the airbags. Carrying hard or sharpobjects on your lap or in your mouth canresult in injuries if an airbag inflates.

o Keep occupants away from the airbagcovers. All occupants should sit up-right, fully back in their seats with theirseat belts on and their feet on the floor.If occupants are too close to the airbagcovers, they could be injured if theairbags inflate.

o Do not attach or place objects on ornear the airbag covers. Any objectattached to or placed on the front or sideimpact airbag covers could interferewith the proper operation of the airbags.

o Do not modify the front seats. Modifi-cation of the front seats could interferewith the operation of the supplementalrestraint system sensing componentsor side impact airbags.

o Do not place items under the frontseats. Placing items under the frontseats could interfere with the operationof the supplemental restraint systemsensing components and wiring har-nesses.

! WARNING:o Sitting improperly or out of position

can result in serious injury or death ina crash.

o Always sit upright with the seatbackin an upright position, centered on theseat cushion with your seat belt on,legs comfortably extended and yourfeet on the floor.

o Never hold an infant or child on yourlap. The infant or child could be seri-ously injured or killed in the event of acrash. All infants and children shouldbe properly restrained in appropriatechild safety seats or seat belts in the rearseat.

B240D01NF-AAT

Additional Safety Precautions

o Never let passengers ride in the cargoarea (trunk) or on top of a folded-downback seat. All occupants should situpright, fully back in their seats withtheir seat belts on and their feet on thefloor.

o Passengers should not move out of orchange seats while the vehicle is mov-ing. A passenger who is not wearing aseat belt during a crash or emergencystop can be thrown against the inside ofthe vehicle, against other occupants, orout of the vehicle.

o Each seat belt is designed to restrainone occupant. If more than one personuses the same seat belt, they could beseriously injured or killed in a collision.

o Do not use any accessories on seatbelts. Devices claiming to improve oc-cupant comfort or reposition the seatbelt can reduce the protection providedby the seat belt and increase the chanceof serious injury in a crash.


61

Adding Equipment to or ModifyingYour Airbag-Equipped Vehicle.

If you modify your vehicle by changingyour vehicle's frame, bumper system, frontend or side sheet metal or ride height, thismay affect the operation of your vehicle'sairbag system.


62 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER AND INDICATOR LIGHTS

B260A01TG-AAT

B260A01TG-A

Conventional Type


63

1. Check Engine - Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)2. Low Oil Pressure Warning Light3. Charging System Warning Light4. SRS (Airbag) Warning Light5. Tachometer6. Turn Signal Indicator Lights7. High Beam Indicator Light8. Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Indicator Lights

(If Installed)9. Automatic Transaxle Position Indicator Light10. CRUISE Indicator Light11. Front Fog Light Indicator Light12. Cruise SET Indicator Light

13. Speedometer14. Low Windshield Washer Fluid Level Warning Light15. Trunk Lid Open Warning Light16. Immobilizer Warning Light17. Coolant Temperature Gauge18. ABS Service Reminder Indicator (SRI) (If Installed)19. Door Ajar Warning Light20. Seat Belt Warning Light (Driver's side)21. Odometer/Trip Computer22. Parking Brake/Low Brake Fluid Level Warning Light23. Low Fuel Warning Light24. Fuel Gauge


64

B260B01TG-AAT

B260B01TG-A

Super - Vision Type


65

1. Tachometer2. High Beam Indicator Light3. Turn Signal Indicator Lights4. Speedometer5. Front Fog Light Indicator Light6. Coolant Temperature Gauge7. Fuel Gauge8. Charging System Warning Light9. Parking Brake/Low Brake Fluid Level Warning Light10. Seat Belt Warning Light (Driver's side)11. Door Ajar Warning Light12. SRS (Airbag) Warning Light13. Check Engine - Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)

14. Low Oil Pressure Warning Light15. Low Windshield Washer Fluid Level Warning Light16. ABS Service Reminder Indicator (SRI) (If Installed)17. CRUISE Indicator Light18. Trunk Lid Open Warning Light19. Immobilizer Warning Light20. Cruise SET Indicator Light21. Automatic Transaxle Position Indicator Light22. Odometer/Trip Computer/Warning Text23. Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Indicator Lights

(If Installed)24. Low Fuel Warning Light


66 WARNING AND INDICATOR LIGHTS

B260D01A-AAT

Turn Signal Indicator Lights

The blinking green arrows on the instru-ment panel show the direction indicatedby the turn signals. If the arrow comes onbut does not blink, blinks more rapidly thannormal, or does not illuminate at all, amalfunction in the turn signal system isindicated. Your dealer should be consultedfor repairs.

B260F01A-AAT

High Beam Indicator Light

The high beam indicator light comes onwhenever the headlights are switched tothe high beam or flash position.

B260G01TG-AAT

Low Oil Pressure WarningLight

CAUTION:If the low oil pressure warning light stayson while the engine is running, seriousengine damage may result. The oil pres-sure warning light comes on wheneverthere is insufficient oil pressure. In nor-mal operation, it should come on whenthe ignition switch is turned on, then goout when the engine is started. If the oilpressure warning light stays on whilethe engine is running, there is a seriousmalfunction.If this happens, stop the car as soon asit is safe to do so, turn off the engine andcheck the oil level. If the oil level is low,fill the engine oil to the proper level andstart the engine again. If the light stayson with the engine running, turn the en-gine off immediately. In any instancewhere the oil light stays on when theengine is running, the engine should bechecked by a Hyundai dealer before thecar is driven again.

!

If your vehicle is equipped with the super-vision type cluster, the warning text is dis-played above the odometer. The warningtext comes on for about 20 seconds. If youpush the RESET button behind the steer-ing wheel, the warning text will go out.

B260G01TG


67

!

B260H02A-AAT

Parking Brake/Low BrakeFluid Level Warning Light

Your Hyundai is equipped with dual-di-agonal braking systems. This means youstill have braking on two wheels even ifone of the dual systems should fail. Withonly one of the dual systems working,more than normal pedal travel and greaterpedal pressure are required to stop thecar. Also, the car will not stop in as short adistance with only half of the brake systemworking. If the brakes fail while you aredriving, shift to a lower gear for additionalengine braking and stop the car as soon asit is safe to do so.

WARNING:If you suspect brake trouble, have yourbrakes checked by a Hyundai dealer assoon as possible. Driving your car witha problem in either the brake electricalsystem or brake hydraulic system isdangerous, and could result in a seriousinjury or death.

Warning Light Operation

The parking brake/brake fluid level warn-ing light should come on when the parkingbrake is applied and the ignition switch isturned to "ON" or "START". After the engineis started, the light should go out when theparking brake is released.If the parking brake is not applied, thewarning light should come on when theignition switch is turned to "ON" or "START",then go out when the engine starts. If thelight comes on at any other time, you shouldslow the vehicle and bring it to a completestop in a safe location off the roadway.The brake fluid level warning light indi-cates that the brake fluid level in the brakemaster cylinder is low and hydraulic brakefluid conforming to DOT 3 or DOT 4 speci-fications should be added. After addingfluid, if no other trouble is found, the carshould be immediately and carefully drivento a Hyundai dealer for inspection. If furthertrouble is experienced, the vehicle shouldnot be driven at all but taken to a dealer bya professional towing service.


68

B260L01TG-AAT

Door Ajar Warning Light andChime

The door ajar warning light warns you thata door is not completely closed and thechime warns you that the key is in theignition switch.

B260L01TG


B260J01TG-AAT

Charging System WarningLight

The charging system warning light shouldcome on when the ignition is turned on,then go out when the engine is running. Ifthe light stays on while the engine is run-ning, there is a malfunction in the electricalcharging system. If the light comes onwhile you are driving, have the systemchecked by your Hyundai dealer as soonas possible. B260J01TG



69

B260K01TG-AAT

Trunk Lid Open WarningLight

This light remains on unless the trunk lid iscompletely closed and latched.

B260K01TG


B260M01TG-AAT

Low Fuel Level Warning Light

The low fuel level warning light comes onwhen the fuel tank is approaching empty.When it comes on, you should add fuel assoon as possible. Driving with the fuellevel warning light on or with the fuel levelbelow "E" can cause the engine to misfireand damage the catalytic converter.

B260M01TG


NOTE :The warning chime only sounds when-ever the key is in the ignition switch andthe driver's side front door is open simul-taneously. The chime sounds until thekey is removed from the ignition switchor the driver's side front door is closed.


70

B260S01TG-AAT

Low Windshield WasherFluid Level Warning Light

The low windshield washer fluid warninglight comes on when the washer fluid res-ervoir is approaching empty. When itcomes on, add washer fluid at your earliestopportunity.

B260S01TG


The driver's seat belt warning light andchime will activate to the following tablewhen the ignition switch is in "ON" position.

B265E01TG-AAT

Seat Belt Warning Lightand Chime (Driver's Side)

*1) Warning pattern repeats 11 times withinterval 24 seconds. If the driver's seatbelt is buckled, the light will stop within6 seconds and chime will stop immedi-ately.

*2) The light will stop within 6 seconds andchime will stop immediately.

Conditions Warning Pattern

Seat Belt Vehicle Speed Light-Blink Chime-Sound

Unbuckled

Buckled

Buckled →→→→→ Unbuckled

Unbuckled

Above 6mph(10 km/h)

↓Below 3mph

(5 km/h)

6 seconds

6 seconds

6 seconds *1)

↓Stop *2)

6 seconds None

The front passenger's seat belt warninglight will activate to the following tablewhen the ignition switch is in "ON" position.

Seat Belt Warning Light(Front Passenger's Side)

*1) The seat belt warning light will go off ifthe vehicle speed decreases below 5km/h. And if the vehicle speed increasesabove 5 km/h, the warning light will blinkagain.

Conditions Warning Pattern

Seat Belt Vehicle Speed Light-Blink

Unbuckled

Buckled

6 seconds

Continuously

6 seconds

Continuously *1)

None

UnbuckledAbove 6mph

(10 km/h)

Buckled →→→→→

Unbuckled

Above 6mph(10 km/h)

Below 6mph(10 km/h)


71

B260N01TG-AAT

Check Engine - MalfunctionIndicator Light (MIL)

This light illuminates when there is a mal-function of an exhaust gas related compo-nent and the system is not functioningproperly. This light will also illuminate whenthe ignition key is turned to the "ON" position,and will go out in a few seconds after theengine is started. If it illuminates while driv-ing, or does not illuminate when the ignitionkey is turned to the "ON" position, take yourcar to your nearest authorized Hyundaidealer and have the system checked.

B260A01Y-GAT

Front Fog Light IndicatorLight

This fog indicator light comes on when theignition key is turned to the "ON" positionand the front fog light switch is on.

B260N01TG


NOTE:o You can find the front passenger's

seat belt warning light on the centerfascia panel.

o Although the front passenger seat isnot occupied, the seat belt warninglight will blink for 6 seconds.

o The seat belt warning light can blinkwhen luggage is placed on the frontpassenger seat.


72

B260B01JM-AAT

SRS (Airbag) Warning Light

The SRS warning light comes on for ap-proximately 6 seconds after the key isturned to the "ON" position or after theengine is started, after which it will go out.

This light also comes on when the SRS isnot working properly. If the AIRBAG warn-ing light does not come on, or continuouslyremains on after operating for about 6seconds when you turned the ignition keyto the "ON" position or started the engine,or if it comes on while driving, have theSRS inspected by an authorized Hyundaidealer.


B260P01TG

B260P01TG-GAT

ABS Service ReminderIndicator (SRI) (If Installed)

When the key is turned to the "ON" position,the Anti-Lock Brake System indicator willcome on and then go off in a few seconds.If the ABS SRI remains on, comes on whiledriving, or does not come on when the keyis turned to the "ON" position, this indicatesthat there may be a problem with the ABS.If this occurs, have your vehicle checkedby your Hyundai dealer as soon as pos-sible. The normal braking system will stillbe operational, but without the assistanceof the anti-lock brake system.

! WARNING:If both the ABS SRI and Parking Brake/Brake fluid level warning lights remain"ON" or come on while driving, theremay be a problem with E.B.D. (ElectronicBrake Force Distribution).If this occurs, avoid sudden stops andhave your vehicle checked by yourHyundai dealer as soon as possible.


73

B260Q01NF-GAT

CRUISE Indicator Light

The cruise indicator light in the instrumentcluster is illuminated when the cruise con-trol ON/OFF button on the steering wheelis pushed.The indicator light turns off when the cruisecontrol ON/OFF button is pushed again.Information about the use of cruise controlbegins on page 1-118.

B260R01NF-GAT

Cruise SET Indicator Light

The Cruise SET indicator light in the instru-ment cluster is illuminated when the cruisecontrol "COAST/SET" or "RES/ACCEL"switch is pushed. The Cruise SET indica-tor light does not illuminate when the cruisecontrol "CANCEL" switch is pushed or thesystem is disengaged. To disengage thecruise control system, refer to "To cancelthe cruise speed" on page 1-119.

B260U01TB-AAT

Immobilizer Warning Light

This indicator light comes on for a fewseconds after the ignition key is turned tothe "ON" position. At this time, you can startthe engine. The light goes out after theengine is running. In case this light goesout before you start the engine, you mustturn to the "LOCK" position and restart theengine. In case this light blinks for fiveseconds when the ignition key is turned tothe "ON" position, this indicates that theimmobilizer system is out of order. At thistime, refer to the explanation of the "LimpHome" mode and related procedures (Seepage 1-6) or consult your Hyundai dealer.

B265C01NF-AAT

Electronic Stability Control(ESC) Indicator Lights(If Installed)

The electronic stability control indicatorschange operation according to the ignitionswitch position and whether the system isin operation.They will illuminate when the ignition keyis turned to the "ON" position, but should goout after three seconds. If the ESC or ESC-OFF indicator stays on, take your car toyour authorized Hyundai dealer and havethe system checked. See section 2 formore information about the ESC.


74

B270A01O-AAT

BRAKE PAD WEAR WARNINGSOUND

The front and rear disc brake pads havewear indicators that should make a high-pitched squealing or scraping noise whennew pads are needed. The sound maycome and go or be heard all the time whenthe vehicle is moving. It may also be heardwhen the brake pedal is pushed downfirmly. Excessive rotor damage will resultif the worn pads are not replaced. See yourHyundai dealer immediately.

!

B290A03A-AAT

ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATUREGAUGE

WARNING:Never remove the radiator cap when theengine is hot. The engine coolant is un-der pressure and could erupt and causesevere burns. Wait until the engine iscool before adding coolant to the reser-voir.

INSTRUMENT CLUSTER

B280A01TG-AAT

FUEL GAUGE

The needle on the gauge indicates theapproximate fuel level in the fuel tank. Thefuel capacity is given in section 9.

NOTE:The " " symbol means, the fuel fillerlid is located on the left side of the ve-hicle.

B280A01TG

Conventional Type

Super - Vision Type

B290A01TG

Conventional Type

Super - Vision Type


75

B330A03A-AAT

TACHOMETERThe tachometer registers the speed ofyour engine in revolutions per minute (rpm).

CAUTION:The engine should not be raced to sucha speed that the needle enters the redzone on the tachometer face. This cancause severe engine damage and mayvoid your warranty coverage.

!

B330A01TG

RedZone

B330A02TG

Conventional Type

Super - Vision Type

The normal range is approximately in themiddle between "H" and "C". If it movesacross the dial to "H" (HOT), pull over andstop as soon as possible and turn off theengine. Then open the hood and, after theengine has cooled, check the coolant level(See "If the engine overheats" on the page3-4.) and the water pump drive belt. If yoususpect cooling system trouble, have yourcooling system checked by a Hyundai dealeras soon as possible.


76

B300A01TG-A

B300A02TG-A

Conventional Type

Super - Vision Type

B300A02A-AAT

SPEEDOMETER

Your Hyundai's speedometer is calibratedin miles per hour and kilometers per hour.

B310A01TG-AAT

ODOMETER

The odometer records the total distancetraveled in miles. You will also find theodometer useful to determine when peri-odic maintenance should be performed.

B310A01TG-A

Conventional Type

Super - Vision Type

Odometer

Odometer

NOTE:Federal law forbids alteration of the odom-eter of any vehicle with the intent tochange the mileage registered on theodometer. The alteration may void yourwarranty coverage.


77TRIP COMPUTER

B400B01TG-AAT

The trip computer is a microcomputer-controlled driver information gauge thatdisplays information related to driving, suchas estimated tripmeter, distance to empty,average speed, drive time and averagefuel consumption on the LCD.

B400B01TG-A

Conventional Type

Super - Vision Type

Pushing in the MODE switch when theignition switch is in "ON" position changesthe display as follows;

B400B02TG

MODE SWITCH

NOTE:If your vehicle is equipped with the con-ventional type cluster, the unit is dis-played only in the average speed and theaverage fuel consumption.

TRIPMETER

DISTANCE TO EMPTY

AVERAGE SPEED

DRIVE TIME

AVERAGE FUEL CONSUMPTION


78

1. Tripmeter

o This mode indicates the total distancetravelled since the last tripmeter reset.Total distance is also reset to zero if thebattery is disconnected.

o Pressing the RESET switch for morethan 1 second when the tripmeter isbeing displayed clears the tripmeter tozero.

o The meter's working range is from 0 to999.9 miles.

B400B04TG-A

Conventional Type

Super - Vision TypeB400B05TG

To shift from TRIP A to TRIP B, press theMODE switch.

TRIP A: Distance you have traveled fromyour origination point to a firstdestination.

TRIP B: Distance from the first destina-tion to the final destination.

Conventional TypeRESET SWITCH

Push in the RESET switch more than 1second to initialize the displayed informa-tion such as tripmeter, average speed,drive time and average fuel consumption.

B400B03TG


79

2. Distance to Empty

o When the distance to empty is less than30 miles (50 km), the distance to emptydigits (----) will blink until more fuel isadded.

NOTE:o The distance to empty can differ from

the actual tripmeter according to driv-ing conditions.

o The distance to empty is only an esti-mate and can vary according to thedriving conditions, driving pattern orvehicle speed.

o This mode indicates the estimated dis-tance to empty from the current fuellevel in the fuel tank.

o The trip computer may not register ad-ditional fuel if less than 1.36 gallons (6liters) of fuel are added to the vehicle.

B400B06TG-A

Conventional Type

Super - Vision Type

B400B07TG-A

Conventional Type

Super - Vision Type

3. Average Speed

o This mode indicates the average speedfrom the starting of the engine to theignition key "OFF".

o Average speed is reset to zero if thebattery is disconnected.

o To reset the average speed to zero(---), press the RESET switch for morethan 1 second.

o When you drive 0.5 mile (0.5 km) andless after resetting, the average speedwill be displayed as '---'.

B400B08TG-A

Conventional Type

Super - Vision Type


80

4. Drive Time

o This mode indicates the total time fromthe starting of the engine to the ignitionkey "OFF" after resetting. When theRESET switch is pushed, it will be ini-tialized to '0:00'.

o The drive time will cycle to '0:00' afterreaching '99:59'.

5. Average Fuel Consumption

o This mode calculates the average fuelconsumption from the total fuel usedand the distance since the last averageconsumption reset.

o The total fuel used is calculated from thefuel consumption input.

o Average fuel consumption is reset tozero if the battery is disconnected.

B400B09TG-A

Conventional Type

Super - Vision Type

B400B10TG-A

Conventional Type

Super - Vision Type

o To reset the average fuel consumptionto zero (--), press the RESET switch formore than 1 second.

o When you drive 0.5 mile (0.5 km) andless after resetting, the average fuelconsumption will be displayed as '--'.


81

B340B01A-AAT

Lane Change Signal

To indicate a lane change, move the leverup or down to a point where it beginsflashing.The lever will automatically return to thecenter position when released.

B340C03A-AAT

Headlight Switch

To operate the headlights, turn the barrelon the end of the multi-function switch. Thefirst position turns on the parking lights,sidelights, tail lights and instrument panellights. The second position turns on theheadlights.

NOTE:The ignition must be in the "ON" positionto turn on the headlights.

HTG2108 HTG2103

MULTI-FUNCTION LIGHTSWITCH

B340A01A-AAT

COMBINATION TURN SIGNAL,HEADLIGHT AND HIGH-BEAMSWITCHTurn Signal Operation

Pulling down on the lever causes the turnsignals on the left side of the car to blink.Pushing upwards on the lever causes theturn signals on the right side of the car toblink. As the turn is completed, the leverwill automatically return to the center posi-tion and turn off the turn signals at the sametime. If either turn signal indicator lightblinks more rapidly than usual, goes on butdoes not blink, or does not go on at all,there is a malfunction in the system. Checkfor a burned-out fuse or bulb or see yourHyundai dealer.


82

B340G01LZ-AAT

Auto Light

HTG2104

To operate the automatic light feature, turnthe barrel on the end of the multi-functionswitch. If you set the multi-function switchto "AUTO", the tail lights and headlightswill be turned automatically on or off ac-cording to external illumination conditions.

NOTE:Turn the lights manually in foggy, cloudyand rainy conditions.

NOTE:o Never place anything over the sensor

located on the instrument panel toensure better auto light system con-trol.

o Don't clean the sensor using a win-dow cleaner.

o If your vehicle has window tint or othertypes of coating on the windshield, theAUTO light system may not work prop-erly.

Auto lightsensor

B970C02TG-A

Parking Light Auto Off

If you do not turn the parking lights "OFF"after driving, the parking lights will auto-matically shut "OFF" when the driver's dooris opened.To turn them "ON" again, you must simplyturn the ignition key to the "ON" position.


83

B340D01A-AAT

High-beam Switch

To turn on the headlight high beams, pushthe lever forward (away from you). TheHigh Beam Indicator Light will come on atthe same time. For low beams, pull thelever back toward you.

HTG2106

FRONT FOG LIGHT SWITCH

B360B01TG-AAT

To turn on the front fog lights, place theswitch in the "ON" position. They will lightwhen the headlight switch is in the secondposition.

NOTE:If you turn on the headlight high beams,the fog lights will be turned off.

HTG2109

B340E01A-AAT

Headlight Flasher

To flash the headlights, pull the switchlever toward you, then release it. The head-lights can be flashed even though theheadlight switch is in the "OFF" position.

HTG2107


84

! WARNING:When the ignition switch is on and thewindshield wiper switch is placed in the"AUTO" mode, please use caution in thefollowing cases to avoid any hand injury:As the wiper system may automaticallyactivate, the fingers or hand might becaught in the wiper.

o Do not touch the upper end of thewindshield glass facing the rain sen-sor.

o Do not wipe the upper end of the wind-shield glass with a cloth.

o Do not put pressure on the windshieldglass.

B350A03TG-ARain Sensor

B350B01B-GAT

Auto Wiper Operation(If Installed)

When the windshield wiper switch is placedin the "AUTO" position, the rain sensorlocated on the upper end of windshieldglass senses the amount of rainfall andcontrols for the appropriate length of theintervals between wipes appropriately.

NOTE:If there is heavy accumulation of snow orice on the windshield glass, there will bea 10 minute waiting period prior to theoperation of the windshield wipers.

B350A02TG-A

WINDSHIELD WIPER ANDWASHER SWITCH

B350A01A-AAT

The windshield wiper switch has threepositions:

1. Intermittent wiper operation2. Low-speed operation3. High-speed operation

NOTE:To prevent damage to the wiper system,do not attempt to wipe away heavy accu-mulations of snow or ice. Accumulatedsnow and ice should be removed manu-ally. If there is only a light layer of snowor ice, operate the heater in the defrostmode to melt the snow or ice beforeusing the wiper.

B350A01TG-A

(1)

(2)

(3)


85

B350B01O-GAT

Windshield Washer Operation

To use the windshield washer, pull thewiper/washer lever toward the steeringwheel. When the washer lever is operated,the wipers automatically make two passesacross the windshield. The washer contin-ues to operate until the lever is released.

NOTE:o Do not operate the washer more than

15 seconds at a time or when the fluidreservoir is empty.

o In icy or freezing weather, be sure thewiper blades are not frozen to theglass prior to operating the wipers.

o In areas where water freezes in win-ter, use windshield washer antifreeze.

B350B01TG-A

B350B02TG-A

Mist Wiper Operation

If a single wipe is desired to clear mist,push the windshield wiper and washercontrol lever upwards.

B350C01O-AAT

Adjustable Intermittent Wiper Opera-tion

To use the intermittent wiper feature, placethe wiper switch in the "INT" position. Withthe switch in this position, the interval be-tween wipes can be varied from approxi-mately 1 to 18 seconds by turning theinterval adjuster barrel. This is also variedautomatically depending on your roadspeed.

B350C01TG-A


86 FRONT/REAR WINDOWDEFROSTER SWITCH

B380A01TG-A

B380A02HP-AAT

(If Installed)

The front/rear window defroster is turnedon by pushing in on the switch. At the sametime, the front/rear window defroster indi-cator light on the switch is turned on. Toturn the defroster off, push in on the switcha second time. The front/rear window de-froster automatically turns itself off afterabout 20 minutes. To restart the defrostercycle, push in on the switch again after ithas turned itself off.

CAUTION:Do not clean the inner side of the front/rear window glass with an abrasive typeof glass cleaner or use a scraper toremove the foreign deposits from theinner surface of the glass as this maycause damage to the defroster elements.

!

NOTE:The ignition must be in the "ON" positionfor the front/rear window defroster tooperate.

HAZARD WARNING SYS-TEM

B370A01A-AAT

The hazard warning system should beused whenever you find it necessary tostop the car in a hazardous location. Whenyou must make such an emergency stop,always pull off the road as far as possible.The hazard warning lights are turned on bypushing in the hazard switch. This causesall turn signal lights to blink. The hazardwarning lights will operate even thoughthe key is not in the ignition.To turn the hazard warning lights off, pushthe switch a second time.

B370A01TG


87DIGITAL CLOCK

B400A01TG-GAT

There are three control buttons for thedigital clock. Their functions are:

H - Push "H" to advance the hour indi-cated.

M - Push "M" to advance the minute indi-cated.

R - Push "R" to reset minutes to ":00" tofacilitate resetting the clock to thecorrect time. When this is done:Pressing "R" between 11 : 01 and 11: 29 changes the readout to 11 : 00.Pressing "R" between 11 : 30 and 11: 59 changes the readout to 12 : 00.Push the "R" button for 4 seconds todisplay a 12 or 24-hour clock.

B400A01TG-A

INSTRUMENT PANEL LIGHTCONTROL (RHEOSTAT)

B410A01A-AAT

The instrument panel lights can be madebrighter or dimmer by turning the instru-ment panel light control knob.

B410A01TG-A

CIGARETTE LIGHTER

B420A03A-AAT

For the cigarette lighter to work, the keymust be in the "ACC" position or the "ON"position.To use the cigarette lighter, push it all theway into its socket. When the element hasheated, the lighter will pop out to the "ready"position.Do not hold the cigarette lighter pressed in.This can damage the heating element andcreate a fire hazard.If it is necessary to replace the cigarettelighter, use only a genuine Hyundai re-placement or its approved equivalent.

B420A01TG


88 ASHTRAY

B430A02NF-GAT

Front Ashtray

The front ashtray may be opened by push-ing and releasing the ashtray lid. To cleanashtray, the plastic receptacle should beremoved by lifting the plastic ash recep-tacle upward and pulling it out. The ashtraylight will only illuminate when the externallights are on.

B430A01TG

! CAUTION:o Use the power outlets only when the

engine is running. Remove the plugfrom the power outlet after using theelectric device. Using the power out-lets when the engine stops or keepingthe electric device plugged in for manyhours may cause the battery to dis-charge.

o Do not use the power outlet to connectelectric accessories or equipmentthat are not designed to operate on 12volts.

o Some electronic devices can causeelectronic interference when pluggedinto the power outlet. These devicesmay cause excessive audio noiseand malfunctions in other electronicsystems or devices in your vehicle.

POWER OUTLETS

B500D01TG-AAT

These supply 12V electric power to oper-ate electric accessories or equipment onlywhen the key is in the "ON" or "ACC"position.

B500D01TG


89

B440A01TG-AAT

Rear Ashtray

The rear ashtray may be opened by pullingthe ashtray lid out. To clean the ashtray, theplastic receptacle should be removed bylifting the plastic ash receptacle upwardand pulling it out.

HTG2177

CAUTION:Place the drink holder in its closed posi-tion when not in use.

!

DRINK HOLDER

HTG2183

The drink holder is located on the mainconsole for holding cups or cans. The drinkholder can be opened by pushing at its topedge.

B450A01LZ-GAT

Front Drink Holder ! WARNING:o Use caution when using the drink hold-

ers. A spilled beverage that is veryhot can injure you or your passen-gers. Spilled liquids can damage inte-rior trim and electrical components.

o Do not place objects other than cupsor cans in the drink holder. The ob-jects can be thrown out in the event ofa sudden stop or an accident, possi-bly injuring the passengers in thevehicle.


90

! WARNING:o Use caution when using the drink hold-

ers. A spilled beverage that is veryhot can injure you or your passen-gers. Spilled liquids can damage inte-rior trim and electrical components.

o Do not place objects other than cupsor cans in the drink holder. Theseobjects can be thrown out in the eventof a sudden stop or an accident, pos-sibly injuring the passengers in thevehicle.

SEATBACK POCKET

B540B01E-AAT

HTG2042

The seatback pockets for holding papersare located on the backside of the frontseats.

! CAUTION:Place the drink holder in its closed posi-tion while not in use.

HTG2184

B450B01NF-AAT

Rear Drink Holder

The rear drink holder for holding cups orcans is located in the center of the rear seatarmrest.


91

!

SUNROOF

B460A02Y-AAT

(If Installed)Sun Shade

B460A01TG

Your HYUNDAI is equipped with a slidingsunshade which you can manually adjustto let in light with the sunroof closed, or toblock sunlight.

WARNING:Never adjust the sunshade while driv-ing. This could result in loss of controland an accident that may cause death,serious injury, or property damage.

B460B01TG-GAT

Opening the Sunroof System

If your vehicle is equipped with this feature,you can slide or tilt your sunroof with thesunroof control buttons located on theoverhead console.The sunroof can only be opened, closed,or tilted when the ignition switch is in the"ON" position.

B460B01TG-A

Auto slide open

To use the auto slide feature, momentarily(more than 1 second) press the SLIDEOPEN button on the overhead console.The sunroof will slide all the way open. Tostop the sunroof sliding at any point, pressany sunroof control button.

Manual slide open

Press the SLIDE OPEN button on the over-head console for less than 0.5 second.

Auto slide close

To close the sunroof, press the TILT UPbutton on the overhead console for morethan 1 second.The sunroof will slide all the way close. Tostop at the desired point, press any sunroofcontrol button.


92

B460C01TG-AAT

Tilting the Sunroof System

Auto tilt open

To use the auto tilt feature, momentarily(more than 1 second) press the TILT UPbutton on the overhead console. Thesunroof will tilt all the way open. To stop thesunroof tilting at any point, press anysunroof control button.

Manual tilt up

Press the TILT UP button on the overheadconsole for less than 0.5 second.

!

Manual tilt down

To close the sunroof, press the SLIDEOPEN button on the overhead consoleand hold it until the sunroof is closed.

NOTE:After washing the car or after there israin, be sure to wipe off any water that ison the sunroof before operating it.

B460B01TG-AWARNING:

o Do not close a sunroof if anyone'shands, arms or body are between thesliding glass and the sunroof sash, asthis could result in injury.

o Do not place your head or arms out ofthe sunroof opening at any time.

o While the vehicle is moving, alwayskeep the head, hands and other partsof the body of all occupants awayfrom the roof opening. Otherwise, youcould be seriously injured if the ve-hicle stops suddenly or if the vehicleis involved in an accident.

!

Auto reverse

If an object or part of the body is detectedwhile the sunroof is closing automatically,it will reverse direction, and then stop.Auto reverse function does not work if a tinyobstacle is blocked between the slidingglass and the sunroof sash. You shouldalways check that all passengers andobjects are away from the sunroof beforeclosing it.

WARNING:Be careful that someone’s head, handsand body are not trapped by a closingsunroof.

Manual slide close

Press the TILT UP button on the overheadconsole for less than 0.5 second.


93

! CAUTION:o Do not open the sunroof in severely

cold temperatures or when it is cov-ered with ice or snow.

o Periodically remove any dirt that mayhave accumulated on the guide rails.

o Do not press any sunroof control but-ton longer than necessary. Damageto the motor or system componentscould occur.

B460D01NF-GAT

Manual Operation of Sunroof

If the sunroof does not operate electrically:

1. Open the spectacle case.2. Remove the two mounting screws of the

front overhead console with a phillipsscrewdriver.

B460D01TG-A

3. Insert the hexagonal head wrench pro-vided with the vehicle into the socket.This wrench can be found in the vehicle'sglove box.

4. Turn the wrench clockwise to open orcounterclockwise to close the sunroof.

B460D02TG-A


94

B480B01TG-AAT

Front Map Light

Push in the map light switch to turn the lighton or off. This light produces a spot beamfor convenient use as a map light at nightor as a personal light for the driver and thepassenger.

HTG2113

INTERIOR LIGHT

Without sunroof

With sunroof

!B460E01TG-AAT

Resetting the sunroof

Whenever the vehicle battery is discon-nected or discharged, or you use the emer-gency handle to operate the sunroof, youhave to reset your sunroof system as fol-lows:

1. Turn the ignition key to the "ON" posi-tion.

2. Press the TILT UP button for more than1 second to tilt up the sunroof com-pletely when the sunroof is fully closed.Then, release the button.

3. Press and hold the TILT UP button onceagain until the sunroof has returned tothe original TILT UP position after itraises a little higher than the maximumTILT UP position. Then, release thebutton.

4. Press and hold the TILT UP button within5 seconds until the sunroof is operatedas follows;

TILT DOWN → SLIDE OPEN → SLIDECLOSE

Then, release the button.

CAUTION:If the sunroof is not reset, it may notoperate properly.


95

B490A01TG-AAT

Interior Light

The interior courtesy light has two buttons.The two buttons are:

o DOOR

In the "DOOR" position, the interior cour-tesy light comes on when any door isopened regardless of the ignition key po-sition. The light goes out gradually after 30seconds if the door is closed. However ifthe ignition switch is ON or all doors arelocked, the interior light will turn off evenwithin 30 seconds.

B490A01TG

B485A01TG-GAT

Rear Map Light

Push in the map light switch to turn the lighton or off. This light produces a spot beamfor convenient use as a map light at nightor as a personal light for rear passengers.

B485A01TG

CAUTION:Do not leave this button pressed for anextended period of time when the ve-hicle is not running.

!

o ON

In the "ON" position, the light stays on at alltimes.


96

B500B01NF-GAT

Illuminated Glove Box

Opening the glove box will automaticallyturn on the light when the multi-functionswitch is turned to the first position.

NOTE:Information about use of the trunk lidcontrol button located in the glove box islocated in the trunk lid section.

B541A01TG

SPECTACLE CASE

!

B491A03O-GAT

The spectacle case is located on the frontoverhead console. Push the end of thecover to open the spectacle case.

WARNING:o Do not keep objects except spec-

tacles inside the spectacle case. Suchobjects can be thrown from the casein the event of a sudden stop or anaccident, possibly injuring the pas-sengers in the vehicle.

o Do not open the spectacle case whilethe vehicle is moving. The rear viewmirror of the vehicle can be blockedby an open spectacle case.

B491A01TG-A

!

STORAGE BOX

B500A01TG-AAT

GLOVE BOX

WARNING:To avoid the possibility of injury in caseof an accident or a sudden stop, theglove box door should be kept closedwhen the car is in motion.

o To open the glove box, pull on the glovebox release lever.

o The glove box door can be locked (andunlocked) with the key.

HTG2178


97

B500A01TG-AAT

ACCESSORY BOX

The accessory box may be opened bypushing the knob downward.It is used for storing small articles.

B500A02TG

! WARNING:To avoid the possibility of injury in caseof an accident or a sudden stop, thecenter console box lid should be keptclosed when the car is in motion.

The center console box is used for storingcassette tapes or small articles.To use the center console box, pull up thehandle and lift the lid as shown.

B505A01NF-GAT

CENTER CONSOLE BOX

HTG2179

HTG2179-1


98

CAUTION:If the mirror is jammed with ice, do notadjust the mirror by force. Use an ap-proved spray de-icer (not radiator anti-freeze) to release the frozen mecha-nism or move the vehicle to a warmplace and allow the ice to melt.

To adjust the position of either mir-ror:

1. Move the selecting switch to the right orleft to activate the adjustable mecha-nism for the corresponding door mirror.

2. Adjust mirror angle by depressing theappropriate perimeter switch as illus-trated.

!

B510B02TG

OUTSIDE REARVIEW MIR-ROR

B510B01TG-AAT

The outside rearview mirrors can be ad-justed to your preferred rear vision, bothdirectly behind the vehicle, and to the rearof the left and right sides.The remote control outside rearview mir-ror switch controls the adjustments for bothright and left outside mirrors.

NOTE:Before driving away, always check thatyour mirrors are positioned so you cansee behind you, both to the left and rightsides, as well as directly behind yourvehicle.

B510B01TG


99

!

CAUTION:o Do not operate the switch continu-

ously for an unnecessary length oftime.

o Scraping ice from the mirror face couldcause permanent damage. To removeany ice, use a sponge, soft cloth orapproved de-icer.

!

WARNING:Be careful when judging the size or dis-tance of any object seen in the passen-ger side rearview mirror. It is a convexmirror with a curved surface, and anyobjects seen in this mirror are closerthan they appear.

B510C01TG-AAT

FOLDING THE OUTSIDE REARVIEWMIRRORS (Manual Type)

To fold the outside rearview mirrors, pushthem towards the rear.The outside rearview mirrors can be foldedrearward for parking in narrow areas.

B510C01TG-A

The outside rearview mirror heater is actu-ated in connection with the front/rear win-dow defroster. To heat the outside rear-view mirror glass, push in the switch for thefront/rear window defroster. The rearviewmirror glass will be heated for defrosting ordefogging and will give you improved rearvision in inclement weather conditions.Push the switch again to turn the heater off.The outside rearview mirror heater auto-matically turns itself off after 20 minutes.

B510D02HP-AAT

OUTSIDE REARVIEW MIRRORHEATER (If Installed)

B380A01TG-A


100

! WARNING:Do not adjust or fold the outside rearviewmirrors while the vehicle is moving. Thiscould result in loss of control, and anaccident causing death, serious injuryor property damage.

CAUTION:If the mirror is jammed with ice, do notadjust the mirror by force. Use an ap-proved spray de-icer (not radiator anti-freeze) to release the frozen mecha-nism or move the vehicle to a warmplace and allow the ice to melt.

!

!

B510E01TG-AAT

FOLDING THE OUTSIDE REARVIEWMIRRORS (Electric Type) (If Installed)

Both left and right outside rearview mirrorscan be folded by pressing the outsiderearview mirror folding switch. The outsiderearview mirrors can be folded rearwardfor parking in narrow areas.

B510E01TG

CAUTION:o If the mirror is jammed with ice, do not

adjust the mirror by force. Use anapproved spray de-icer (not radiatorantifreeze) to release the frozenmechanism or move the vehicle to awarm place and allow the ice to melt.

o Do not attempt to fold the electricoutside rearview mirrors manually.If the mirrors are not completely foldedout, the mirrors may vibrate.

!

WARNING:Do not adjust or fold the outside rearviewmirrors while the vehicle is moving. Thiscould result in loss of control, and anaccident which could cause death, seri-ous injury or property damage.


101HOMELINK MIRROR

B520C01NF-AAT

Automatic-Dimming Mirrorwith Z-Nav™ Electronic CompassDisplay and HomeLink®

Your vehicle comes with a Gentex Auto-matic-Dimming Mirror with a Z-Nav™ Elec-tronic Compass Display and an IntegratedHomeLink® Wireless Control System. Dur-ing nighttime driving, this feature will auto-matically detect and reduce rearview mir-ror glare while the compass indicates thedirection the vehicle is pointed. TheHomeLink® Universal Transceiver allowsyou to activate your garage door(s), elec-tric gate, home lighting, etc.

1. Channel 1 Button2. Channel 2 Button3. Status Indicator LED4. Channel 3 Button

5. Rear Light Sensor6. Dimming On/Off Button7. Compass Control Button8. Display

B520C01TG


102

Automatic-Dimming Night VisionSafety™ (NVS®) Mirror

The NVS® Mirror in your vehicle is the mostadvanced way to reduce annoying glare inthe rearview mirror during any driving situ-ation. For more information regardingNVS® mirrors and other applications,please refer to the Gentex website:www.gentex.com.

CAUTION:The NVS® Mirror automatically reducesglare during driving conditions basedupon light levels monitored in front of thevehicle and from the rear of the vehicle.These light sensors are visible throughopenings in the front and rear of themirror case. Any object that would ob-struct either light sensor will degradethe automatic dimming control feature.

!

Automatic-Dimming Function

Your mirror will automatically dim upondetecting glare from the vehicles travelingbehind you. The auto-dimming functioncan be controlled by the Dimming ON/OFFButton:

1. Pressing the button turns the auto-dimming function OFF which is indi-cated by the green Status Indicator LEDturning off.

2. Pressing the button again turns theauto-dimming function ON which is in-dicated by the green Status IndicatorLED turning on.

NOTE:The mirror defaults to the "ON" positioneach time the vehicle is started.

Compass Function

The Compass can be turned ON and OFFand will remember the last state when theignition is cycled. To turn the displayfeature ON/OFF:1. Press and release the button to turn

the display feature OFF.2. Press and release the button again

to turn the display back ON.Additional options can be set with pressand hold sequences of the button andare detailed below.

There is a difference between magneticnorth and true north. The compass in themirror can compensate for this differencewhen it knows the Magnetic Zone in whichit is operating. This is set either by thedealer or by the user. The operating ZoneNumbers for North America are shown inthe figure on the following section.

Z-Nav™ Compass Display

The NVS™ Mirror in your vehicle is alsoequipped with a Z-Nav™ Compass thatshows the vehicle Compass heading inthe Display Window using the 8 basiccardinal headings (N, NE, E, SE, etc.).


103

To adjust the Zone setting:1. Determine the desired Zone Number

based upon your current location on theZone Map.

2. Press and hold the button for morethan 3 but less than 6 seconds, thecurrent Zone Number will appear on thedisplay.

3. Pressing and holding the buttonagain will cause the numbers to incre-ment (Note: they will repeat …13, 14,15, 1, 2, …). Releasing the button whenthe desired Zone Number appears onthe display will set the new Zone.

4. Within about 5 seconds the compasswill start displaying a compass headingagain.

There are some conditions that can causechanges to the vehicle magnets. Itemssuch as installing a ski rack or a CB an-tenna or even some body repair work onthe vehicle can cause changes to thevehicle's magnetic field. In these situa-tions, the compass will need to be re-calibrated to quickly correct for thesechanges. To re-calibrate the compass:

B520C05NF


104

!

Integrated HomeLink® Wireless Con-trol System

The HomeLink® Wireless Control Systemprovides a convenient way to replace up tothree hand-held radio-frequency (RF)transmitters with a single built-in device.This innovative feature will learn the radiofrequency codes of most current transmit-ters to operate devices such as gate op-erators, garage door openers, entry doorlocks, security systems, even home light-ing. Both standard and rolling code-equipped transmitters can be programmedby following the outlined procedures. Ad-ditional HomeLink® information can befound at: www.homelink.com or by calling1-800-355-3515.

CAUTION:Before programming HomeLink® to agarage door opener or gate operator,make sure that people and objects areout of the way of the device to preventpotential harm or damage. Do not useHomeLink® with any garage door openerthat lacks the safety stop and reversefeatures as required by U.S. federalsafety standards (this includes any ga-rage door opener model manufacturedbefore April 1, 1982). A garage door thatcannot detect an object - signaling thedoor to stop and reverse - does not meetcurrent U.S. federal safety standards.Using a garage door opener without thesefeatures increases the risk of seriousinjury or death.

Programming HomeLink®

NOTE:o When programming a garage door

opener, it is advised to park the ve-hicle outside of the garage.

o It is recommended that a new batterybe placed in the hand-held transmit-ter of the device being programmedto HomeLink® for quicker training andaccurate transmission of the radio-frequency signal.

o Some vehicles may require the igni-tion switch to be turned to the second(or "accessories") position for pro-gramming and/or operation ofHomeLink.

o In the event that there are still pro-gramming difficulties or questionsafter following the programming stepslisted below, contact HomeLink® at:www.homelink.com or 1-800-355-3515.Retain the original transmitter of the RF

device you are programming for use inother vehicles as well as for futureHomeLink® programming. It is also sug-gested that upon the sale of the vehicle, theprogrammed HomeLink® buttons beerased for security purposes.

1. Press and hold the button for morethan 6 seconds. When the compassmemory is cleared a "C" will appear inthe display.

2. To calibrate the compass, drive thevehicle in 2 complete circles at less than5 MPH (8 Km/h).


105

Standard Programming

To train most devices, follow these instruc-tions:1. For first-time programming, press and

hold the two outside buttons, HomeLink®

Channel 1 and Channel 3 Buttons, untilthe indicator light begins to flash (after20 seconds). Release both buttons. Donot hold the buttons for longer than 30seconds.

2. Position the end of your hand-held trans-mitter 1-3 inches (5-14 cm) away fromthe HomeLink® buttons while keepingthe indicator light in view.

3. Simultaneously press and hold boththe HomeLink® and hand-held trans-mitter button. DO NOT release the but-tons until step 4 has been completed.

4. While continuing to hold the buttons thered Indicator Status LED will flash slowlyand then rapidly after HomeLink® suc-cessfully trains to the frequency signalfrom the hand-held transmitter. Releaseboth buttons.

5. Press and hold the just-trainedHomeLink® button and observe the redStatus Indicator LED. If the indicatorlight stays on constantly, programmingis complete and your device shouldactivate when the HomeLink® button ispressed and released.

6. To program the remaining twoHomeLink® buttons, follow steps 2through 5.

Rolling Code Programming

Rolling code devices which are "code-protected" and manufactured after 1996may be determined by the following:o Reference the device owner's manual

for verification.o The handheld transmitter appears to

program the HomeLink Universal Trans-ceiver but does not activate the device.

o Press and hold the trained HomeLinkbutton. The device has the rolling codefeature if the indicator light flashes rap-idly and then turns solid after 2 seconds.

To train rolling code devices, follow theseinstructions:1. At the garage door opener receiver

(motor-head unit) in the garage, locatethe "learn" or "smart" button. This canusually be found where the hangingantenna wire is attached to the motor-head unit. Exact location and color ofthe button may vary by garage dooropener brand. If there is difficulty locat-ing the training button, reference thedevice owner's manual or please visitour Web site at www.homelink.com.

2. Firmly press and release the "learn" or"smart" button (which activates the "train-ing light").

NOTE:There are 30 seconds in which to initiatestep3.

3. Return to the vehicle and firmly press,hold for two seconds and then releasethe desired HomeLink® button. Repeatthe "press/hold/release" sequence asecond time to complete the program-ming. (Some devices may require youto repeat this sequence a third time tocomplete the programming.)


106

4. Press and hold the just-trainedHomeLink® button and observe the redStatus Indicator LED. If the indicatorlight stays on constantly, programmingis complete and your device shouldactivate.

5. To program the remaining twoHomeLink® buttons, follow either steps1 through 4 above for other RollingCode devices or steps 2 through 5 inStandard Programming for standarddevices.

During programming, your handheld trans-mitter may automatically stop transmitting.Continue to press the IntegratedHomeLink® Wireless Control System but-ton (note steps 2 through 4 in the StandardProgramming portion of this document)while you press and re-press ("cycle") yourhandheld transmitter every two secondsuntil the frequency signal has been learned.The indicator light will flash slowly andthen rapidly after several seconds uponsuccessful training.

Operating HomeLink®

To operate, simply press and release theprogrammed HomeLink® button. Activa-tion will now occur for the trained device(i.e. garage door opener, gate operator,security system, entry door lock, home/office lighting, etc.). For convenience, thehand-held transmitter of the device mayalso be used at any time.

Reprogramming a Single HomeLink®

Button

To program a new device to a previouslytrained HomeLink® button, follow thesesteps:1. Press and hold the desired HomeLink®

button. Do NOT release until step 4 hasbeen completed.

2. When the indicator light begins to flashslowly (after 20 seconds), position thehandheld transmitter 1 to 3 inches awayfrom the HomeLink® surface.

3. Press and hold the handheld transmit-ter button. The HomeLink® indicator lightwill flash, first slowly and then rapidly.

4. When the indicator light begins to flashrapidly, release both buttons.

5. Press and hold the just-trained

HomeLink® button and observe the redStatus Indicator LED. If the indicatorlight stays on constantly, programmingis complete and your new device shouldactivate.

Erasing HomeLink® Buttons

Individual buttons cannot be erased. How-ever, to erase all three programmed but-tons:1. Press and hold the two outer HomeLink®

buttons until the indicator light begins toflash-after 20 seconds.

2. Release both buttons. Do not hold forlonger than 30 seconds.

The Integrated HomeLink® Wireless Con-trol System is now in the training (learn)mode and can be programmed at any timefollowing the appropriate steps in the Pro-gramming sections above.

FCC ID: NZLZTVHL3IC: 4112A-ZTVHL3


107PARKING BRAKE

B530A01TG-AAT

Always engage the parking brake beforeleaving the vehicle. This also turns on theparking brake indicator light when the keyis in the "ON" or "START" position. Beforedriving away, be sure that the parkingbrake is fully released and the indicatorlight is off.

o To engage the parking brake, depressthe parking brake pedal.

o To release the parking brake, depressthe parking brake pedal a second time.

NOTE:The parking brake pedal should bechecked periodically for proper stroke.

B530A01TG-A

TRUNK LID

B540A01S-GAT

Remote Trunk Lid Release

To open the trunk lid without using the key,pull up the lid release lever.

HTG2014

!

This device complies with Part 15 FCCRules. Operation is subject to the followingtwo conditions: (1) this device may notcause harmful interference, and (2) thisdevice must accept any interference re-ceived, including interference that maycause undesired operation.

WARNING:The transceiver has been tested andcomplies with FCC and Industry Canadarules. Changes or modifications not ex-pressly approved by the party respon-sible for compliance could void the user'sauthority to operate the device.

NVS® is a registered trademark and Z-Nav™ is a trademark of the Gentex Corpo-ration, Zeeland, Michigan. HomeLink® isa registered trademark owned by JohnsonControls, Incorporated, Milwaukee, Wis-consin.


108

!

B541A01TG-GAT

Trunk Lid Control Button

The trunk lid control button located in thevehicle glove box is used to prevent unau-thorized access to the trunk.

Locking

To activate the trunk lock system so that thetrunk can only be opened with the masterkey, perform the following:

1. Open the glove box.2. Set the trunk lid control button to "OFF"

position (not depressed).3. Close the glove box and lock the glove

box with the master key.

B541A01TG

When leaving the key with a parking lotattendant or valet, perform steps 1 to 3above and leave the sub key with theattendent. Sub key can start the engineand operate door locks only.

Releasing

To release the trunk lock feature, open theglove box with master key and set the trunklid control button to "ON" position (de-pressed). In this position the trunk willopen with trunk lid release lever or trans-mitter. The trunk can never be opened withthe sub key.

WARNING:Doors and trunk should be kept lockedand keys be kept out of the reach ofchildren. Parents also should teach theirchildren about the dangers of playing intrunks.

! WARNING:The trunk lid should always be kept com-pletely closed while the vehicle is inmotion. If it is left open or ajar, poisonousexhaust gases may enter the car andserious illness or death may result. Seeadditional warnings concerning exhaustgases on page 2-2.

To close, lower the trunk lid, then pressdown on it until it locks. To be sure the trunklid is securely fastened, always check bytrying to pull it up again.

HTG2017


109

! WARNING:o If a person is locked in the trunk, pull

the emergency trunk release lever onthe driver's side of the inside panel ofthe trunk to open the trunk lid.

o HYUNDAI recommends that cars bekept locked and keys be kept out ofthe reach of children, and that parentsteach their children about the dan-gers of playing in trunks.

o Parents should teach children aboutthe emergency trunk release lever intheir vehicle and how to open the trunklid if they are accidentally locked inthe trunk.

B540C01TG-A

B540C01TG-AAT

To unlock using the key

To open the trunk lid, insert the key and turnit clockwise to unlock, then pull the outsidehandle toward you. The trunk compart-ment light illuminates when the trunk lid isopened.

B540B02E-AAT

Trunk Lid Emergency Latch Release

Your vehicle is equipped with a glow-in-the dark emergency trunk release leverlocated inside the trunk. It will glow after thetrunk is closed. When pulled, this lever willrelease the trunk latch mechanism andopen the trunk.

B540B01TG-A


110 HIGH-MOUNTED REARSTOP LIGHT

B550A02Y-AAT

In addition to the lower-mounted rear stoplights on either side of the car, the highmounted rear stop light in the center of therear window also lights when the brakesare applied.

B550A01TG-A

! CAUTION:To prevent damage to the goods or thevehicle, care should be taken when car-rying fragile or bulky objects in the lug-gage compartment.

! WARNING:Avoid eye injury. DO NOT overstretch.The luggage net ALWAYS keep yourface and body out of its recoil path. DONOT use when the luggage net strapshave visible signs of wear or damage.

When loading the objects in the luggagecompartment, use the four rings located inthe luggage compartment to attach theluggage net as shown illustration. This willhelp prevent the objects from sliding.

HNF2186

LUGGAGE NET

B540D02O-AAT

(If Installed)


111

! WARNING:o The fuel cap must be tightened until

the cap clicks, otherwise " " lightwill illuminate.

o Gasoline vapors are dangerous. Be-fore refueling, always stop the engineand never allow sparks or open flamesnear the filler area. If you need toreplace the filler cap, use a genuineHyundai replacement part.

HTG2023

REMOTE FUEL-FILLER LIDRELEASE

B560A02NF-AAT

The fuel-filler lid may be opened frominside the vehicle by pushing the fuel-fillerlid opener switch located on the driver'sdoor.

NOTE:If the fuel-filler lid will not open becauseice has formed around it, tap lightly orpush on the lid to break the ice andrelease the lid. Do not pry on the lid. Ifnecessary, spray around the lid with anapproved de-icer fluid (do not use radia-tor anti-freeze) or move the vehicle to awarm place and allow the ice to melt.

HTG2022

WARNING:o If you open the fuel filler cap during

high ambient temperatures, a slight"pressure sound" may be heard. Thisis normal and not a cause for concern.Whenever you open the fuel filler cap,turn it slowly.

o Make sure the fuel filler cap is re-placed and securely seated after fu-eling. Failure to replace or fully seatthe fuel filler cap will result in fuelvapors escaping into the atmosphereand the check engine " " indicatorilluminating.

o Do not "TOP-OFF" after the first nozzleshut off when refueling.

o Automotive fuels are flammable/ex-plosive materials. When refueling,please note the following guidelinescarefully. Failure to follow these guide-lines may result in severe personalinjury, severe burns or death by fire orexplosion.

!


112

! WARNING:- When refueling always shut the en-

gine off. Sparks produced by elec-trical components related to theengine can ignite fuel vapors caus-ing a fire. Always insure that theengine is OFF before and duringrefueling. Once refueling is com-plete, check to make sure the fuelfiller cap and door are securelyclosed, before starting the engine.

- Do not light any fire around a gasstation. DO NOT use matches or alighter and DO NOT SMOKE or leavea lit cigarette in your vehicle while ata gas station especially during re-fueling. Automotive fuel is highlyflammable and can, when ignited,result in explosion by flames.

- If a fire breaks out during refueling,leave the vicinity of the vehicle, andimmediately contact the managerof the gas station or contact thepolice and local fire department.Follow any safety instructions theyprovide.

! WARNING:! WARNING:- Before refueling always note the

location of the Emergency Gaso-line Shut-Off, if available, at the gasstation facility.

- Before touching the fuel nozzle orfuel filler cap, you should eliminatepotentially dangerous static elec-tricity discharge by touching an-other metal part of the front of thevehicle, a safe distance away fromthe fuel filler neck, nozzle, or othergas source.

- Do not get back into a vehicle onceyou have begun refueling. Do nottouch, rub or slide against any itemor fabric (polyester, satin, nylon,etc.) capable of producing staticelectricity. Static electricity dis-charge can ignite fuel vapors re-sulting in explosion.

If you must re-enter the vehicle, youshould once again eliminate poten-tially dangerous static electricitydischarge by touching a metal partof the vehicle, away from the fuelfiller neck, nozzle or other gasolinesource.

- When using a portable fuel con-tainer be sure to place the con-tainer on the ground prior to refuel-ing. Static electricity discharge fromthe container can ignite fuel vaporscausing a fire. Once refueling hasbegun, contact with the vehicleshould be maintained until the fillingis complete. Use only portable fuelcontainers designed to carry andstore gasoline.

- Do not use cellular phones arounda gas station or while refueling anyvehicle. Electric current and/or elec-tronic interference from cellularphones can potentially ignite fuelvapors causing a fire. If you mustuse your cellular phone use it in aplace away from the gas station.


113

B560B01L-GAT

Manual Fuel Filler Lid Release

If the fuel filler lid cannot be opened usingthe remote opener, a manual openerhandle is located inside the trunk on the leftside. Open the fuel filler lid by pulling onthis handle as shown in the illustration.

HNF2022

HOOD RELEASE

B570A01NF-GAT

1. Pull the release knob to unlatch thehood.

B570A01TG

HTG2025

2. Pull the secondary latch up and lift thehood.

3. Raise the hood by hand.

HTG2024-1


114

! WARNING:Do not place the sun visor in such amanner that it obscures visibility of theroadway, traffic or other objects.

SUN VISOR

B580A01NF-GAT

Your Hyundai is equipped with sun visorsto give the driver and front passengereither frontal or sideward shade. To re-duce glare or to shut out direct rays of thesun, turn the sun visor down.Vanity mirrors are provided on the back ofthe sun visor for the driver and front pas-senger.

NOTE:The Supplemental Restraint System(SRS) label containing useful informa-tion can be found on the back of each sunvisor.

B580A01TG

! WARNING:o Always double check to be sure that

the hood is firmly latched before driv-ing away. If it is not latched, the hoodcould fly open while the vehicle isbeing driven, causing a total loss ofvisibility, which might result in an ac-cident.

o Do not move the vehicle with the hoodin the raised position, as vision isobstructed and the hood could fall orbe damaged.

When closing the hood, slowly close thehood and make sure it locks into place.


115

B500B01B-GAT

Illuminated Vanity Mirror

Opening the lid of the vanity mirror willautomatically turn on the mirror light.

B580B01TG

B580C01JM-AAT

Sun Visor Extender

Your vehicle is equipped with sun visorextenders that may be used when the visoris in the side glass position.

B580C01TG

TICKET HOLDER

B580C01LZ-AAT

The ticket holder is provided on the topside of the sun visor for holding a tollgateticket.

B580C02TG


116 REAR SEAT ARMREST

B611A01Y-AAT

This armrest is located in the center of therear seatback.

B611A01TG

HORNDOOR WARNING LIGHT

B620A01TG-AAT

A red light comes on when the door isopened. The purpose of this light is toassist when you get in or out and also towarn passing vehicles.

B620A01TG

B610A01L-GAT

Press horn pad on the steering wheel tosound the horn.

B610A01TG


117REAR WINDOW CURTAIN

B265C01TG

B265C01TG-AAT

(If Installed)

Press the curtain switch to raise the rearwindow curtain. To lower the rear windowcurtain, press the switch once again.

NOTE:o When the transaxle gear is shifted

into reverse "R", the rear windowcurtain will automatically lower. Whenthe transaxle gear is shifted from "R"to "P" again or if the vehicle speedexceeds 20km/h, the rear window cur-tain will automatically raise.

o Do not attempt to raise or lower therear window curtain manually.

STEERING WHEEL TILT &TELESCOPIC

B600A01TG-GAT

Manual type

To adjust the steering wheel:

1. Push the lever downward fully to un-lock.

2. Adjust upward or downward and for-ward or backward to set the steeringwheel to the desired position.

3. After adjustment, securely tighten thelever by pulling it upward.

HTG2076

!

! CAUTION:After adjusting the steering wheel, trymoving it up and down to make sure it islocked in position.

WARNING:Do not attempt to adjust the steeringwheel while driving as this may result inloss of control of the vehicle and seriousinjury or death.


118

B660B01NF-AAT

To Set the Cruise Speed

1. Push the cruise control ON/OFF switch.The "CRUISE" indicator light in the in-strument cluster will illuminate. Thisturns the system on.

2. Accelerate to desired cruising speedabove 40 km/h (25 mph).

B660B01TG

CRUISE CONTROL

B660A02S-AAT

The cruise control system provides auto-matic speed control for your comfort whendriving on straight, open freeways, tollroads, or other noncongested highways.This system is designed to function aboveapproximately 25 mph (40 km/h).

NOTE:Cruise control is not recommended forcity driving, winding roads, slipperyroads, heavy rain, or other bad weatherconditions.

!

B600B01TG-GAT

Electric type (If Installed)

B600B01TG

To adjust the desired position of the steer-ing wheel, operate the adjusting switch onthe left side of the steering wheel.

WARNING:Do not attempt to adjust the steeringwheel while driving as this may result inloss of control of the vehicle and seriousinjury or death.


119

NOTE:If the vehicle speed decreases morethan 9 mph (15 km/h) below the set speedor decreases below 25 mph (40 km/h),the cruise control system will automati-cally cancel the set speed.

B660B02TG

3. Push the "SET" (COAST) switch afteryou have set the vehicle speed at thedesired speed.If the "SET (COAST)" switch is selected,the cruise "SET" indicator light in theinstrument cluster will illuminate.

4. Remove your foot from the acceleratorpedal and the desired speed will auto-matically be maintained.

5. To increase speed, temporarily depressthe accelerator pedal enough for thevehicle to exceed the preset speed.When you remove your foot from theaccelerator pedal, the vehicle will re-turn to the speed you have set.

B660C01TG-AAT

To Cancel the Cruise Speed

To disengage the cruise control system,push the control switch "CANCEL".Additionally, the following actions will dis-engage the system:

o Depress the brake pedal.o Shift the selector lever to "N" position.o Decrease the vehicle speed lower than

the memory speed by 9 mph (15 km/h).o Decrease the vehicle speed to less

than 25 mph (40 km/h).o Release the cruise control ON/OFF

switch.

B660C01TG


120

B660F01TG-GAT

To Reset at a Slower Speed

1. Push the control switch "SET (COAST)"and hold it. While the control switch ispushed, the vehicle speed will gradu-ally decrease.If the "SET(COAST)" switch is selected,the cruise "SET" indicator light in theinstrument cluster will illuminate.

2. When the desired speed is obtained,release the control switch.

B660B02TG

B660E01NF-GAT

To Reset at a Faster Speed

1. Push the control switch "RESUME(ACCEL)" and hold it.If the control switch "RESUME(ACCEL)"is selected, the cruise "SET" indicator inthe instrument cluster will illuminate.

2. Accelerate to desired speed and re-lease the control switch. While the con-trol switch is held, the vehicle will gradu-ally gain speed.

B660D01NF-AAT

To Resume the Preset Speed

The vehicle will automatically resume thespeed set prior to cancellation when youpush the control switch "RESUME(ACCEL)" and release it to return (whentravelling above 25 mph).If the control switch "RESUME(ACCEL)" isselected, the cruise "SET" indicator in theinstrument cluster will illuminate.

B660D01TG


121

!

AUDIO REMOTE CONTROLSWITCH

B610A01TG-AAT

(If Installed)

NOTE:Do not operate audio remote controlswitches simultaneously.

MODE Switch

Press the MODE switch to select Radio,Tape, CD (Compact Disc) and CDC (Com-pact Disc Changer).Each press of the switch changes the dis-play as follows:

B610A03TG

WARNING:o Keep the cruise control ON/OFF switch

off when not using the cruise control.o Use the cruise control system only

when traveling on open highways ingood weather.

o Do not use the cruise control when itmay not be safe to keep the car at aconstant speed, for instance, drivingin heavy or varying traffic, or on slip-pery (rainy, icy or snow-covered) orwinding roads or over 6% up-hill ordown-hill roads.

o Pay particular attention to the drivingconditions whenever using the cruisecontrol system.

o During normal cruise control opera-tion, when the "SET" switch is acti-vated or reactivated after applyingthe brakes, the cruise control willenergize after approximately 3 sec-onds. This delay is normal.

RADIO (FM1 → FM2 → AM) → TAPE → CD → CDC

→

MUTE Switch

o Press the MUTE switch to slience thesound.

o Once again press the MUTE switch torestore the sound.

VOL ( / ) Switch

o Press the VOL ( ) switch to increasevolume.

o Press the VOL ( ) switch to deceasevolume.


122 HEATING AND COOLING CONTROL

B710A01TG-GAT

B710A01TG-A

1. Side Defroster Nozzle2. Side Ventilator3. Windshield Defroster Nozzle4. Center Ventilator5. Rear Ventilator


123


123

B710B01TG-AAT

Ventilator

B710B01TG

B710B02TG

To change the direction of the air flow, turnthe control knob (1). To control the amountof air, turn the control knob (2). The ventsare opened when the vent knob is movedto " " position. The vents are closedwhen the vent knob is moved to " ". Keepthese vents clear of any obstructions.


124 AUTOMATIC HEATING AND COOLING CONTROL SYSTEM

B970A01Y-AAT

Your Hyundai is equipped with an auto-matic heating and cooling control systemcontrolled by simply setting the desiredtemperature.

B970B01TG-GAT

Heating and Cooling Controls

1. Temperature Control Switch(Driver's side)

2. Defroster Switch3. Front/Rear Window Defroster Switch4. Blower Fan Control Switch5. Air Intake Control Switch6. Air Quality System Switch7. Temperature Control Switch

(Front passenger's side)

B970B01TG

8. Display Window (Driver's side)9. AUTO (Automatic Control) Switch10. OFF Switch11. Air Flow Control Switch12. Air Conditioning Switch13. Dual Temperature Control Selection

Switch14. Display Window

(Front passenger's side)


125


125

B970C01TG-AAT

Automatic Operation

The FATC (Full Automatic TemperatureControl) system automatically controlsheating and cooling as follows:

1. Push the "AUTO" switch. The indicatorlight will illuminate confirming that theFace, Floor and/or Bi-Level modes aswell as the blower speed and air condi-tioner will be controlled automatically.The air conditioning will operate if am-bient temperature is higher than34.7°F(1.5°C) and automatically turnsoff if the ambient temperature dropsbelow 33.08°F(0.6°C).

2. Push the "TEMP" button to set the de-sired temperature.The temperature will increase to themaximum "HI" by pushing on the button. Each push of the button willcause the temperature to increase by1°F(0.5°C).The temperature will decrease to theminimum "LO" by pushing on the button. Each push of the button willcause the temperature to decrease by1°F(0.5°C).

NOTE:If the battery has been discharged ordisconnected, the temperature mode willreset to 73 °F.

You can change the temperature modefrom Fahrenheit to Centigrade as fol-lows;Press the DUAL and MODE button si-multaneously for 3 seconds.The display shows that the unit of tem-perature is adjusted to Fahrenheit orCentigrade (°F →→→→→ °C or °C →→→→→ °F).

HTG2140

B970C01TG

B970C02TG-A

Photo Sensor

NOTE:Never place anything over the sensorwhich is located on the instrument panelto ensure better control of the heatingand cooling system.


126

B980B01Y-AAT

Fan Speed Control Switch

The fan speed can be set to the desiredspeed by pressing the appropriate fanspeed control button. The higher the fanspeed is, the more air is delivered. Press-ing the "OFF" button turns off the fan.

B980B01TG

B980A01Y-AAT

MANUAL OPERATION

The heating and cooling system can becontrolled manually as well by pushingbuttons other than the "AUTO" button. Inthis state, the system sequentially worksaccording to the order of buttons selected.The function of the buttons which are notselected will be controlled automatically.Press the "AUTO" button in order to convertto automatic control of the system.

B740D02Y-AAT

Operation Tips

o If the interior of the car is hot when youfirst get in, open the windows for a fewminutes to expel the hot air.

o When you are using the air conditioningsystem, keep all windows closed tokeep hot air out.

o When moving slowly, as in heavy traffic,shift to a lower gear. This increasesengine speed, which in turn increasesthe speed of the air conditioning com-pressor.

o On steep grades, turn the air condition-ing off to avoid the possibility of theengine overheating.

o During winter months or in periods whenthe air conditioning is not used regu-larly, run the air conditioning once ev-ery month for a few minutes. This willhelp circulate the lubricants and keepyour system in peak operating condi-tion.


127


127

With the "Fresh" mode selected, air entersthe vehicle from the outside and is heatedor cooled according to the function se-lected.

With the "Recirculation" mode selected,air from within the passenger compart-ment will be drawn through the heatingsystem and heated or cooled according tothe function selected.

NOTE:It should be noted that prolonged opera-tion of the heating system in "recircula-tion" mode will give rise to fogging of thewindshield and side windows and the airwithin the passenger compartment willbecome stale. In addition, prolonged useof the air conditioning with the "Recircu-lation" mode selected may result in theair within the passenger compartmentbecoming excessively dry.

B670C01TG-AAT

Air Intake Control Switch

This is used to select fresh outside air orrecirculate inside air.To change the air intake control mode,(Fresh mode, Recirculation mode) pushthe control button.

FRESH MODE ( ) : The indicator lighton the button goes off when the air intakecontrol is in fresh mode.

RECIRCULATION MODE ( ) : Theindicator light on the button is illuminatedwhen the air intake control is in recircula-tion mode.

HTG2144 HTG2145

This is used to select fresh outside air orrecirculate passenger compartment air.Press the ( ) button to activate the "AirQuality Control System". To deactivate thesystem, press the ( ) button again or airintake control button, or set the mode to thedefrost ( ) or floor-defrost ( ) position.

B980C01TG-AAT

Air Quality Control System


128

B980D01TG-AAT

Heating and Cooling System OffB740A01LZ-AAT

Air Conditioning Switch

The air conditioning is turned on or off bypushing the A/C button on the heating/airconditioning control panel.

HTG2147

When pushing the "OFF" button, all of theA/C function will go off except the air flowcontrol and air intake control.

HTG2148

CAUTION:If the windows fog up with the Recircula-tion or A.Q.S mode selected, set the airintake control to the Fresh air position orA.Q.S control to "OFF".

!


129


129

B985A01LZ-GAT

Dual Temperature Control SelectionSwitch

Adjusting the driver and passenger sidetemperature individually

Press the DUAL button to operate thedriver and passenger side temperatureindividually (The indicator light on thebutton is illuminated).

Adjusting the driver and passenger sidetemperature equally

Press the DUAL button again to deactivateDUAL mode (The indicator light on thebutton goes off).

HTG2149

HTG2127

Face-Level

Selecting the "Face" mode will cause air tobe discharged through the face level ventsand rear ventilator.

B980E01TG-GAT

Air Flow Control

B980E01TG

This is used to direct the flow of air. Air canbe directed to the floor, dashboard outlets,or windshield. Four symbols are used torepresent Face, Bi-Level, Floor and Floor-Defrost air position.

The passenger side temperature will beset to the same as the driver side tempera-ture.


130

Floor-Level

Air is discharged through the floor vents,windshield defroster nozzle, side defrosternozzle and side ventilator.

HTG2129 HTG2130

Floor-Defrost Level

Air is discharged through the windshielddefroster nozzle, the floor vents, side de-froster nozzle and side ventilator .If the "Floor-Defrost" mode is selected, theA/C will turn on automatically and "Fresh"mode will be activated.

HTG2128

Bi-Level

Air is discharged through the face vents,floor vents and rear ventilator. This makesit possible to have cooler air from thedashboard vents and warmer air from thefloor outlets at the same time.


131


131

B980G01TG-AAT

Auto De-humidified Control(If Installed)

B980C01TG-AAT

Defrost Switch

When the "Defrost" button is pressed, the" " mode will be automatically selectedand the air will be discharged through thewindshield defrost nozzle, side defrosternozzle and side ventilator. If the "Defrost"mode is selected, the A/C will turn onautomatically and "Fresh" mode will beactivated to improve windshield defrost-ing. To assist in defrosting, the air condi-tioning will operate if ambient temperatureis higher than 37.4°F (3°C) and automati-cally turns off if the ambient temperaturedrops below 32°F (0°C) in manual opera-tion. In automatic operation, the air condi-

B980C01TG

There is a humidity sensor on the centerfascia panel. If it becomes very humidinside the car, the air conditioning is turnedon automatically to control the humidity.

B980G01TG

B730A01L-AAT

Operation Tips

o To keep dust or unpleasant fumes fromentering the car through the ventilationsystem, temporarily set the air intakecontrol at the position. Be sure toreturn the control to the positionwhen the irritation has passed to keepfresh air in the vehicle. This will helpkeep the driver alert and comfortable.

o Air for the heating/cooling system isdrawn in through the grilles just aheadof the windshield. Care should be takenthat these are not blocked by leaves,snow, ice or other obstructions.

o To prevent interior fog on the wind-shield, set the air intake control to thefresh air ( ) position and fan speedto the desired position, turn on the airconditioning system, and adjust tem-perature control to desired tempera-ture.

tioning will operate if ambient temperatureis higher than 34.7°F (1.5°C) and auto-matically turns off if the ambient tempera-ture drops below 33.08°F (0.6°C).


132

CAUTION:o Replace the filter every 10,000 miles

(15,000 km) or once a year.If the car is being driven in severeconditions such as dusty, rough roads,more frequent air conditioner filterinspections and changes are re-quired.

o When the air flow rate is suddenlydecreased, the system should bechecked at an authorized dealer.

!

The air conditioner filter is located in theupper portion of the blower fan.It operates to decrease the amount of pol-lutants entering the car.To replace the air conditioner filter, refer topage 6-17.

AIR CONDITIONER FILTER

B760A01TG-AAT

(FOR EVAPORATOR AND BLOWERUNIT) (If Installed)

B760A01TG

Inside of a vehicle

Evaporator coreFilter

Blower

Outside air

Inside air


133


133DEFROSTING/DEFOGGING

B720A01LZ-AAT

To remove interior fog on the windshield:o Set the air flow control to the defrost ( ) position. (The

A/C will turn on automatically and the "Fresh" mode will beactivated.)

o Set the fan speed control to the maximum speed.o Set the temperature control to the desired position.

To remove frost or exterior fog on the windshield:o Set the air flow control to the defrost ( ) position. (The

A/C will turn on automatically and the "Fresh" mode will beactivated.)

o Set the fan speed control to the maximum speed.o Set the temperature control to warm.

NOTE:When the A/C is operated continuously on the floor-defrost level ( ) or defrost level ( ), it may cause fog to form onthe exterior windshield. If this occurs, set the air flow control to the face level position ( ) and fan speed control to thelow position.

B725A01TG-A B725A02TG-A

Use the heating/ventilation system to defrost or defog the windshield;


134

FM broadcasts are transmitted at high fre-quencies and do not bend to follow theearth's surface. Because of this, FM broad-casts generally begin to fade at short dis-tances from the station. Also, FM signalsare easily affected by buildings, moun-tains, or other obstructions. These canresult in certain listening conditions whichmight lead you to believe a problem existswith your radio. The following conditionsare normal and do not indicate radio trouble:

STEREO SOUND SYSTEM

B750A02A-AAT

How Car Audio WorksThis can be due to factors such as thedistance from the radio station, closenessof other strong radio stations or the pres-ence of buildings, bridges or other largeobstructions in the area.

AM and FM radio signals are broadcastfrom transmitter towers located aroundyour city. They are intercepted by the radioantenna on your car. This signal is thenreceived by the radio and sent to your carspeakers.When a strong radio signal has reachedyour vehicle, the precise engineering ofyour audio system ensures the best pos-sible quality reproduction. However, insome cases the signal coming to yourvehicle may not be strong and clear.

AM broadcasts can be received at greaterdistances than FM broadcasts. This isbecause AM radio waves are transmittedat low frequencies. These long, low fre-quency radio waves can follow the curva-ture of the earth rather than travellingstraight out into the atmosphere. In addi-tion, they curve around obstructions sothat they can provide better signal cover-age.

Ionosphere

B750A02L

AM reception

Mountains

Buildings

Unobstructedarea

FM radio station

B750A03L

Ionosphere FM reception

B750A01L

Obstructed area Iron bridges


135


135

!o Fading - As your car moves away fromthe radio station, the signal will weakenand sound will begin to fade. When thisoccurs, we suggest that you select an-other stronger station.

o Flutter/Static - Weak FM signals or largeobstructions between the transmitterand your radio can disturb the signalcausing static or fluttering noises tooccur. Reducing the treble level maylessen this effect until the disturbanceclears.

B750B04Y-AAT

Using a cellular phone or a two-wayradio

When a cellular phone is used inside thevehicle, noise may be produced from theaudio equipment. This does not mean thatsomething is wrong with the audio equip-ment. In such a case, use the cellularphone at a place as far as possible from theaudio equipment.

WARNING:Don't use a cellular phone when you aredriving. This could result in loss of con-trol, and an accident that may causedeath, serious injury, or property dam-age. You must stop at a safe place to usea cellular phone.

B750A04L B750A05L

o Station Swapping - As an FM signalweakens, another more powerful sig-nal near the same frequency may beginto play. This is because your radio isdesigned to lock onto the clearest sig-nal. If this occurs, select another stationwith a stronger signal.

o Multi-Path Cancellation - Radio signalsbeing received from several directionscan cause distortion or fluttering. Thiscan be caused by a direct and reflectedsignal from the same station, or by sig-nals from two stations with close fre-quencies. If this occurs, select anotherstation until the condition has passed.


136

M445A01TG-AAT

STEREO RADIO OPERATION (M445) (If Installed)

1. POWER ON-OFF, VOLUME ControlKnob

2. BAND Selector3. TUNE Select Knob4. SEEK Select Button5. SCAN Button6. EQUALIZER (EQ) Button7. Adjustment Mode Select (A.MODE)

Button8. PRESET STATION Select Buttons

AUDIO SYSTEM

M445A01TG-A


137


137

M445B01TG-AAT

1. POWER ON-OFF Control Knob

o The radio unit may be operated whenthe ignition key is in the "ACC" or "ON"position. Press the knob to switch thepower on. The display shows the radiofrequency in the radio mode or CD/MP3track in either the CD/MP3 mode. Toswitch the power off, press the knobagain.

o Push the FM/AM or CD/MP3 to turn onthat function without pushing PowerON-OFF control knob.

VOLUME Control

Rotate the knob clockwise to increase thevolume and turn the knob counterclock-wise to reduce the volume.

2. BAND Selector

Pressing the band selector FM/AM changesthe AM, FM1 and FM2 bands.The mode selected is shown on the dis-play.

3. TUNE (Manual) Select Knob

Rotate the knob clockwise to increase thefrequency and turn the knob counterclock-wise to reduce the frequency.

4. SEEK Select Button(Automatic Channel Selection)

Press the SEEK select button. When the ( ) side is pressed, the unit will automati-

cally tune to the next higher frequency and

when the ( ) side is pressed, it willautomatically tune to the next lower fre-quency.

5. SCAN Button

When you press the button, frequency ischanged and the next channel is receivedautomatically. To stay on a station, pressthe SCAN button again.

6. EQUALIZER (EQ) Button

Press the EQ button to select the CLAS-SIC, POPS, ROCK, JAZZ and DEFEATMODE for the desired tone quality. Eachpress of the button changes the display asfollows;

7. Adjustment ModeSelect (A.MODE) Button

Pressing the A.MODE button changes theBASS, MIDDLE, TREBLE, FADER andBALANCE mode. The mode selected isshown on the display. After selecting theeach mode, rotate the VOLUME controlknob clockwise or counterclockwise.

BASS Control

To increase the bass, rotate the knob clock-wise, while to decrease the bass, rotate theknob counterclockwise.

CLASSIC → POPS → ROCK → JAZZ →DEFEAT


138

MIDDLE Control

To increase the MIDDLE, rotate the knobclockwise, while to decrease the MIDDLE,rotate the knob counterclockwise.

TREBLE Control

To increase the TREBLE, rotate the knobclockwise, while to decrease the TREBLE,rotate the knob counterclockwise.

FADER Control

Turn the control knob clockwise to empha-size rear speaker sound (front speakersound will be attenuated).When the control knob is turned counter-clockwise, front speaker sound will beemphasized (rear speaker sound will beattenuated).

BALANCE Control

Rotate the knob clockwise to emphasizeright speaker sound (Left speaker soundwill be attenuated).When the control knob is turned counter-clockwise, left speaker sound will be em-phasized (Right speaker sound will beattenuated).

CAUTION:o Do not place beverages close to the

audio system. The playback mecha-nism may be damaged if you spillthem.

o Do not impact on the audio system, orthe playback mechanism could bedamaged.

!

8. PRESET STATION Select Buttons

Six (6) stations for AM, FM1 and FM2respectively can be preset in the electronicmemory circuit.

HOW TO PRESET STATIONS

Six AM and twelve FM stations may beprogrammed into the memory of the radio.Then, by simply pressing the band selectbutton and/or one of the six station selectbuttons, you may recall any of these sta-tions instantly.To program the stations, follow these steps:o Press band selector to set the band for

AM, FM1 and FM2.o Select the desired station to be stored

by seek or manual tuning.o Determine the preset station select

button you wish to use to access thatstation.

o Press the station select button for morethan two seconds. Beep sound will beheard while depressing the button. Youshould then release the button, andproceed to program the next desiredstation. A total of 18 stations can beprogrammed by selecting one AM andtwo FM station per button.

o When completed, any preset stationmay be recalled by selecting AM, FM1or FM2 band and the appropriate sta-tion button.


139


139

M445C01TG-AAT

COMPACT DISC PLAYER OPERATION (M445) (If Installed)- Compatiable with MP3/WMA/AAC/WAVE

1. AUDIO/MP3 CD Select Button2. TRACK UP/DOWN3. FF/REW Button4. REPEAT (RPT) Button5. RANDOM (RDM) Button6. BOOKMARK (MARK) Button7. PAGE UP/DOWN Button8. EQUALIZER (EQ) Button9. CD EJECT Button10. SCAN Button11. FILE SEARCH Knob12. CHANGE DIRECTORY(DIR) Button

M445C01TG-A


140

M445D01TG-AAT

1. AUDIO/MP3 CD Select Button

o Insert the CD with the label facing up-ward.

o Insert the CD to start CD playback, dur-ing radio operation.

o When a disc is in the CD deck, if youpress the CD button, the CD player willbegin playing even if the radio is beingused.

o The CD player can be used when theignition switch is in either the "ON" or"ACC" position.

o Push the CD button to turn on that func-tion without pushing Power ON-OFFcontrol knob.

NOTE:o Do not stick paper or tape etc., on the

label side or the recording side of anydiscs, as it may cause a malfunction.

o The unit cannot play a CDR (Record-able CD) and CDRW (Rewritable CD)that is not finalized. Please refer to themanual of CDR/ CD-RW recoder orCD-R/CDRW software for more infor-mation on finalization process.

o Depending on the recording status,some CD-Rs/CD-RWs may not beplayed on this unit.

2. TRACK UP/DOWN

o The desired track on the disc currentlybeing played can be selected using thetrack number.

o Press ( ) button once to skip forwardto the beginning of the next track. Press( ) button once to skip back to thebeginning of the track.

3. FF/REW Button

If you want to fast forward or reverse throughthe compact disc track, push and hold theFF or REW button. When you release thebutton, the compact disc player will re-sume playing.

4. REPEAT (RPT) Button

o To repeat the track you are currentlylistening to, press the RPT button. Tocancel, press it again.

o To repeat the music within currentlyplayed folder, press the RPT button formore than one second. Then it will berepeated in sequential order within thecurrently played folder. To cancel, pressit again. (MP3 CD only)

o If you do not release RPT operationwhen the track ends, it will automati-cally be replayed. This process will becontinued until you push the buttonagain.

5. RANDOM (RDM) Button

o For listen to the music in random order,press the RDM Button with beep soundfor more than one second. To cancel,press it again.

o For listen to the music within the cur-rently played folder in random order,press the RDM Button within one sec-ond. To cancel, press it again within onesecond. (If it pressed for more than onesecond, it will be played all in randomorder.) (MP3 CD only)

6. BOOKMARK (MARK) Button

When the CD player unit is operating, thedesired track on the disc can bebookmarked by using the MARK button.o Press the MARK button to bookmark the

desired track for more than one second.This will display the " " symbol on theLCD for five seconds with sequentialnumber. To play the bookmarked tracks,press the MARK button within a second.


141


141

o Press the MARK button to erase thebookmarked tracks for more than onesecond. This will erase the bookmarkwith beep sound.

7. PAGE UP/DOWN Button

Press the button and you can check the filetitle more than 16 characters on MP3 CD.The button doesn't work on file title lessthan 16 characters.



9. CD EJECT Button

When the ( )button is pressed with a CDloaded, the CD will eject. Forcing to eject: To force to eject a CD, press this button formore than 3 seconds. (Do this only whena CD is jammed and you can not eject it inthe normal way - e.g.) in case that you haveinserted 2 CDs by mistake)

10. SCAN Button

o To playback the first 10 seconds of eachtrack, press the button with the beepsound for more than one second. Pressthe button again when reached thedesired track.

o To playback the first 10 seconds of eachtrack in the selected folder, press thebutton within one second. If it pressedfor more than one second, it will play-back the first seconds of each track inthe all folder with beep sound. Press thebutton again within one second whenreached the desired track, the search-ing function is released and the trackyou desired will be played in the se-lected folder. (MP3 CD only)

11. FILE SEARCH Knob (TUNE Se-lect Knob)

o You can skip the track by turning theFILE SEARCH knob to counterclock-wise or clockwise.

After selecting the desired track, press theFILE SEARCH knob to playback the track.If you do not press the FILE SEARCH knobwithin 5 seconds, the file searching func-tion will be released.

12. CHANGE DIRECTORY(DIR) But-ton

o You can move through the folder bypushing the DIR button to up ( ) anddown ( ).

After moving the desired folder, press theFILE SEARCH knob to playback the firstfile in the selected folder.If you do not press the FILE SEARCH knobwithin 5 seconds, the folder searchingfunction will be released.It is not operated in single folder.



142

!CAUTION:

o Do not insert warped or poor qualitydiscs into the CD player as damage tothe unit may occur.

o Do not insert anything like coins intothe player slot as damage to the unitmay occur.

o Do not place beverages close to theaudio system. The playback mecha-nism may be damaged if you spillthem.


o Driving on the off-roads or other vi-brations may skip your compact disc.Do not use the audio system on off-roads as the discs could be scratchedand damaged.

o Do not grip or pull out the disc withyour hand while the disc is being pulledinto the unit by the self loading mecha-nism. These can cause disc scratch-ing to occur or trouble in the compactdisc player.

NOTE:o To assure proper operation of the

unit, keep the vehicle interior tem-perature within a normal range byusing the vehicle’s air conditioning orheating system.

o When replacing the fuse, replace itwith a fuse having the correct capac-ity.

o The bookmarks are all erased whenthe car battery is disconnected orpower off. Therefore, all data will haveto be set again if this should occur.

o This equipment is designed to be usedonly in a 12 volt DC battery systemwith negative ground.

o This unit is made of precision parts.Do not attempt to disassemble oradjust any parts.

o When driving your vehicle, be sure tokeep the volume of the unit set lowenough to allow you to hear soundscoming from the outside.

o Do not expose this equipment (includ-ing the speakers and tape) to water orexcessive moisture.

o Avoid using home-made CD-Record-able or CD-Rewritable discs as theplayer may not operate properly. Whenusing the compact disc player, genu-ine CDs are recommended.


143


143

M455A01TG-AAT



2. BAND Selector3. TUNE Select Knob4. SEEK Select Button5. SCAN Button6. EQUALIZER (EQ) Button7. Adjustment Mode Select (A.MODE)

Button8. PRESET STATION Select Buttons

M455A01TG-A


144

7. Adjustment Mode Select(A.MODE) Button

Pressing the A.MODE button changes theBASS, MIDDLE, TREBLE, FADER andBALANCE mode. The mode selected isshown on the display. After selecting theeach mode, rotate the VOLUME controlknob clockwise or counterclockwise.

BASS Control

To increase the BASS, rotate the knobclockwise, while to decrease the BASS,rotate the knob counterclockwise.

M455B01TG-AAT


o The radio unit may be operated whenthe ignition key is in the "ACC" or "ON"position. Press the knob to switch thepower on. The display shows the radiofrequency in the radio mode, the tapedirection Indicator in the tape mode orCD/MP3 track in either the CD/MP3mode. To switch the power off, press theknob again.

o Push the FM/AM, TAPE or CD/MP3 toturn on that function without pushingPower ON-OFF control knob.

VOLUME Control


2. BAND Selector

Pressing the band selector FM/AM changesthe AM, FM1 and FM2 bands.The mode selected is shown on the dis-play.

3. TUNE (Manual) Select Knob


4. SEEK Select Button(Automatic Channel Selection)

Press the SEEK select button. When the ( ) side is pressed, the unit will automati-

cally tune to the next higher frequency and

when the ( ) side is pressed, it willautomatically tune to the next lower fre-quency.

5. SCAN Button






145


145




Six AM and twelve FM stations may beprogrammed into the memory of the radio.Then, by simply pressing the band selectbutton and/or one of the six station selectbuttons, you may recall any of these sta-tions instantly.To program the stations, follow these steps:o Press band selector to set the band for

AM, FM and FM2.o Select the desired station to be stored



o Press the station select button for morethan two seconds. Beep sound will beheard while depressing the button. Youshould then release the button, andproceed to program the next desiredstation. A total of 18 stations can beprogrammed by selecting one AM andtwo FM station per button.

!

MIDDLE Control


TREBLE Control


FADER Control

Turn the control knob clockwise to empha-size rear speaker sound (front speakersound will be attenuated).When the control knob is turned counter-clockwise, front speaker sound will beemphasized (rear speaker sound will beattenuated).

BALANCE Control

Rotate the knob clockwise to emphasizeright speaker sound. (Left speaker soundwill be attenuated)When the control knob is turned counterclockwise, left speaker sound will be em-phasized (Right speaker sound will beattenuated).


CAUTION:o Do not place beverages close to the

audio system. The playback mecha-nism may be damaged if you spillthem.



146

M455C01TG-GAT

CASSETTE TAPE PLAYER OPERATION (M455) (If Installed)

1. TAPE PROGRAM Button2. TAPE EJECT Button3. AUTO MUSIC Search Button4. FF/REW Button5. REPEAT Button6. DOLBY Button7. EQUALIZER (EQ) Button

M455C01TG-A


147


147

M455D01TG-GAT

1. TAPE PROGRAM Button

o This allows you to play the reverse sideof the tape by merely depressing theprogram button. An arrow will appear inthe display to show tape direction.

o Push the TAPE button to turn on thatfunction without pushing power ON-OFF control knob.

2. TAPE EJECT Button

o When the button is pressed with a cas-sette loaded, the cassette will eject.

o When the button is pressed during FF/REW mode, the cassette will eject.

3. AUTO MUSIC Search Button

Press the button to find the starting point ofeach song in a prerecorded music tape.The quiet space between songs (musthave at least 4 sec. gap) can be acceptedby the AUTO MUSIC search button.o Pressing the button ( ) will play the

beginning of the next music segment.o Pressing the button ( ) will start

replay at the beginning of the music justlistened to.

4. FF/REW Button

o Fast forward tape winding starts whenthe FF button is pressed during PLAY orREW mode.

o Tape PLAY starts when the FF button ispressed again during FF mode.

o Tape rewinding starts when the REWbutton is pressed during PLAY or FFmode.

o Tape PLAY starts when the REW buttonpressed again during REW mode.

5. REPEAT Button

o To repeat the track you are currentlylistening to, press the RPT button. Tocancel, press again.

o If you do not release RPT operationwhen the track ends, it will automati-cally be replayed.

This process will be continued until youpush the button again.

6. DOLBY Button

If you get background noise during tapePLAY, you can reduce this considerablyby merely pressing the DOLBY button. Ifyou want to cancel the DOLBY feature,press the button again.






o The preset station frequencies are allerased when the car battery is dis-connected. Therefore, all data will haveto be set again if this should occur.

o Do not add any oil to the rotating parts.Keep magnets, screwdrivers andother metallic objects away from thetape mechanism and head.



148


o This unit is made of precision parts.Do not attempt to disassemble or ad-just any parts.


o Do not expose this equipment (in-cluding the speakers and tape) towater or excessive moisture.

CAUTION:o Do not insert anything like coins into

the player slot as damage to the unitmay occur.



!


149


149

M455E01TG-AAT

COMPACT DISC PLAYER OPERATION (M455) (If Installed)- Compatiable with MP3/WMA/AAC/WAVE

1. AUDIO/MP3 CD Select Button2. TRACK UP/DOWN3. FF/REW Button4. REPEAT (RPT) Button5. RANDOM (RDM) Button6. BOOKMARK (MARK) Button7. PAGE UP/DOWN Button8. EQUALIZER (EQ) Button9. CD EJECT Button10. SCAN Button11. FILE SEARCH Knob12. CHANGE DIRECTORY(DIR) Button

M455E01TG-A


150

M455F01TG-AAT

1. AUDIO/MP3 CD Select Button

o Insert the CD with the label facing up-ward.

o Insert the CD to start CD playback,during radio operation or cassette tapeplaying.

o When a disc is in the CD deck, if youpress the CD button the CD player willbegin playing even if the radio or cas-sette player is being used.


o Push the CD button to turn on thatfunction without pushing Power ON-OFF control knob.

NOTE:o Do not stick paper or tape etc., on the

label side or the recording side of anydiscs, as it may cause a malfunction.

o The unit cannot play a CDR (Record-able CD) and CDRW (Rewritable CD)that is not finalized. Please refer tothe manual of CDR/CD-RW recoderor CD-R/CDRW software for moreinformation on finalization process.

o Depending on the recording status,some CD-Rs/CD-RWs may not beplayed on this unit.

2. TRACK UP/DOWN


o Press ( )button once to skip forwardto the beginning of the next track. Press( )button once to skip back to thebeginning of the track.

3. FF/REW Button

If you want to fast forward or reverse throughthe compact disc track, push and hold theFF or REW button. When you release thebutton, the compact disc player will re-sume playing.


o To repeat the track you are currentlylistening to, press the RPT button. Tocancel, press it again.





o For listen to the music within the cur-rently played folder in random order,press the RDM Button within one sec-ond. To cancel, press it again within onesecond. (If it pressed for more than onesecond, it will be played all in randomorder.) (MP3 CD only)


151


151


When the CD player unit is operating, thedesired track on the disc can bebookmarked by using the MARK button.o Press the MARK button to bookmark the

desired track for more than one second.This will display the " " symbol on theLCD for five seconds with sequentialnumber. To play the bookmarked tracks,press the MARK button within a second.

o Press the MARK button to erase thebookmarked tracks for more than onesecond. This will erase the bookmarkwith beep sound.





9. CD EJECT Button

When the ( )button is pressed with a CDloaded, the CD will eject. Forcing to eject: To force to eject a CD, press this button formore than 3 seconds. (Do this only whena CD is jammed and you can not eject it inthe normal way - e.g.) in case that you haveinserted 2 CDs by mistake)

10. SCAN Button

o To playback the first 10 seconds of eachtrack, press the button with the beepsound for more than one second. Pressthe button again when reached thedesired track.

o To playback the first 10 seconds of eachtrack in the selected folder, press thebutton within one second. If it pressedfor more than one second, it will play-back the first seconds of each track inthe all folder with beep sound.Press the button again within one sec-ond when reached the desired track,the searching function is released andthe track you desired will be played inthe selected folder. (MP3 CD only)

11. FILE SEARCH Knob (TUNE Se-lect Knob)

o You can skip the track by turning theFILE SEARCH knob to counterclock-wise or clockwise.

After selecting the desired track, press theFILE SEARCH knob to playback the track.If you do not press the FILE SEARCH knobwithin 5 seconds, the file searching func-tion will be released.



152

!



After moving the desired folder, press theFILE SEARCH knob to playback the firstfile in the selected folder.If you do not press the FILE SEARCH knobwithin 5 seconds, the folder searchingfunction will be released.It is not operated in single folder.




o The bookmarks are all erased whenthe car battery is disconnected orpower off. Therefore, all data will haveto be set again if this should occur.




o Do not expose this equipment (includ-ing the speakers and tape) to water orexcessive moisture.

CAUTION:o Do not insert warped or poor quality

discs into the CD player as damage tothe unit may occur.




o Driving on the off-roads or other vi-brations may skip your compact disc.Do not use the audio system on off-roads as the discs could be scratchedand damaged.

o Do not grip or pull out the disc withyour hand while the disc is being pulledinto the unit by the self loading mecha-nism. These can cause disc scratch-ing to occur or trouble in the compactdisc player.

o Avoid home-made using CD-Record-able or CD-Rewritable discs as theplayer may not operate properly. Whenusing the compact disc player, genu-ine CDs are recommended.


153


153

M465A01TG-AAT



2. BAND Selector3. TUNE Select Knob4. Adjustment Mode Select (A.MODE)

Button5. SEEK Select Button6. SCAN Button7. EQUALIZER (EQ) Button8. PRESET STATION Select Buttons

M465A01TG-A


154

M465B01TG-AAT


The radio unit may be operated when theignition key is in the "ACC" or "ON" posi-tion. Press the knob to switch the power on.The LCD shows the radio frequency in theradio mode, the tape direction indicator inthe tape mode or CD track in either the CDmode or CD AUTO CHANGER mode. Toswitch the power off, press the knob again.

VOLUME Control


2. BAND Selector

Pressing the button changes the AM, FM1and FM2 bands.The mode selected is shown on the dis-play.

3. TUNE Select Knob


4. Adjustment modeselect(A.MODE) Button

Pressing the A. MODE button changes theBASS, MIDDLE, TREBLE, FADER andBALANCE mode. The mode selected isshown on the display.

After selecting the each mode, rotate theVOLUME control knob clockwise or coun-terclockwise.

BASS Control

To increase the BASS, rotate the knobclockwise, while to decrease the BASS,rotate the knob counterclockwise.

MIDDLE Control


TREBLE Control


FADER Control

Rotate the control knob clockwise to em-phasize rear speaker sound (front speakersound will be attenuated).When the control knob is turned counter-clockwise, front speaker sound will beemphasized (rear speaker sound will beattenuated).

BALANCE Control

Rotate the knob clockwise to emphasizeright speaker sound (left speaker soundwill be attenuated). When the control knobis turned counterclockwise, left speakersound will be emphasized (right speakersound will be attenuated).

5. SEEK Select Button (AutomaticChannel Selection)

Press the SEEK select button. When the( ) side is pressed, the unit will auto-matically tune to the next higher frequency

and when the ( ) side is pressed, itwill automatically tune to the next lowerfrequency.


155


155

6. SCAN Button





Six AM and twelve FM stations may beprogrammed into the memory of the radio.Then, by simply pressing the AM / FMselect button and/or one of the six stationselect buttons, you may recall any of thesestations instantly. To program the stations,follow these steps:o Press AM/FM selector to set the band for

AM, FM1 and FM2.o Select the desired station to be stored



o Press the station select button for morethan two seconds. A select button indi-cator will show in the display indicatingwhich select button you have de-pressed. The frequency display will flashafter it has been stored into the memory.You should then release the button,and proceed to program the next de-sired station. A total of 18 stations canbe programmed by selecting one AMand two FM station per button.




!


CAUTIONo Do not place beverages close to the

audio system. The audio systemmechanism may be damaged if youspill them.

o Do not strike or allow anything to im-pact the audio system, damage to thesystem mechanisms could occur.


156

M465C01TG-GAT

CASSETTE TAPE PLAYER OPERATION (M465) (If Installed)

1. TAPE PROGRAM Button2. TAPE EJECT Button3. AUTO MUSIC Search Button4. DOLBY Button5. FF/REW Button6. REPEAT Button7. EQUALIZER (EQ) Button

M465C01TG-A


157


157

M465D01TG-GAT

1. TAPE PROGRAM Button

o This allows you to play the reverse sideof the tape by merely pressing the pro-gram button. The PLAY and an arrowwill appear in the display to show tapedirection.

o Push the TAPE button to turn on thatfunction without pushing Power ON/OFF control knob.

2. TAPE EJECT Button

o When the EJECT button is pressed witha cassette loaded, the cassette willeject.

o When the EJECT button is pressedduring FF/REW mode, the cassette willeject.

3. AUTO MUSIC Search Button

Press the button to find the starting point ofeach song in a prerecorded music tape.The quiet space between songs (musthave at least a 4 sec. gap) can be identifiedby the AUTO MUSIC search button.o Pressing the ( ) will play the begin-

ning of the next music segment.

o Pressing the ( ) will start replay atthe beginning of the music just listenedto.

o To stop FF or REW action, press thebutton again.

4. DOLBY Button

If you get background noise during tapePLAY, you can reduce this considerablyby merely pressing the DOLBY button. Ifyou want to cancel the DOLBY feature (

), press the button again.

5. FF/REW Button

o Fast forward tape winding starts whenthe FF button is pressed during PLAY orREW mode.

o Tape PLAY starts when the FF button ispressed again during FF mode.

o Tape rewinding starts when the REWbutton is pressed during PLAY or FFmode.

o Tape PLAY starts when the REW buttonpressed again during REW mode.

6. REPEAT Button

o To repeat the track you are currentlylistening to, press the RPT button. Tocancel, press again.

o If you do not release RPT operationwhen the track ends, it will automati-cally be replayed.

This process will be continued until youpush the button again.


Press the EQ button to select the CLAS-SIC, POPS, JAZZ, ROCK and DEFEATMODE for the desired tone quality. Eachpress of the button changes the display asfollows;



158

CAUTIONo Do not insert anything like coins into

the player slot as damage to the unitmay occur.



!


159


159

M465E01TG-AAT

COMPACT DISC PLAYER OPERATION (M465) (If Installed)- Compatiable with MP3/WMA

1. LOAD Button2. AUDIO/MP3 CD Select Button3. CD EJECT Button4. TRACK UP/DOWN5. PAGE UP/DOWN Button6. FF/REW Button7. EQUALIZER (EQ) Button8. SCAN Button9. BOOKMARK (MARK) Button10. REPEAT (RPT) Button11. RANDOM (RDM) Button12. DISC UP/DOWN Button13. FILE SEARCH Knob14. CHANGE DIRECTORY (DIR) Button

M465E01TG-A


160

M465F01TG-AAT

1. LOAD Button

This compact disc player will accommo-date up to six compact discs.To insert one disc into the player, do thefollowing:1. Press and release the LOAD Button.2. Green light on the slot will be illumi-

nated and the lowest number of emptyslot will blink on the display. After "WAIT"is displayed on the LCD, the slot willopen with "INSERT" displayed on theLCD.

3. Insert a disc partway into the slot, labelside up. The player will pull the disc in.When the disc is inserted, the disc willbegin to play automatically.

NOTE:o The disc can be only inserted while

the green light is blinking on the slot.o This CD player is suitable only for 12

cm discs, do not use irregular shapedCDs.

To insert multiple discs into the player, dothe followings:

1. Press and hold the LOAD button for onesecond or more. You will then hear abeep sound and the green light on theslot will be illuminated, and the num-bers of empty disc will blink on thedisplay.

2. After "WAIT" is displayed on the LCDwith the lowest number of empty slotblinking, the slot will open with "IN-SERT" displayed on the LCD.

3. Insert a disc partway into the slot, labelside up. The player will pull the disc in.Once the disc is loaded, the numbers ofthe empty disc will blink on the displaycontinuously. If the next "DISC NO." isdisplayed when the slot is illuminated,you can then load another disc.

4. Load the remaining disc by followingthe same procedures 1 and 2. Whenyou finished loading 6 discs, the CDplayer will begin to play the last CDloaded.

5. To load more than one disc but less thansix, complete Steps 1 and 2. When youhave finished loading discs, press LOADbutton to cancel the loading function orwait for 10 seconds. The CD player willbegin to play the last CD loaded. Aseach CD starts to play, the DISC num-ber will appear on the display.

NOTE:The disc player takes up to six discs.Do not try to load more than six.

2. Audio/MP3 CD Select Button

o Press the CD Button to start CD play-back, during radio operation or cas-sette tape playing.

o When discs are in the CD deck, if youpress the CD button, the CD player willbegin playing even if the radio or cas-sette player is being used.


3. CD EJECT Button

o When the EJECT button is pressed witha CD loaded, the CD will eject.

o To eject all of the discs, press this buttonfor one second or more.

4. TRACK UP/DOWN



161


161

o Press ( ) once to skip forward to thebeginning of the next track.

o Press ( ) once to skip back to thebeginning of the track.



6. FF/REW Button

While the disc is playing, if you hold downthe FF button continuously, the selectedtrack is advanced. Holding down the REWbutton continuously moves the selectedtrack back.


Press the EQ button to select the CLAS-SIC, POPS, JAZZ, ROCK and DEFEATMODE for the desired tone quality. Eachpress of the button changes the display asfollows;

8. SCAN Button

o Press the SCAN button to playback thefirst 10 seconds of each track.

o Press the SCAN button again within 10sec. when you have reached the de-sired track.

o To playback the first 10 seconds of eachtrack in the selected folder, Press theSCAN button within a second. (MP3 CDonly)

o To playback the first 10 seconds of eachfile in the selected DISC (MP3 CD only),when press SCAN button for one sec-ond or more.


When the CD player unit is operating, thedesired track on the disc can bebookmarked by using the MARK button.o Press the MARK button for more than

one second to bookmark the desiredtrack. "M" will be displayed on the LCDand "MEMORY NO." will display forapproximately five seconds with beepsound. To play the bookmarked tracks,press the MARK button within one sec-ond and select the book-marked trackto play.

o To erase a bookmarked track, press theMARK button for more than one sec-ond. This will erase the bookmark withbeep sound.

If you want to delete all tracks stored onMark Memory, press FILE SEARCH knobin the Mark Play mode for more than onesecond. You will hear a beep sound and alltracks will be deleted from Mark Memorywith "MARK DELETE ALL" displayed onthe LCD.

NOTE:Tracks stored on Mark Memory will beautomatically erased after you eject CDsthat contain those tracks.



162


o To repeat the track you are currentlylistening to, press the RPT button. Tocancel, press it again. If it pressed formore than one second, it will be re-peated all tracks within currently playedCD.





o For listen to the music within the cur-rently played folder in random order,press the RDM Button within one sec-ond. To cancel, press it again within onesecond. If it pressed for more than onesecond, it will be played all in randomorder within currently played CD (MP3CD only).

12. DISC UP/DOWN Button

o By pressing "DISC "/"DISC " whileCD changer is playing, you can move tothe previews/next disc and playbackautomatically begins.

o If any of the slots does not contain a CD,your car audio will skip empty slot andplays only slot that contains a CD. Whenswitching CD’s, the LCD displays theselected CD’s number.

13. FILE SEARCH Knob(TUNE SELECT Knob)

o You can move through the track byturning the FILE SEARCH knob clock-wise or counterclockwise.

o After moving the desired file, press theFILE SEARCH knob to playback in theselected file.

o If you do not press the FILE SEARCHknob within five seconds, the file search-ing function will be released.



o After moving the desired folder, pressthe FILE SEARCH knob to play back inthe the selected folder.If you do not press the FILE SEARCHknob within 5 seconds, the folder search-ing function will be released. It is notoperated in a single folder.





163


163

CAUTIONo Do not insert warped or poor quality

discs into the CD player as damage tothe unit may occur.




!

o All stored bookmarks are all erasedwhen the car battery is disconnectedor power to the vehicle is lost. If thisoccurs, the bookmarks will have to bereset.

o Do not add any oil to the rotating parts.Keep magnets, screwdrivers andother metallic objects away from thetape mechanism and head.

o Off-road or rough surface driving maycause the compact disc to skip. Donot use the compact disc when driv-ing in such conditions as damage tothe compact disc face could occur.

o Do not attempt to grab or pull thecompact disc out while the disc isbeing pulled into the audio unit by theself-loading mechanism. Damage tothe audio unit and compact disc couldoccur.




o Do not expose this equipment (includ-ing the speakers and tape) to water orexcessive oisture.

o Avoid using home-made recordedcompact discs in your audio unit. Origi-nal compact discs are recommended.

o The unit may not play CD-RW(Rewritable) discs.


164 CARE OF DISCS

B850A02L

B850A02F-AAT

Proper HandlingStorage

When not in use, place your discs in theirindividual case and store them in a coolplace away from the sun, heat, and dust.Do not grip or pull out the disc with yourhand while the disc is being pulled into theunit by the self loading mechanism.

Keep Your Discs Clean

Handle your disc as shown. Do not dropthe disc. Hold the disc so you will not leavefingerprints on the surface. If the surface isscratched, it may cause the pickup to skipsignal tracks. Do not affix tape, paper, orgummed labels on the disc. Do not write onthe disc.

Damaged Disc

Do not attempt to play damaged, warpedor cracked discs. These could severelydamage the playback mechanism.

Fingerprints, dust, or soil on the surface ofa disc could cause the pickup to skip signaltracks. Wipe the surface clean with a cleansoft cloth. If the surface is heavily soiled,dampen a clean soft cloth in a solution ofmild neutral detergent to wipe it clean. Seedrawing.

B850A01L

CARE OF CASSETTE TAPES

B860A01A-AAT

Proper care of your cassette tapes willextend the tape life and increase yourlistening enjoyment. Always protect yourtapes and cassette cases from direct sun-light and severely cold and dusty condi-tions. When not in use, cassettes shouldalways be stored in the original protectivecassette case. When the vehicle is very hotor cold, allow the interior temperature tobecome more comfortable before listen-ing to your cassettes.

B860A01L


165


165

B860A03L

o The playback head, capstan and pinchrollers will develop a coating of taperesidue that can result in deteriorationof sound quality, such as a waveringsound. They should be cleaned monthlyusing a commercially available headcleaning tape or special solution avail-able from audio specialty shops. Followthe supplier's directions carefully andnever oil any part of the tape player unit.

o Always be sure that the tape is tightlywound on its reel before inserting in theplayer. Rotate a pencil in the drivesprockets to wind up any slack.

Head

Cotton applicatorB860A02L

o Keep all magnetized objects, such aselectric motors, speakers or transform-ers away from your cassette tapes andtape player unit.

o Store cassettes in a cool, dry place withthe open side facing down to preventdust from setting in the cassette body.

o Avoid repeated fast reverse usage toreplay one given tune or tape section.This can cause poor tape winding tooccur, and eventually cause excessiveinternal drag and poor audio quality inthe cassette. If this occurs, it can some-times be corrected by fast winding thetape from end to end several times. Ifthis does not correct the problem, do notcontinue to use the tape in your vehicle.

B860A01TG

o Be sure that the cassette label is notloose or peeling off or tape ejection maybe difficult.

o Never touch or soil the actual audiotape surfaces.

o Never leave a cassette inserted in theplayer when not being played. Thiscould damage the tape player unit andthe cassette tape.

o We strongly recommend against theuse of tapes longer than C-60 (60 min-utes total). Tapes such as C-120 or C-180 are very thin and do not perform aswell in the automotive environment.


166 ANTENNA

B870D01Y-AAT

Glass Antenna

When the radio power switch is turned onwhile the ignition key is in either the "ON"or "ACC" position, your car will receiveboth AM and FM broadcast signals throughthe antenna in the rear window glass.

HTG2189

NOTE:Look at a tape before you insert it.If the tape is loose, tighten it by turningone of the hubs with a pencil or yourfinger.If the label is peeling off, do not put it in thedrive mechanism.Do not leave tapes sitting where they areexposed to heat or high humidity, suchas on top of the dashboard or in theplayer.If a tape is exposed to excessively hot orcold, let it reach a moderate tempera-ture before putting it in the player.

CAUTION:o Do not clean the inner side of the rear

window glass with an abrasive type ofglass cleaner or use a scraper toremove foreign deposits from the in-ner surface of the glass as this maycause damage to the antenna ele-ments.

o Avoid adding metallic coatings to therear window glass, such as Ni, Cd, etc.These can disturb receiving AM andFM broadcast signals.

!

DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI

2Engine Exhaust Can Be Dangerous! ............................ 2-2Before Starting the Engine ............................................ 2-3Key Positions................................................................ 2-4Starting ......................................................................... 2-5Automatic Transaxle ..................................................... 2-5Power Adjustable Pedals .............................................2-10Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ...................................2-11Electronic Stability Control (ESC) System ..................2-11Good Braking Practices ..............................................2-13Driving for Economy ....................................................2-14Smooth Cornering ........................................................2-15Winter Driving ..............................................................2-15Trailer or Vehicle Towing .............................................2-18Vehicle Load Limit ........................................................2-22

2

2 DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI

2

WARNING: ENGINE EXHAUST CAN BE DANGEROUS!C010A03A-AAT

Engine exhaust fumes can be extremely dangerous. If, at any time, you smell exhaust fumes inside the vehicle, open thewindows immediately.

o Do not inhale exhaust fumes.Exhaust fumes contain carbon monoxide, a colorless, odorless gas that can cause unconsciousness and death byasphyxiation.

o Be sure the exhaust system does not leak.The exhaust system should be checked whenever the vehicle is raised to change the oil or for any other purpose. If youhear a change in the sound of the exhaust or if you drive over something that strikes the underneath side of the car, havethe exhaust system checked as soon as possible by your Hyundai dealer.

o Do not run the engine in an enclosed area.Letting the engine idle in your garage, even with the garage door open, is a hazardous practice. Never run the enginein your garage any longer than it takes to start the engine and back the car out.

o Avoid idling the engine for prolonged periods with people inside the car.If it is necessary to idle the engine for a prolonged period with people inside the car, be sure to do so only in an open areawith the air intake set at "Fresh" and fan operating at one of the higher speeds so fresh air is drawn into the interior.

If you must drive with the trunk lid open because you are carrying objects that make this necessary:1. Close all windows.2. Open side vents.3. Set the air intake control at "Fresh", the air flow control at "Floor" or "Face" and the fan at one of the higher speeds.To assure proper operation of the ventilation system, be sure the ventilation air intakes located just in front of the windshieldare kept clear of snow, ice, leaves or other obstructions.

!

2DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI

3

! PROPOSITION 65 WARNING:Engine exhaust and a wide variety ofautomobile components and parts, in-cluding components found in the interiorfurnishings in a vehicle, contain or emitchemicals known to the State of Califor-nia to cause cancer and birth defectsand reproductive harm. In addition, cer-tain fluids contained in vehicles and cer-tain products of component wear con-tain or emit chemicals known to the Stateof California to cause cancer and birthdefects or other reproductive harm.

BEFORE STARTINGTHE ENGINE

C020A01A-AAT

Before you start the engine, you shouldalways:

1. Look around the vehicle to be surethere are no flat tires, puddles of oil,water or other indications of possibletrouble.

2. After entering the car, check to be surethe parking brake is engaged.

3. Check that all windows and lights areclean.

4. Check that the interior and exteriormirrors are clean and in position.

5. Check your seat, seatback and head-rest to be sure they are in their properpositions.

6. Lock all the doors.7. Fasten your seat belt and be sure that

all other occupants have fastenedtheirs.

8. Turn off all lights and accessories thatare not needed.

9. When you turn the ignition switch to"ON", check that all appropriate warn-ing lights are operating and that youhave sufficient fuel.

10. Check the operation of warning lightsand all bulbs when key is in the "ON"position.

TO START THE ENGINE

C030A01TG-AAT

COMBINATION IGNITION SWITCH

o Place the shift lever in "P" (park) anddepress the brake pedal fully.

o To start the engine, insert the ignitionkey and turn it to the "START" position.Release it as soon as the engine starts.Do not hold the key in the "START"position for more than 15 seconds.

NOTE:o For safety, the engine will not start if

the shift lever is not in "P" or "N"Position.

o The ignition key cannot be turned from"ACC" position to "LOCK" positionunless the shift lever is in the "P"(Park) position or the negative bat-tery terminal is disconnected fromthe battery. To remove the key, al-ways confirm that the shift lever issecurely positioned in "P" (Park).

o For additional information about start-ing, see page 2-5.


4

NOTE:Do not hold the key in the "START" posi-tion for more than 15 seconds.

o "ON"

When the key is in the "ON" position, theignition is on and all accessories may beturned on. If the engine is not running, thekey should not be left in the "ON" position.This will discharge the battery and mayalso damage the ignition system.

o "ACC"

With the key in the "ACC" position, someelectrical accessories (radio, etc.) may beoperated.

o "LOCK"

The key can be removed or inserted in thisposition.To protect against theft, the steering wheellocks by removing the key.

NOTE:To unlock the steering wheel, insert thekey, and then turn the steering wheel andkey simultaneously.

C070C01A-AAT

To remove the ignition key

1. Turn the ignition key to the "ACC" posi-tion.

2. Simultaneously push and turn the igni-tion key counterclockwise from the"ACC" position to the "LOCK" position.

3. The key can be removed in the "LOCK"position.

C070C01E

LOCK

ACC

ON

START

KEY POSITIONS

C040A01A-AAT

CAUTION:The engine should not be turned off or thekey removed from the ignition key cylin-der while the car is in motion. The steer-ing wheel is locked by removing the key.

!

o "START"

The engine is started in this position. It willcrank until you release the key.

C040A01E

LOCK

ACC

ON

START


5STARTING

!

C050A01A-AAT

WARNING:Never run the engine in a closed or poorlyventilated area any longer than is neededto move your car in or out of the area. Thecarbon monoxide gas emitted is odor-less and can cause serious injury ordeath.

C050A01E

C050B01TG-AAT

Normal Conditions:

The Starting Procedure:

1. Insert key, and fasten the seat belt.2. Depress the brake pedal fully and place

the selector lever in "P" (park) position.3. After turning the ignition key to the "ON"

position, make certain all warning lightsand gauges are functioning properlybefore starting the engine.

4. Turn the ignition key to the "START"position and release it when the enginestarts.After the engine has started, allow theengine to run for 10 to 20 seconds priorto placing the vehicle in gear.The starter should not be operated formore than 15 seconds at a time. Wait15-30 seconds between starting at-tempts to protect the starter from over-heating.

AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE

C090A01TG-GAT

The highly efficient Hyundai automatictransaxle has five forward speeds and onereverse speed. The individual speeds areselected automatically, depending on theposition of the speed selector lever. Theselector lever has 2 gates; the main gateand the manual gate.

NOTE:For information on manual gate opera-tion, refer to "Sports Mode".

In the main gate, the selector lever has 4positions.

G110D01TG


6

! CAUTION:Never shift into "R" or "P" position whilethe vehicle is moving.

The indicator lights in the instrument clus-ter indicate the selector lever position whenthe ignition is switched "ON". During sportsmode operation, the gear currently in usedisplays in the numeral indicator.

C090B02A-AAT

The function of each position is asfollows:

o P (Park):

Use to hold the vehicle in place whenparked or while starting the engine. When-ever parking the car, apply the parkingbrake and shift the selector lever to the "P"(Park) position.

CAUTION:Never place the selector lever in the "P"(Park) position unless the vehicle isfully stopped. Failure to observe thiscaution will cause severe damage tothe transaxle.

!NOTE:

Depress the brake pedal when shift-ing.

The selector lever can be shiftedfreely.

The first few shifts on a new vehicle, orif the battery has been disconnected,may be somewhat abrupt. This is a nor-mal condition, and the shifting sequencewill adjust after shifts are cycled a fewtimes by the T.C.M (Transaxle ControlModule).

C090A02NF


7

C090D02A-AAT

o N (Neutral):

In the "N" position, the transaxle is in neu-tral, which means that no gears are en-gaged. The engine can be started with theshift lever in "N" position, although this isnot recommended except if the enginestalls while the car is moving.

C090C01A-AAT

o R (Reverse):

Use for backing up the vehicle. Bring thecar to a complete stop before shifting theselector lever to "R" position.

C090E01TG-GAT

o D (Drive):

Use for normal driving. The transaxle willautomatically shift through a five gear se-quence.

CAUTION:o In sports mode, the driver must ex-

ecute upward shifts in accordancewith prevailing road conditions, tak-ing care to keep the engine speedbelow the red zone.

o For engine protection, upward shiftsare made automatically when theengine rpm reaches the red zone.

o By rapidly moving the selector leverbackwards (-) twice it is possible toskip one gear, i.e., 3rd to 1st, 4th to 2ndor 5th to 3rd. Since sudden enginebraking and/or rapid acceleration cancause a loss of traction, downshiftsmust be made carefully in accordancewith the vehicle's speed.

!

C090F01TG-GAT

Sports Mode

Whether the vehicle is stationary or inmotion, sports mode is selected by push-ing the selector lever from the "D" positioninto the manual gate. To return to "D" rangeoperation, push the selector lever backinto the main gate.In sports mode, moving the selector leverbackwards and forwards can make rapidgearshifts simple. In contrast to a manualtransaxle, the sports mode allows gear-shifts with the accelerator pedal depressed.

C090F01TG

UP (+) : Push the lever forward once to shiftup one gear.DOWN (-) : Pull the lever backwards onceto shift down one gear.SKIP : By rapidly moving the selector for-ward or backward twice, it is possible toskip one gear, i.e. 1st to 3rd or 3rd to 1st .


8

NOTE:o In sports mode, only the five forward

gears can be selected. To reverse orpark the vehicle, move the selectorlever to the "R" or "P" position asrequired.

o In sports mode, downward shifts aremade automatically when the vehicleslows down. When the vehicle stops,1st gear is automatically selected.

o To maintain the required levels of ve-hicle performance and safety, the sys-tem may not execute certain gear-shifts when the selector lever is oper-ated.

o Before driving away from a stop on aslippery road, push the selector leverforward into the +(UP) position. Thiscauses the transaxle to shift into 2ndgear which is better for smooth driv-ing away on a slippery road. Push theselector lever to the -(DOWN) side toshift back to 1st gear.

C090H01L-GAT

NOTE:o For smooth and safe operation, de-

press the brake pedal when shiftingfrom "Neutral" position or "Park"position to a forward or reverse gear.

o The ignition key must be in the "ON"position and the brake pedal fully de-pressed in order to move the shiftlever from the "P" (Park) position toany of the other positions.

o It is always possible to shift from "R","N", or "D" position to "P" position.The vehicle must be fully stopped toavoid transaxle damage.

!

C090I03L-GAT

CAUTION:o Shift into "R" and "P" position only

when the vehicle has completelystopped.

o Do not accelerate the engine in re-verse or any of the forward positionswith the brakes applied.

o Always apply the footbrake whenshifting from "P" or "N", to "R" or"D"position.

o Do not use the "P" (Park) position inplace of the parking brake. Alwaysset the parking brake, shift thetransaxle into "P" (Park) position andturn off the ignition when you leave thevehicle, even momentarily. Neverleave the vehicle unattended whilethe engine is running.

o When accelerating from a stop on asteep hill, the vehicle may have atendency to roll backwards. Shiftingthe shift lever into 2nd gear while inSport mode will help prevent the ve-hicle from rolling backwards.

o Check the automatic transaxle fluidlevel regularly, and add fluid as nec-essary.

o See the maintenance schedule forthe proper fluid recommendation.


9

!

C090N04O-AAT

Good Driving Practices

o Never move the gear selector leverfrom "P" or "N" to any other position withthe accelerator pedal depressed.

o Never move the gear selector lever into"P" when the vehicle is in motion.

o Be sure the car is completely stoppedbefore you attempt to shift into "R".

o Never take the car out of gear and coastdown a hill. This may be extremelyhazardous. Always leave the car in gearwhen moving.

o Do not "ride" the brakes. This can causethem to overheat and malfunction. In-stead, when you are driving down along hill, slow down and shift to a lowergear. When you do this, engine brakingwill help slow the car.

o Slow down before shifting to a lowergear. Otherwise, the lower gear may notbe engaged.

WARNING:o Avoid high cornering speeds.o Do not make quick steering wheel

movements, such as sharp lanechanges or fast, sharp turns.

o Always wear your seat belts.In a collision, an unbelted person issignificantly more likely to die than aperson wearing a seat belt.

o The risk of rollover is greatly in-creased if you lose control of yourvehicle at highway speeds.

C090J01NF-GAT

SHIFT LOCK RELEASE

If you cannot move the shift lever from the"P" (Park) position to any other positionwith the brake pedal fully depressed andthe ignition key in the "ON" position, re-move the cap on the console and with athin object such as a flat-head screwdriver,push the shift lock release button down.Then, with the brake pedal depressed,move the shift lever to the desired position,and then the shift lock release button willautomatically return to its original positionafter shifting from the "P" (Park) position.Then, reinstall the cap.

C090J01TG

If you need to use the shift lock release, itcould mean your car is developing a prob-lem. Have the car checked by your Hyundaidealer.

o Always use the parking brake. Do notdepend on placing the transaxle in "P"to keep the car from moving.

o Exercise extreme caution when drivingon a slippery surface. Be especiallycareful when braking, accelerating orshifting gears. On a slippery surface, anabrupt change in vehicle speed cancause the drive wheels to lose tractionand the vehicle to go out of control.

o Optimum vehicle performance andeconomy is obtained by smoothly de-pressing and releasing the acceleratorpedal.


10

!

POWER ADJUSTABLEPEDALS

C100A01NF-AAT

(If Installed)

To adjust the position of the acceleratorand brake pedals, turn the ignition key tothe "ON" position with the selector lever inthe "P" position and push the switch.

If you push the " " portion of the switch, thepedals move rearward.If you push the " " portion of the switch, thepedals move forward.

C100A01TG-A !

Setting the driver's position

1) Be sure the parking brake is engaged.2) Move the accelerator and brake pedals

to the front most position by pushing the" " portion of the switch.

3) Adjust the seat position and the steer-ing wheel angle properly.

4) Move the pedals toward you until youcan fully depress the brake pedal bypushing the " " portion of the switch.

5) Depress the pedals a few times to getused to the feel after adjusting.

WARNING:o Adjust the pedals after parking the

vehicle on level ground. Never at-tempt to adjust the pedals while thevehicle is moving.

o Never adjust the pedals with your footon the accelerator pedal as this mayresult in increasing the engine speedand acceleration.

o Make sure that you can fully depressthe brake pedal before driving. Other-wise, you may not be able to hold downthe brake pedal firmly in an emer-gency stop.

o Loss of control often occurs if two ormore wheels drop off the roadwayand the driver oversteers to reenterthe roadway.

o In the event your vehicle leaves theroadway, do not steer sharply. Instead,slow down before pulling back into thetravel lanes.

o Never exceed posted speed limits.o If your vehicle becomes stuck in snow,

mud, sand, etc., then you may attemptto rock the vehicle free by moving itforward and backward. Do not attemptthis procedure if people or objects areanywhere near the vehicle. Duringthe rocking operation the vehicle maysuddenly move forward of backwardas it becomes unstuck, causing in-jury or damage to nearby people orobjects.

WARNING:


11ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYS-TEM (ABS)

C120A01TG-AAT

(If Installed)

The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) is de-signed to prevent wheel lock-up duringsudden braking or on hazardous roadsurfaces. The ABS control module moni-tors the wheel speed and controls thepressure applied to each brake. Thus, inemergency situations or on slick roads,ABS will increase vehicle control duringbraking.

NOTE:o A click sound may be heard in the

engine compartment when the ve-hicle begins to move after the engineis started. These conditions are nor-mal and indicate that the anti-lockbrake system is functioning properly.

o During ABS operation, a pulsation maybe felt in the brake pedal when thebrakes are applied. Also, a noise maybe heard in the engine compartmentwhile braking. These conditions arenormal and indicate that the anti-lockbrake system is functioning properly.

! WARNING:ABS will not prevent accidents due toimproper or dangerous driving maneu-vers. Even though vehicle control isimproved during emergency braking,always maintain a safe distance betweenyou and objects ahead. Vehicle speedsshould always be reduced during ex-treme road conditions.The braking distance for cars equippedwith an anti-lock braking system may belonger than for those without it in thefollowing road conditions.During these conditions the vehicleshould be driven at reduced speeds:

o Rough, gravel or snow-coveredroads.

o With tire chains installed.o On roads where the road surface is

pitted or has different surface height.

The safety features of an ABS equippedvehicle should not be tested by highspeed driving or cornering. This couldendanger the safety of yourself or oth-ers.

ELECTRONIC STABILITYCONTROL (ESC) SYSTEM

C310A01NF-AAT

(If Installed)

The Electronic Stability Control (ESC) sys-tem is designed to stabilize the vehicleduring cornering manuevers. ESC checkswhere you are steering and where thevehicle is actually going. ESC applies thebrakes at individual wheels and intervenesin the engine management system to sta-bilize the vehicle.

C310A01TG-A


12

!

C310B01TG-AAT

ESC ON/OFF Mode

When the ESC is operating, the ESC indi-cator in the instrument cluster will blink.If you turn the system off by pressing theESC switch, the ESC-OFF indicator willcome on and stay on. In the ESC-OFFmode, the stability control will be deacti-vated. Adjust your driving accordingly. Toturn the system back on, press the switchagain. The ESC-OFF indicator should gooff.

NOTE:o The ESC mode will automatically be

turned ON after the engine is turnedoff and restarted.

o A click sound may be heard in theengine compartment when the ve-hicle begins to move after the engineis started. These conditions are nor-mal and indicate that the ElectronicStability Control System is function-ing properly.

The Electronic Stability Control (ESC) sys-tem is an electronic system designed tohelp the driver maintain vehicle controlunder adverse conditions. It is not a substi-tute for safe driving practices. Factors in-cluding speed, road conditions and driversteering input can all affect whether ESCwill be effective in preventing a loss ofcontrol. It is still your responsibility to driveand corner at reasonable speeds and toleave a sufficient margin of safety.

!

! WARNING:Electronic stability control is only a driv-ing aid; all normal precautions for driv-ing in inclement weather and on slipperyroad surfaces should be observed.

CAUTION:Driving with varying tire or wheel sizesmay cause the ESC system to malfunc-tion. When replacing tires, make surethey are the same size as your originaltires.

o During ESC operation, a pulsation maybe felt in the brake pedal when thebrakes are applied. Also, a noise maybe heard in the engine compartmentwhile braking. These conditions arenormal and indicate that the Elec-tronic Stability Control System is func-tioning properly.

WARNING:ESC will not prevent accidents due toimproper or dangerous driving maneu-vers. Even though vehicle control is im-proved during emergency braking, al-ways maintain a safe distance betweenyou and objects ahead. Vehicle speedsshould always be reduced during ex-treme road conditions.The braking distance for cars equippedwith an Electronic Stability Control Sys-tem may be longer than for those withoutit in the following road conditions.During these conditions the vehicleshould be driven at reduced speeds:


13

!C310D01NF-AAT

Indicators and Warning

The indicators should illuminate when theignition key is turned to ON or START butshould go out after three seconds.If the indicators do not illuminate, or theESC or ESC-OFF indicator does not go outafter 3 seconds, have the vehicle checkedby an authorized dealer.

Should there be any unusual operation ofthe device while driving, the ESC-OFFindicator illuminates as a warning.If the ESC-OFF indicator illuminates, driveyour car to a safe place and stop theengine.Then, start the engine again to check if theESC-OFF indicator goes out.

If the indicator remains lit even after theengine has been started, have your carchecked by an authorized Hyundai dealer.

o Rough, gravel or snow-coveredroads.

o With tire chains installed.o On roads where the road surface is

pitted or has different surface height.

The safety features of ESC equippedvehicle should not be tested by highspeed driving or cornering. This couldendanger the safety of yourself or oth-ers.

WARNING: !

GOOD BRAKING PRAC-TICES

C130A01A-AAT

WARNING:Nothing should be carried on top of theshelf panel behind the rear seat. If therewere an accident or a sudden stop, suchobjects could move forward and causedamage to the vehicle or injure the occu-pants.

o After being parked, check to be sure theparking brake is not engaged and thatthe parking brake indicator light is outbefore driving away.

o Driving through water may get thebrakes wet. They can also get wet whenthe car is washed. Wet brakes can bedangerous! Your car will not stop asquickly if the brakes are wet. Wet brakesmay cause the car to pull to one side. Todry the brakes, apply the brakes lightlyuntil the braking action returns to nor-mal, taking care to keep the car undercontrol at all times. If the braking actiondoes not return to normal, stop as soonas it is safe to do so and call yourHyundai dealer for assistance.


14 DRIVING FOR ECONOMY

C140A02A-AAT

You can save fuel and get more miles fromyour car if you follow these suggestions:

o Drive smoothly. Accelerate at a moder-ate rate. Don't make "jack-rabbit" startsor full-throttle shifts and maintain asteady cruising speed. Don't race be-tween stoplights. Try to adjust yourspeed to that of the other traffic so youdon't have to change speeds unneces-sarily. Avoid heavy traffic whenever pos-sible. Always maintain a safe distancefrom other vehicles so you can avoidunnecessary braking. This also reducesbrake wear.

o Drive at a moderate speed. The fasteryou drive, the more fuel your car uses.Driving at a moderate speed, espe-cially on the highway, is one of the mosteffective ways to reduce fuel consump-tion.

o Don't "ride" the brake or clutch pedal.This can increase fuel consumption andalso increase wear on these compo-nents. In addition, driving with your footresting on the brake pedal may causethe brakes to overheat, which reducestheir effectiveness and may lead to moreserious consequences.

o Use caution when parking on a hill.Firmly engage the parking brake andplace the gear selector lever in "P" (au-tomatic transaxle) or in first or reversegear (manual transaxle). If your car isfacing downhill, turn the front wheelsinto the curb to help keep the car fromrolling. If your car is facing uphill, turnthe front wheels away from the curb tohelp keep the car from rolling. If there isno curb or if it is required by otherconditions to keep the car from rolling,block the wheels.

o Under some conditions your parkingbrake can freeze in the engaged posi-tion. This is most likely to happen whenthere is an accumulation of snow or icearound or near the rear brakes or if thebrakes are wet. If there is a risk that theparking brake may freeze, apply it onlytemporarily while you put the gear se-lector lever in "P" (automatic) or in firstor reverse gear (manual transaxle) andblock the rear wheels so the car cannotroll. Then release the parking brake.

o Do not hold the vehicle on the upgradewith the accelerator pedal. This cancause the transaxle to overheat. Al-ways use the brake pedal or parkingbrake.

o Don't coast down hills with the car out ofgear. This is extremely hazardous. Keepthe car in gear at all times, use thebrakes to slow down, then shift to alower gear so that engine braking willhelp you maintain a safe speed.

o Don't "ride" the brake pedal. Restingyour foot on the brake pedal while driv-ing can be dangerous because it canresult in the brakes overheating andlosing their effectiveness. It also in-creases the wear of the brake compo-nents.

o If a tire goes flat while you are driving,apply the brakes gently and keep thecar pointed straight ahead while youslow down. When you are moving slowlyenough for it to be safe to do so, pull offthe road and stop in a safe place.

o If your car is equipped with an automatictransaxle, don't let your car creep for-ward. To avoid creeping forward, keepyour foot firmly on the brake pedal whenthe car is stopped.


15

o Take care of your tires. Keep them in-flated to the recommended pressure.Incorrect inflation, either too much ortoo little, results in unnecessary tirewear. Check the tire pressures at leastonce a month.

o Be sure that the wheels are alignedcorrectly. Improper alignment can re-sult from hitting curbs or driving too fastover irregular surfaces. Poor alignmentcauses faster tire wear and may alsoresult in other problems as well asgreater fuel consumption.

o Keep your car in good condition. Forbetter fuel economy and reduced main-tenance costs, maintain your car in ac-cordance with the maintenance sched-ule in Section 5. If you drive your car insevere conditions, more frequent main-tenance is required (see Section 5 fordetails).

o Keep your car clean. For maximumservice, your Hyundai should be keptclean and free of corrosive materials. Itis especially important that mud, dirt,ice, etc. not be allowed to accumulateon the underside of the car. This extraweight can result in increased fuel con-sumption and also contribute to corro-sion.

o Travel lightly. Don't carry unnecessaryweight in your car. Weight reduces fueleconomy.

o Don't let the engine idle longer thannecessary. If you are waiting (and not intraffic), turn off your engine and restartonly when you're ready to go.

o Remember, your Hyundai does not re-quire extended warm-up. After the en-gine has started, allow the engine to runfor 10 to 20 seconds prior to placing thevehicle in gear. In very cold weather,however, give your engine a slightlylonger warm-up period.

o Don't "lug" or "over-rev" the engine.Lugging is driving too slowly in too higha gear resulting in the engine bucking.If this happens, shift to a lower gear.Over-revving is racing the engine be-yond its safe limit. This can be avoidedby shifting at the recommended speeds.

o Use your air conditioning sparingly. Theair conditioning system is operated byengine power so your fuel economy isreduced when you use it.

SMOOTH CORNERING

C150A01A-AAT

Avoid braking or gear changing in corners,especially when roads are wet. Ideally,corners should always be taken undergentle acceleration. If you follow thesesuggestions, tire wear will be held to aminimum.


16

C160D01A-AAT

Check Battery and Cables

Winter puts additional burdens on thebattery system. Visually inspect the batteryand cables as described in Section 6. Thelevel of charge in your battery can bechecked by your Hyundai dealer or a ser-vice station.

C160C01A-AAT

Use High Quality Ethylene GlycolCoolant

Your Hyundai is delivered with high qual-ity ethylene glycol coolant in the coolingsystem. It is the only type of coolant thatshould be used because it helps preventcorrosion in the cooling system, lubricatesthe water pump and prevents freezing. Besure to replace or replenish your coolant inaccordance with the maintenance sched-ule in Section 5. Before winter, have yourcoolant tested to assure that its freezingpoint is sufficient for the temperatures an-ticipated during the winter.

C160A01A-AAT

The more severe weather conditions ofwinter result in greater wear and otherproblems. To minimize the problems ofwinter driving, you should follow thesesuggestions:

C160B01A-AAT

Snowy or Icy Conditions

To drive your vehicle in deep snow, it maybe necessary to use snow tires or to installtire chains on your tires. If snow tires areneeded, it is necessary to select tiresequivalent in size and type of the originalequipment tires. Failure to do so may ad-versely affect the safety and handling ofyour car. Furthermore, speeding, rapidacceleration, sudden brake applications,and sharp turns are potentially very haz-ardous practices.During deceleration, use engine brakingto the fullest extent. Sudden brake applica-tions on snowy or icy roads may causeskids to occur. You need to keep sufficientdistance between the vehicle in operationin front and your vehicle. Also, apply thebrake gently. It should be noted that install-ing tire chains on the tire will provide agreater driving force, but will not preventside skids.

NOTE:Tire chains are not legal in all states.Check state laws before fitting tirechains.

WINTER DRIVING


17

C160G01A-GAT

To Keep Locks from Freezing

To keep the locks from freezing, squirt anapproved de-icer fluid or glycerine into thekey opening. If a lock is covered with ice,squirt it with an approved de-icing fluid toremove the ice. If the lock is frozen inter-nally, you may be able to thaw it out byusing a heated key. Handle the heated keywith care to avoid injury.

NOTE:The proper temperature for using theimmobilizer key is from -40°F (-40°C) to176°F (80°C). If you heat the immobilizerkey over 176°F (80°C) to open the frozenlock, it may cause damage to the tran-sponder in its head.

C160F01A-AAT

Check Spark Plugs and IgnitionSystem

Inspect your spark plugs as described inSection 6 and replace them if necessary.Also check all ignition wiring and compo-nents to be sure they are not cracked, wornor damaged in any way.

C160E01A-AAT

Change to "Winter Weight" Oil ifNecessary

In some climates it is recommended that alower viscosity "winter weight" oil be usedduring cold weather. See Section 9 forrecommendations. If you aren't sure whatweight oil you should use, consult yourHyundai dealer.

C160H02A-AAT

Use Approved Window Washer Anti-Freeze in System

To keep the water in the window washersystem from freezing, add an approvedwindow washer anti-freeze solution inaccordance with instructions on the con-tainer. Window washer anti-freeze is avail-able from Hyundai dealers and most autoparts outlets. Do not use engine coolant orother types of anti-freeze as these maydamage the paint finish.

C160I01L-AAT

Don't Let Your Parking Brake Freeze

Under some conditions your parking brakecan freeze in the engaged position. Thisis most likely to happen when there is anaccumulation of snow or ice around ornear the rear brakes or if the brakes arewet. If there is a risk the parking brake mayfreeze, apply it only temporarily while youput the gear selector lever in "P" and blockthe rear wheels so the car cannot roll. Thenrelease the parking brake.


18 USE OF LIGHTS

C180A01A-AAT

Check your lights regularly for correct op-eration and always keep them clean. Whendriving during the day in conditions of poorvisibility, it is helpful to drive with head-lights on low beam. This enables you to beseen as well as to see.

C160J01A-AAT

Don't Let Ice and Snow AccumulateUnderneath

Under some conditions, snow and ice canbuild up under the fenders and interferewith the steering. When driving in severewinter conditions where this may happen,you should periodically check underneaththe car to be sure the movement of the frontwheels and the steering components isnot obstructed.

C160K01A-AAT

Carry Emergency Equipment

Depending on the severity of the weatherwhere you drive your car, you should carryappropriate emergency equipment. Someof the items you may want to carry includetire chains, tow straps or chains, flashlight,emergency flares, sand, a shovel, jumpercables, a window scraper, gloves, groundcloth, coveralls, a blanket, etc.

HIGHER SPEED MOTORING

C170A01A-AAT

Pre-Trip Inspections

1. Tires:Adjust the tire inflation pressures to speci-fication. Low tire inflation pressures willresult in overheating and possible failureof the tires.Avoid using worn or damaged tires whichmay result in reduced traction or tire fail-ure.

NOTE:Never exceed the maximum tire infla-tion pressure shown on the tires.

2. Fuel, engine coolant and engine oil:High speed travel consumes more fuelthan urban motoring. Do not forget to checkboth engine coolant and engine oil.

3. Drive belt:A loose or damaged drive belt may resultin overheating of the engine.


19

C190B01S-AAT

Trailer Hitches

Select the proper hitch and ball combina-tion, making sure that its location is com-patible with that of the trailer or vehiclebeing towed.Use a quality non-equalizing hitch whichdistributes the tongue load uniformlythroughout the chassis.

The hitch should be bolted securely to thecar and installed by a qualified technician.DO NOT USE A HITCH DESIGNED FORTEMPORARY INSTALLATION ANDNEVER USE ONE THAT ATTACHESONLY TO THE BUMPER.

TRAILER OR VEHICLE TOW-ING

!

C190A01TG-AAT

If you are considering towing with your car,you should first check with your State'sDepartment of Motor Vehicles to deter-mine their legal requirements.Since laws vary from State to State therequirements for towing trailers, cars, orother types of vehicles or apparatus maydiffer. Ask your Hyundai dealer for furtherdetails before towing.

CAUTION:o Do not do any towing with your car

during its first 1,200 miles (2,000 km)in order to allow the engine to properlybreak in. Failure to heed this cautionmay result in serious engine ortransaxle damage.

o When towing a trailer, be sure to con-sult your Hyundai dealer for furtherinformation on additional require-ments such as a towing kit, etc.

C190C01Y-AAT

Trailer Brakes

If your trailer is equipped with a brakingsystem, make sure it conforms to federaland/or local regulations and that it is prop-erly installed and operating correctly.

NOTE:If you tow a trailer or vehicle, your car willrequire more frequent maintenance dueto the additional load. See MaintenanceUnder Severe Usage Conditions" onpage 5-6.

CAUTION:o Never connect a trailer brake system

directly to the vehicle brake system.o When towing a trailer on steep grades

(in excess of 12%) pay close attentionto the engine coolant temperaturegauge to ensure the engine does notoverheat. If the needle of the coolanttemperature gauge moves across thedial towards "H" (HOT), pull over andstop as soon as it is safe to do so, andallow the engine to idle until it coolsdown. You may proceed once theengine has cooled sufficiently.

!


20

C190E02JM

Gross Axle Weight Gross VehicleWeight

2. The total gross vehicle weight withtrailer must not exceed the GrossVehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) shownon the vehicle identification plate (seepage 8-2). The total gross vehicleweight is the combined weight of thevehicle, driver, all passengers andtheir luggage, cargo, hitch, trailertongue load and other optional equip-ment.

NOTE:1. Never load the trailer with more weight

in the back than in the front. About60% of the trailer load should be in thefront half on the trailer and the remain-ing 40% in the rear.

C190D01S-AAT

Safety Chains

Should the hitch connection between yourcar and the trailer or vehicle you are towingfail, the trailer or vehicle could wanderdangerously across other lanes of trafficand ultimately leave the roadway. To elimi-nate this potentially dangerous situation,safety chains, attached between your carand the trailer or towed vehicle, are re-quired in most states.

C190E01TG-AAT

Trailer Weight Limit

Tongue Load Total Trailer Weight

o Keep the tongue load 10% of the totaltrailer load.

o Tongue load

o Tongue loads can be increased or de-creased by re-distributing the load inthe trailer.This can be verified by checking thetotal weight of the loaded trailer andthen checking the load on the tongue.

C190E01JM

x 100 = 10% (MAX)Total trailer weight


21

!

lbs(kg)

!

Tongue

200 (90)

-

With Brake

Without Brake

Maximum Towable Weight

Trailer

2000 (900)

1000 (450)

CAUTION:The following specifications are recom-mended when towing a trailer. The loadedtrailer weight cannot safely exceed thevalues in the chart below.

WARNING:o Improperly loading your vehicle and

trailer can seriously affect its steer-ing and braking performance causinga crash which could cause seriousinjury or death.

o Towing a trailer affects vehicle han-dling and braking.

o Drive more slowly when towing a trailerand allow more distance when brak-ing.

o Be careful when driving in slipperyand windy conditions.

o Be careful when turning and whiledriving up and down hills.

3. The front or rear axle weight must notexceed the Gross Axle Weight Rating(GAWR) shown on the vehicle identi-fication plate (see page 8-2). It is pos-sible that your towing package doesnot exceed the GVWR but exceedsthe GAWR. Improper trailer loadingand/or too much luggage in the trunkcan overload the rear axle. Redistrib-ute the load and check the axle weightagain.

C190F01TG-AAT

Trailer or Vehicle Towing Tips

1. Before towing, check hitch and safetychain connections as well as properoperation of the trailer running lights,brake lights, and turn signals.

2. Always drive your vehicle at a moder-ate speed. (Less than 60 mph)

3. Trailer towing requires more fuel thannormal conditions.

4. To maintain engine braking efficiencyand electrical charging performance,do not tow a trailer with the transaxleengaged in overdrive gear.

5. Always secure items in the trailer toprevent load shift while driving.

6. Check the condition and air pressureof all tires on the trailer and your car.Low tire pressure can seriously affectthe handling. Also check the spare tire.

7. The vehicle/trailer combination is moreaffected by crosswind and buffeting.When being passed by a large vehicle,keep a constant speed and steerstraight ahead. If there is too muchwind buffeting, slow down to get out ofthe other vehicle's air turbulence.


22 VEHICLE LOAD LIMIT

C190F01TG-AAT

Tire and Loading Information Label

I030A02TG-A

I030A03TG-A

Type A

Type B

8. When parking your car and trailer, es-pecially on a hill, be sure to follow allthe normal precautions. Turn your frontwheel into the curb, set the parkingbrake firmly, and put the transaxle inPark. In addition, place wheel chocksat each of the trailer's tires.

9. If the trailer has electric brakes, startyour vehicle and trailer moving, andthen apply the trailer brake controllerby hand to be sure the brakes areworking. This lets you check your elec-trical connection at the same time.

10. During your trip, check occasionally tobe sure that the load is secure, and thatthe lights and any trailer brakes are stillworking.

11. Avoid jerky starts, sudden accelera-tion or sudden stops.

12. Avoid sharp turns and rapid lanechanges.

13. Avoid holding the brake pedal downtoo long or too frequently. This couldcause the brakes to overheat, resultingin reduced braking efficiency.

14. When going down a hill, shift into alower gear and use the engine brakingeffect.

CAUTION:If overheating should occur when tow-ing, (the temperature gauge reads nearred zone), taking the following actionmay reduce or eliminate the problem.

1. Turn off the air conditioner.2. Reduce highway speed.3. Select a lower gear when going uphill.4. While in stop and go traffic, place the

gear selector in park or neutral andidle the engine at a higher speed.

!

When ascending a long grade, down-shift the transaxle to a lower gear andreduce speed to reduce chances ofengine overloading and/or overheat-ing.

15. If you have to stop while going uphill,do not hold the vehicle in place bypressing on the accelerator. This cancause the automatic transaxle to over-heat. Use the parking brake orfootbrake.

NOTE:When towing, check transaxle fluid morefrequently.


23

The tire label located on the driver'sside of the center pillar outer panelgives the original tire size, cold tirepressures recommended for your ve-hicle, the number of people that can bein your vehicle and vehicle capacityweight.

Vehicle capacity weight:860 lbs (390 kg)Vehicle capacity weight is the maxi-mum combined weight of occupantsand cargo. If your vehicle is equippedwith a trailer, the combined weight in-cludes the tongue load.

Seating capacity:Total: 5 persons

(Front seat: 2 persons,Rear seat: 3 persons)

Seating capacity is the maximum num-ber of occupants including a driver,your vehicle may carry.

I030A04TG-A

I030A05TG-A

Type C

Type D

However the seating capacity may bereduced based upon the weight of all ofthe occupants, and the weight of thecargo being carried or towed. Do notoverload the vehicle as there is a limitto the total weight, or load limit includingoccupants and cargo, the vehicle cancarry.

Towing capacity:Towing capacity is the maximum trailerweight including its cargo weight, yourvehicle can tow. See the section "Traileror Vehicle Towing" for specificationsabout the trailer weight.

Cargo capacity:The cargo capacity of your vehicle willincrease or decrease depending on theweight and the number of occupantsand the tongue load, if your vehicle isequipped with a trailer.


24

C190F01JM

Total

1400 lbs

(635 kg)

300 lbs

(136 kg)

1100 lbs

(489 kg)

Example 1

Item

A

B

C

Description

Vehicle Capacity Weight

Subtract Occupant Weight

150 lbs (68 kg) × 2

Available Cargo and

Luggage weight

A B C

Steps for Determining Correct LoadLimit(1)Locate the statement "The combined

weight of occupants and cargo shouldnever exceed XXX pounds'' on yourvehicle's placard.

(2)Determine the combined weight ofthe driver and passengers that will beriding in your vehicle.

(3)Subtract the combined weight of thedriver and passengers from XXXkilograms or XXX pounds.

(4)The resulting figure equals the avail-able amount of cargo and luggageload capacity. For example, if the"XXX" amount equals 1400 lbs, andthere will be five 150 lb. passengersin your vehicle, the amount of avail-able cargo and luggage load capac-ity is 650 lbs. (1400-750 (5 x 150) =650 lbs.)

(5)Determine the combined weight ofluggage and cargo being loaded onthe vehicle. That weight may notsafely exceed the available cargoand luggage load capacity calcu-lated in Step 4.

(6)If your vehicle will be towing a trailer,load from your trailer will be trans-ferred to your vehicle. Consult thismanual to determine how this re-duces the available cargo and lug-gage load capacity of your vehicle.


25

C190F02JM

Example 2

Total

1400 lbs

(635 kg)

750 lbs

(340 kg)

650 lbs

(295 kg)

Item

A

B

C

Description



150 lbs (68 kg) x 5

Available Cargo and

Luggage Weight

A B C

C190F03JM

Total

1400 lbs

(635 kg)

860 lbs

(390 kg)

540 lbs

(245 kg)

Item

A

B

C

Description



172 lbs (78 kg) x 5

Available Cargo Weight

Example 3

A B C

Refer to your vehicle's tire and loadinginformation label for specific informa-tion about your vehicle's capacity weightand seating positions. The combinedweight of the driver, passengers andcargo should never exceed yourvehicle's capacity weight.


26

! WARNING:o Do not load your vehicle any

heavier than the GVWR, either themaximum front or rear GAWR andvehicle capacity weight. If you do,parts, including tires on your ve-hicle can break, and it can changethe way your vehicle handles andbraking ability. This could causeyou to lose control and crash.Also, overloading can shorten thelife of your vehicle.

C190G03JM-AAT

Compliance Label

The compliance label is located on thedriver's side of the center pillar outerpanel.

The label shows the maximum allow-able weight of the fully loaded vehicle.This is called the GVWR (Gross Ve-hicle Weight Rating). The GVWR in-cludes the weight of the vehicle, alloccupants, fuel and cargo.

C190G01A !

This label also tells you the maximumweights that can be supported by thefront and rear axles, called Gross AxleWeight Rating (GAWR). To find out theactual loads on your front and rearaxles, you need to go to a weigh stationand weigh your vehicle. Your dealer canhelp you with this. Be sure to spread outyour load equally on the left and rightsides of the centerline.

WARNING:o Never exceed the GVWR for your

vehicle, the GAWR for either thefront or rear axle and vehicle ca-pacity weight. Exceeding these rat-ings can cause an accident orvehicle damage. You can calcu-late the weight of your load byweighing the items (or people)before putting them in the vehicle.Be careful not to overload yourvehicle.


27

! WARNING:o Overloading your vehicle can

cause heat buildup in yourvehicle's tires and possible tirefailure that could lead to a crash.

o Overloading your vehicle cancause increased stopping dis-tances that could lead to a crash.

o A crash resulting from poor han-dling vehicle damage, tire failure,or increased stopping distancescould result in serious injury ordeath.

NOTE:o Overloading your vehicle may

cause damage. Repairs would notbe covered by your warranty. Donot overload your vehicle.

o Using heavier suspension com-ponents to get added durabilitymight not change your weight rat-ings. Ask your dealer to help youload your vehicle the right way.

The label will help you decide how muchcargo and installed equipment yourvehicle can carry.

If you carry items inside your vehicle –like suitcases, tools, packages, or any-thing else – they move as fast as thevehicle goes. If you have to stop or turnquickly, or if there is a crash, the itemswill keep going and can cause an injuryif they strike the driver or a passenger.

!WARNING:

Items you carry inside your vehiclecan strike and injure people in asudden stop or turn, or in a crash.

o Put things in the cargo area ofyour vehicle. Try to spread theweight evenly.

o Never stack items, like suitcases,inside the vehicle above the topsof the seats.

o Do not leave an unsecured childrestraint in your vehicle.

o When you carry something insidethe vehicle, secure it.

o Do not drive with a seat foldeddown unless necessary.

If the Engine Will Not Start ............................................ 3-2Jump Starting ................................................................ 3-3If the Engine Overheats ................................................ 3-4Spare Tire ..................................................................... 3-5If You Have a Flat Tire .................................................. 3-6Changing a Flat Tire ...................................................... 3-6If Your Vehicle Must Be Towed................................... 3-11Emergency Towing ..................................................... 3-13If You Lose Your Keys ................................................ 3-14 3


3

32


IF THE ENGINE WILL NOTSTART

!

D010A01A-AAT D010B01TG-AAT

If Engine Doesn't Turn Over or TurnsOver Slowly

D010C02Y-AAT

If Engine Turns Over Normally butDoes Not Start

1. Check fuel level.2. With the key in the "OFF" position, check

all connectors at ignition, coil and sparkplugs. Reconnect any that may be dis-connected or loose.

3. Check the fuel line in the engine com-partment.

4. If the engine still does not start, call aHyundai dealer or seek other qualifiedassistance.

D010D01A-AAT

If Engine Stalls While Driving

1. Reduce your speed gradually, keepinga straight line. Move cautiously off theroad to a safe place.

2. Turn on your emergency flashers.3. Try to start the engine again. If your

vehicle will not start, contact a Hyundaidealer or seek other qualified assis-tance.

WARNING:If the engine will not start, do not push orpull the car to start it. This could result ina collision or cause other damage. Inaddition, push or pull starting may causethe catalytic converter to be overloadedand create a fire hazard.

1. Be sure the gear selector lever is in "N"or "P" and the emergency brake is set.

2. Check the battery connections to besure they are clean and tight.

3. Turn on the interior light. If the light dimsor goes out when you operate the starter,the battery is discharged.

4. Check the starter connections to besure they are securely tightened.

5. Do not push or pull the vehicle to start it.See instructions for "Jump Starting".

HTG5019

3WHAT TO DO IN AN EMERGENCY

3JUMP STARTING

!

o If you should accidentally get acid onyour skin or in your eyes, immediatelyremove any contaminated clothing andflush the area with clean water for atleast 15 minutes. Then promptly obtainmedical attention. If you must be trans-ported to an emergency facility, con-tinue to apply water to the affected areawith a sponge or cloth.

o The gas produced by the battery duringthe jump-start operation is highly explo-sive. Do not smoke or allow a spark oran open flame in the vicinity.

o The battery being used to provide thejump start must be 12-volt. If you cannotdetermine that it is a 12-volt battery, donot attempt to use it for the jump start.

o To jump start a car with a dischargedbattery, follow this procedure exactly:

1. If the booster battery is installed in an-other vehicle, be sure the two vehiclesare not touching.

2. Turn off all unnecessary lights andacces-sories in both vehicles.

3. Attach the clamps of the jumper cable inthe exact location shown on the illustra-tion. First, attach one clamp of the jumpercable to the positive (+) post or cable ofthe discharged battery.

Then attach the other end of the samecable to the positive (+) post or cable ofthe booster battery. Next, using the othercable, attach one clamp to the negative(-) post or cable of the booster battery.Then attach the other end of that cableto a solid metal part of the engine of thevehicle with the discharged batteryaway from the battery. Do not connectthe cable to any moving part.

4. Start the engine in the car with thebooster battery and let it run for a fewminutes. This will help to assure that thebooster battery is fully charged. Duringthe jumping operation, run the enginein this vehicle at about 2,000 rpm.

5. Start the engine in the car with thedischarged battery using the normalstarting procedure. After the enginestarts, leave the jumper cables con-nected and let the engine run at fast idleor about 2,000 rpm for several minutes.

6. Carefully remove the jumper cables inthe reverse order of attachment.

If you do not know why your battery be-came discharged (because the lights wereleft on, etc.), have the charging systemchecked by your Hyundai dealer.

D020A03A-AAT

WARNING:The gas produced by the battery duringthe jump-start operation is highly explo-sive. If these instructions are not fol-lowed exactly, serious personal injuryand damage to the vehicle may occur! Ifyou are not sure how to follow this proce-dure, seek qualified assistance. Auto-mobile batteries contain sulfuric acid.This is poisonous and highly corrosive.When jump starting, wear protectiveglasses and be careful not to get acid onyourself, your clothing or on the car.

HTG4001

Boosterbattery

Dischargedbattery

34


IF THE ENGINE OVERHEATS

!

!

!

WARNING:While the engine is running, keep hair,hands and clothing away from movingparts such as the fan and drive belts toprevent injury.

5. If the water pump drive belt is broken orengine coolant is leaking out, stop theengine immediately and call the near-est Hyundai dealer for assistance.

WARNING:Do not remove the radiator cap when theengine is hot. This can allow coolant to beblown out of the opening and cause se-rious burns.

6. If you cannot find the cause of the over-heating, wait until the engine tempera-ture has returned to normal. Then, ifcoolant has been lost, carefully addcoolant to the reservoir (page 6-7) tobring the fluid level in the reservoir up tothe halfway mark.

7. Proceed with caution, keeping alert forfurther signs of overheating. If over-heating happens again, call a Hyundaidealer for assistance.

CAUTION:Serious loss of coolant indicates there isa leak in the cooling system and thisshould be checked as soon as possibleby a Hyundai dealer.

D030A01TG-AAT

If your temperature gauge indicates over-heating, you experience a loss of power, orhear loud pinging or knocking, the engineis probably too hot. If this happens, youshould:

1. Pull off the road and stop as soon as itis safe to do so.

2. Place the gear selector lever in "P" andset the parking brake. If the air condi-tioning is on, turn it off.

3. If engine coolant is running out underthe car or steam is coming out from thehood, stop the engine. Do not open thehood until the coolant has stoppedrunning or the steaming has stopped. Ifthere is no visible loss of engine coolantand no steam, leave the engine runningand check to be sure the engine coolingfan is operating. If the fan is not running,turn the engine off.

4. Check to see if the water pump drive beltis missing. If it is not missing, check tosee that it is tight. If the drive belt seemsto be satisfactory, check for coolantleaking from the radiator, hoses or un-der the car. (If the air conditioning hadbeen in use, it is normal for cold waterto be draining from it when you stop).


5SPARE TIRE

D040A02GK-AAT

TEMPORARY SPARE TIRE

The following instructions for the TEM-PORARY spare tire should be observed:

1. Check inflation pressure as soon aspractical after installing the sparetire, and adjust to the specified pres-sure. The tire pressure should beperiodically checked and maintainedat the specified pressure while thetire is stored.

Tire Size

Inflation Pressure

T125/80D16

420 kPa(60 psi)

4. As the temporary spare tire is spe-cifically designed for your car, itshould not be used on any othervehicle.

5. The temporary spare tire should notbe used on any other wheels, norshould standard tires, snow tires,wheel covers or trim rings be usedwith the temporary spare wheel. Ifsuch use is attempted, damage tothese items or other car componentsmay occur.

6. The temporary spare tire pressureshould be checked once a monthwhile the tire is stored.

2. The spare tire should only be usedtemporarily and should be returnedto the luggage compartment as soonas the original tire can be repaired orreplaced.

3. Continuous use at speeds of over 50mph (80 km/h) is not recommended.

Spare Tire Pressure

CAUTION:o Do not use snow chains with your

temporary spare tire.o Do not use more than one tempo-

rary spare tire at a time.o Do not tow a trailer while the tem-

porary spare tire is installed.

!

Spare Tire Pressure

D040A01TG-AAT

FULL SIZE SPARE TIRE (If Installed)

The following instructions for the FULLSIZE spare tire should be observed:

Check inflation pressure as soon aspractical after installing the spare tire,and adjust to the specified pressure.The tire pressure should be periodicallychecked and maintained at the speci-fied pressure while the tire is stored.

Tire SizeInflation Pressure

Full Size210 kPa (30 psi)

36


CHANGING A FLAT TIREIF YOU HAVE A FLAT TIRE

D060A01TG-AAT

The procedure described on the follow-ing pages can be used to rotate tires aswell as to change a flat tire. Whenpreparing to change a flat tire, check tobe sure the gear selector lever is in "P"and that the parking brake is set, then:

D050A01TG-AAT

If a tire goes flat while you are driving:

1. Take your foot off the accelerator pedaland let the car slow down while drivingstraight ahead. Do not apply the brakesimmediately or attempt to pull off theroad as this may cause a loss ofcontrol. When the car has slowed tosuch a speed that it is safe to do so,brake carefully and pull off the road.Drive off the road as far as possibleand park on firm, level ground. If youare on a divided highway, do not parkin the median area between the twotraffic lanes.

2. When the car is stopped, turn on youremergency hazard flashers, set theparking brake and put the transaxle in"P".

3. Have all passengers get out of the car.Be sure they all get out on the side ofthe car that is away from traffic.

4. Change the tire according to the in-structions provided as follows.

D060A01TG-A

D040B01TG-GAT

Handling the Spare Tire

1. Open the trunk lid.2. Remove the luggage mat.3. Take out the tool receptacle.

HNF4008

4. Turn the installation bolt counter-clockwise to remove the spare tire.

5. After replacing the spare tire, installand tighten the bolt firmly with yourfingers until there is no more play inthe spare tire.


7

D060B01NF-GAT

1. Obtain Spare Tire and Tool

D060B01NF-A

Take out the tool receptacle and turnthe installation bolt counterclockwiseto remove spare tire from the trunk.

D060C01A-AAT

2. Block the Wheel

Block the wheel that is diagonally oppo-site from the flat to keep the vehiclefrom rolling when the car is raised on thejack.

HTG4009

Flat tire

D060D01A-AAT

3. Loosen Wheel Nuts

The wheel nuts should be loosenedslightly before raising the car. To loosenthe nuts, turn the wrench handle coun-terclockwise. When doing this, be surethat the socket is seated completelyover the nut so it cannot slip off. Formaximum leverage, position the wrenchso the handle is to the left as shown inthe drawing. Then, while holding thewrench near the end of the handle, pushdown on it with steady pressure. Do notremove the nuts at this time. Justloosen them about one-half turn.

D060D01TG-A

38


!

Raise the car high enough so that thefully inflated spare tire can be installed.To do this, you will need more groundclearance than is required to removethe flat tire.

D060F02E-AAT

5. Raising the Car

After inserting a wrench bar into thewheel nut wrench, install the wrench barinto the jack as shown in the drawing.To raise the vehicle, turn the wheel nutwrench clockwise. As the jack beginsto raise the vehicle, double check thatit is properly positioned and will not slip.If the jack is on soft ground or sand,place a board, brick, flat stone or otherobject under the base of the jack tokeep it from sinking.

WARNING:Do not get under the car when it issupported by the jack! This is verydangerous as the vehicle could falland cause serious injury or death.No one should stay in the car whilethe jack is being used.

D060F01TG-A

Wrench bar

D060E01A-AAT

4. Put the Jack in Place

The base of the jack should be placedon firm, level ground. The jack shouldbe positioned as shown in the drawing.

D060E01TG-A

Wheel nutwrench


9

D060G02Y-AAT

6. Changing Wheels

Loosen the wheel nuts and removethem with your fingers. Slide the wheeloff the studs and lay it flat so it cannotroll away. To put the wheel on the hub,pick up the spare tire, line up the holeswith the studs and slide the wheel ontothem. If this is difficult, tip the wheelslightly and get the top hole in the wheellined up with the top stud. Then jigglethe wheel back and forth until the wheelcan be slid over the other studs.

D060G01TG-A

!WARNING:

Wheels and wheel covers may havesharp edges. Handle them carefullyto avoid possible severe injury. Be-fore putting the wheel into place, besure that there is nothing on the hubor wheel (such as mud, tar, gravel,etc.) that interferes with the wheelfrom fitting solidly against the hub.

D060G02TG

!If there is not good contact on themounting surface between the wheeland hub, the wheel nuts could comeloose and cause the loss of a wheel.Loss of a wheel may result in loss ofcontrol of the vehicle. This may causeserious injury or death.

WARNING:

310


D060I01E-AAT

8. Lower Vehicle and Tighten Nuts

Lower the car to the ground by turningthe wheel nut wrench counterclock-wise.

Then position the wrench as shown inthe drawing and tighten the wheel nuts.Be sure the socket is seated com-pletely over the nut. Do not stand on thewrench handle or use an extension pipeover the wrench handle.Go around the wheel tightening everyother nut until they are all tight. Thendouble-check each nut for tightness.After changing wheels, have a techni-cian tighten the wheel nuts to theirproper torque as soon as possible.

D060I01TG-A

D060I02TG-A

D060H02O-AAT

7. Reinstall Wheel Nuts

To reinstall the wheel, hold it on thestuds, put the wheel nuts on the studsand tighten them finger tight. The nutsshould be installed with their small di-ameter ends directed inward. Jiggle thetire to be sure it is completely seated,then tighten the nuts as much as pos-sible with your fingers again.

D060H01TG-A


11

D060J02O-AAT

After Changing Wheels

If you have a tire gauge, remove thevalve cap and check the air pressure. Ifthe pressure is lower than recom-mended, drive slowly to the nearestservice station and inflate to the correctpressure. If it is too high, adjust it until

Wheel nut tightening torque:Steel wheel & aluminium alloy wheel:65-80 lb.ft (900-1,100 kg.cm)

D060J01TG-A

it is correct. Always reinstall the valvecap after checking or adjusting tirepressure. If the cap is not replaced, airmay leak from the tire. If you lose avalve cap, buy another and install it assoon as possible.After you have changed wheels, al-ways secure the flat tire in its place andreturn the jack and tools to their properstorage locations.

IF YOUR VEHICLE MUST BETOWED

D080A01O-GAT

If your vehicle has to be towed, it should bedone by your Hyundai dealer or a commer-cial tow truck service. This will help assurethat your vehicle is not damaged in towing.Also, professionals are generally aware oflocal laws governing towing. In any case,rather than risk damage to your car, it issuggested that you show this informationto the tow truck operator. Be sure that asafety chain system is used and that alllocal laws are observed.It is recommended that your vehicle betowed with a wheel lift and dollies or flatbedequipment with all the wheels off theground.

! CAUTION:o Your vehicle can be damaged if towed

incorrectly!o Be sure the transaxle is in neutral.o When the engine will not start, be sure

the steering is unlocked by placingthe key in the "ACC" position.

312


CAUTION:o When towing the vehicle, take care

not to cause damage to the bumper orunderbody of the vehicle.

NOTE:Before towing, check the level of theautomatic transaxle fluid. If it is belowthe "HOT" range on the dipstick, addfluid. If you cannot add fluid, a towingdolly must be used.

2) If any of the loaded wheels or suspen-sion components are damaged or thevehicle is being towed with the frontwheels on the ground, use a towingdolly under the front wheels.

D080B02TG

!

o Do not tow with sling type truck as thismay cause damage to the bumper orunderbody of the vehicle.

1) If the vehicle is being towed with the rearwheels on the ground, be sure the park-ing brake is released.

D080B01TG-GAT

Towing the Vehicle

D080B01TG

Your vehicle can be towed by wheel lifttype truck (1), (2) or flatbed equipment (3).

1)

2)

3) dolly


13

!

D080B03TG

CAUTION:

A vehicle with an automatic transaxleshould never be towed from the rear withthe front wheels on the ground. This cancause serious damage to the transaxle.Be sure to use a towing dolly under thefront wheels.

3) It is recommended that your vehicle betowed with all the wheels off the ground.

D080D04A-AAT

EMERGENCY TOWING

D080D01TG-A

For emergency towing when no commer-cial tow vehicle is available, attach a towcable, chain or strap to the towing hookunder the front/rear of your car. Do notattempt to tow your vehicle in this manneron any unpaved surface. This could resultin serious damage to your car.Nor should towing be attempted if thewheels, drive train, axles, steering orbrakes are damaged. Before towing, besure the transaxle is in neutral and the keyis in "ACC" (with the engine off) or in the"ON" position (with the engine running). Adriver must be in the towed car to steer itand operate the brakes.

NOTE:Before towing, check the level of theautomatic transaxle fluid. If it is belowthe "HOT" range on the dipstick, addfluid. If you cannot add fluid, a towingdolly must be used.

D080D02TG-A

314


IF YOU LOSE YOUR KEYS

D120A02A-AAT

Information about the key of immobilizersystem can be found on page 1-3.! CAUTION:

If the car is being towed with all fourwheels on the ground, it can be towedonly from the front. Be sure that thetransaxle is in neutral. Do not tow atspeeds greater than 30 mph (50 km/h)and for more than 15 miles (25 km). Besure the steering is unlocked by placingthe key in the "ACC" position. A drivermust be in the towed vehicle to operatethe steering and brakes.

4Corrosion Protection ..................................................... 4-2To Help Prevent Corrosion ........................................... 4-3Washing and Waxing .................................................... 4-4Cleaning the Interior ...................................................... 4-6

CORROSION PREVENTION & APPEARANCE CARE

4

4 CORROSION PREVENTION AND APPEARANCE CARE

2 CORROSION PROTECTION

E010D01A-AAT

Moisture Breeds Corrosion

Moisture creates the conditions in whichcorrosion is most likely to occur. For ex-ample, corrosion is accelerated by highhumidity, particularly when temperaturesare just above freezing. In such conditions,the corrosive material is kept in contactwith the car surfaces by moisture that isslow to evaporate.Mud is particularly corrosive because it isslow to dry and holds moisture in contactwith the vehicle. Although the mud ap-pears to be dry, it can still retain the mois-ture and promote corrosion.High temperatures can also acceleratecorrosion of parts that are not properlyventilated so the moisture can be dis-persed. For all these reasons, it is particu-larly important to keep your car clean andfree of mud or accumulations of othermaterials. This applies not only to the vis-ible surfaces but particularly to the under-side of the car.

E010C01A-AAT

High-Corrosion Areas

If you live in an area where your car isregularly exposed to corrosive materials,corrosion protection is particularly impor-tant. Some of the common causes ofaccelerated corrosion are road salts, dustcontrol chemicals, ocean air and industrialpollution.

E010B01A-AAT

Common Causes of Corrosion

The most common causes of corrosion onyour car are:

o Road salt, dirt and moisture that is al-lowed to accumulate underneath thecar.

o Removal of paint or protective coatingsby stones, gravel, abrasion or minorscrapes and dents which leave unpro-tected metal exposed to corrosion.

E010A01A-AAT

Protecting Your Hyundai from Cor-rosion

By using the most advanced design andconstruction practices to combat corro-sion, Hyundai produces cars of the highestquality. However, this is only part of the job.To achieve the long-term corrosion resis-tance your Hyundai can deliver, the owner'scooperation and assistance is also re-quired.

4CORROSION PREVENTION AND APPEARANCE CARE

3

E020C01A-AAT

Keep Your Garage Dry

Don't park your car in a damp, poorlyventilated garage. This creates a favor-able environment for corrosion. This isparticularly true if you wash your car in thegarage or drive it into the garage when it isstill wet or covered with snow, ice or mud.Even a heated garage can contribute tocorrosion unless it is well ventilated somoisture is dispersed.

E020B01A-AAT

Keep Your Car Clean

The best way to prevent corrosion is tokeep your car clean and free of corrosivematerials. Attention to the underside of thecar is particularly important.

o If you live in a high-corrosion area —where road salts are used, near theocean, areas with industrial pollution,acid rain, etc.—, you should take extracare to prevent corrosion. In winter,hose off the underside of your car atleast once a month and be sure to cleanthe underside thoroughly when winteris over.

o When cleaning underneath the car, giveparticular attention to the componentsunder the fenders and other areas thatare hidden from view. Do a thoroughjob; just dampening the accumulatedmud rather than washing it away willaccelerate corrosion rather than pre-vent it. Water under high pressure andsteam are particularly effective in re-moving accumulated mud and corro-sive materials.

E020A01A-AAT

You can help prevent corrosion from get-ting started by observing the following:

TO HELP PREVENT COR-ROSION

o When cleaning lower door panels,rocker panels and frame members, besure that drain holes are kept open sothat moisture can escape and not betrapped inside to accelerate corrosion.


4

Use a clean sponge or cloth, rinse it fre-quently and don't damage the finish byrubbing too hard. For stubborn spots,dampen them frequently and remove thema little at a time.To clean whitewall tires, use a stiff brush orsoapy steel-wool scouring pad.

To clean plastic wheel covers, use a cleansponge or soft cloth and water.

To clean cast aluminum alloy wheels, usea mild soap or neutral detergent. Do notuse abrasive cleaners. Protect the bare-metal surfaces by cleaning, polishing andwaxing. Because aluminum is subject tocorrosion, be sure to give aluminum alloywheels special attention in winter. If youdrive on salted roads, clean the wheelsthoroughly afterwards.

After washing, be sure to rinse thoroughly.If soapy water dries on the finish, streakingwill result.

When the weather is warm and the humid-ity low, you may find it necessary to rinseeach section immediately after washing toavoid streaking.

WASHING AND WAXING

E020E01A-AAT

Don't Neglect the Interior

Moisture can collect under the floor matsand carpeting to cause corrosion. Checkunder the mats periodically to be sure thecarpeting is dry. Use particular care if youcarry fertilizers, cleaning materials orchemicals in the car.These should be carried only in propercontainers and any spills or leaks shouldbe cleaned up, flushed with clean waterand thoroughly dried.

E030A01A-AAT

Washing Your Hyundai

Never wash your car when the surface ishot from being in the sun. Always washyour car in the shade.

Wash your car frequently. Dirt is abrasiveand can scratch the paint if it is not re-moved. Air pollution or acid rain may dam-age the paint and trim through chemicalaction if pollutants are allowed to remain incontact with the surface. If you live near theocean or in an area where road salts ordust control chemicals are used, youshould pay particular attention to the un-derside of the car. Start by rinsing the carto remove dust and loose dirt. In winter, orif you have driven through mud or muddywater, be sure to thoroughly clean theunderside as well. Use a hard direct streamof water to remove accumulations of mudor corrosive materials. Use a good qualitycar-washing solution and follow themanufacturer's directions on the package.These are available at your Hyundai dealeror auto parts outlet. Don't use strong house-hold detergents, gasoline, strong solventsor abrasive cleaning powders as thesemay damage the finish.

E020D02A-AAT

Keep Paint and Trim in Good Condi-tion

Scratches or chips in the finish should becovered with "touch-up" paint as soon aspossible to reduce the possibility of corro-sion. If bare metal is showing through, theattention of a qualified body and paintshop is recommended.

Bird droppings : Bird droppings are highlycorrosive and may damage painted sur-faces in just a few hours. Always removebird droppings as soon as possible.


5

E030D01A-AAT

When to Wax Again

You should polish and wax the car againwhen water no longer beads on a cleansurface but spreads out over a larger area.

E030C01A-AAT

Polishing and Waxing

Always wash and dry the car before polish-ing or waxing or using a combinationcleaner and wax. Use a good quality com-mercial product and follow themanufacturer's directions on the container.Polish and wax the bright trim pieces aswell as the paint.

E030B01A-AAT

Spot Cleaning

Don't use gasoline, strong solvents or cor-rosive cleaning agents. These can dam-age the finish of the car. To remove roadtar, use turpentine on a clean, soft cloth. Begentle.To remove dead insects or tree sap, usewarm water and mild soap or car-washingsolution. Soak the spot and rub gently. Ifthe paint has lost its luster, use a commer-cial car-cleaning polish.

After rinsing, dry the car using a dampchamois or soft, absorbent cloth. The rea-son for drying the car is to remove waterfrom the car so it will dry without waterspots. Don't rub, this can damage the fin-ish.

If you find any nicks or scratches in thepaint, use touch-up paint to cover them toprevent corrosion. To protect the paintworkof the car against corrosion, you mustclean your Hyundai (at least once a month).Give special attentionto the removal of salt, mud and other sub-stances on the underside of thesplashboards of the car. Make sure that theoutlets and the underside of the doors areopen. Paint damage can be caused bysmall accumulation of tar, industrial pre-cipitation, tree resin, insects and bird drop-pings, when not removed immediately. Ifwater alone is not strong enough to re-move the accumulated dirt, use a mild carwashing solution. Be sure to rinse thesurface after washing to remove the solu-tion. Never allow the solution to dry on thepainted surfaces.


6 CLEANING THE INTERIOR

E040B01A-AAT

To Clean the Leather Upholstery(If Installed)

In the normal course of use, leather uphol-stered surfaces will, like any material, pick-up dust and dirt. This dust and dirt must becleaned off or it may work into the surfaceof the leather, causing damage.

Fine leather needs care, and should becleaned when necessary. Washing leatherthoroughly with soap and water will keepyour leather lustrous, beautiful and ensureyou have many years of wear.Take a piece of cheese cloth and using anymild soap and lukewarm water, work up agood lather. Thoroughly wash the leather.Wipe clean with a slightly damp cloth anddry with soft cloth. Do this as often as theleather becomes soiled.

During tanning operations, sufficient oilsare incorporated through processing thatnone need be applied during the life of theleather. Oil applied to the finished surfacewill in no way help the leather and may domore harm than good. Varnishes and fur-niture polishes should never be used un-der any conditions.

E040A01A-AAT

To Clean the Vinyl Upholstery

To clean the vinyl upholstery, first removeloose dirt and dust with a vacuum cleaner.Then apply a solution of mild soap ordetergent and water using a clean spongeor soft cloth. Allow this to stay on the sur-face to loosen the dirt, then wipe with aclean damp sponge or cloth. If all the dirtstains are not removed, repeat this proce-dure until the upholstery is clean. Do notuse gasoline, solvent, paint thinner or otherstrong cleaners.

E030E01A-AAT

Maintaining Bumpers

Special precautions must be observed topreserve the appearance of the bumperson your Hyundai. They are:

o Be careful not to spill battery electrolyteor hydraulic brake fluid on the bumpers.If you do, wash it off immediately withclean water.

o Be gentle when cleaning the bumpersurfaces. They are made of soft plasticand the surface can be damaged ifmistreated. Do not use abrasive clean-ers. Use warm water and mild soap orcar-washing solution.

o Do not expose the bumpers to high tem-peratures. For example, if you haveyour car repainted, do not leave thebumpers on the car if the car is going tobe placed in a high-temperature paintbooth.


7ANY QUESTIONS?

E040D01A-AAT

Cleaning the Seat Belts

To clean the seat belts, use a cloth orsponge with mild soap or detergent andwarm water. Do not use strong detergents,dye, bleach or abrasive materials on theseat belts as this may weaken the fabric.While cleaning the belts, inspect them forexcessive wear, cuts, fraying or other signsof damage and replace them if necessary.

E040C01A-AAT

Cleaning the Carpets

Use a foam-type carpet cleaner. Cleanersof this type are available in aerosol cans inliquid form or powder. Read the instruc-tions and follow them exactly. Using avacuum cleaner with the appropriate at-tachment, remove as much dirt from thecarpets as possible. Apply the foam follow-ing the manufacturer's directions, then rubin overlapping circles. Do not add water.These cleaners work best when the carpetis kept as dry as possible.

E050A01A-AAT

If you have any questions about the care ofyour car, consult your Hyundai dealer.

E040E01A-AAT

Cleaning the Windows

You may use any household windowcleaner on the windows. However, whencleaning the inside of the rear window becareful not to damage the rear windowdefroster wiring.

5Maintenance Intervals ................................................... 5-2Scheduled Maintenance ................................................ 5-4Maintenance under Severe Usage Conditions ............. 5-6Explanation of Scheduled Maintenance Items .............. 5-7

VEHICLE MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS

5

5 VEHICLE MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS

2

F010C01A-AAT

Specified Scheduled Procedures

These are the procedures such as inspec-tions, adjustments and replacements thatare listed in the maintenance charts start-ing on page 5-4. These procedures mustbe performed at the intervals shown in themaintenance schedule to assure that yourwarranty remains in effect. Although it isstrongly recommended that they be per-formed by the trained technicians at yourHyundai dealer, these procedures may beperformed at any qualified service facility.It is suggested that genuine Hyundai ser-vice parts be used for any required repairsor replacements. Other parts of equivalentquality such as engine oil, engine coolant,manual or auto transaxle oil, brake fluidand so on which are not supplied byHyundai Motor Company or its distributormay be used without affecting your war-ranty coverage but you should always besure these are equivalent to the quality ofthe original Hyundai parts. Your Owner'sHandbook provides further informationabout your warranty coverage.

F010A01A-AAT

Service Requirements

To ensure that you receive the greatestnumber of miles of satisfying operationfrom your Hyundai, certain maintenanceprocedures must be performed. Althoughcareful design and engineering have re-duced these to a minimum, those that arerequired are of the utmost importance.It is your responsibility to have these main-tenance procedures performed to complywith the terms of the warranties coveringyour new Hyundai. The Owner's Hand-book supplied with your new vehicle pro-vides further information about these war-ranties.

F010B01A-AAT

Maintenance Requirements

The maintenance required for yourHyundai can be divided into three mainareas:

o Specified scheduled procedureso General checkso Do-it-yourself maintenance

MAINTENANCE INTERVALS

5VEHICLE MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS

3SCHEDULED MAINTE-NANCE REQUIREMENTS

F020A02Y-AAT

o Inspection should be performed anytime a malfunction is experienced orsuspected.

o Receipts for all emission control systemservices should be retained to demon-strate compliance with conditions of theemissions system warranty.

o After 120 months or 150,000 miles(240,000 km), continue to follow theprescribed maintenance intervals.

o For severe usage maintenance require-ments, see page 5-6 of this section.

F010D02A-AAT

General Checks

These are the regular checks you shouldperform when you drive your Hyundai oryou fill the fuel tank. A list of these items willbe found on page 6-3.

F010E01A-AAT

Do-It-Yourself Maintenance

If you are mechanically inclined, own a fewtools that are required and want to take thetime to do so, you can inspect and servicea number of items. For more informationabout doing it yourself, see Section 6.

F010F01A-AAT

A Few Tips

o Whenever you have your Hyundai ser-viced, keep copies of the service recordsin your glove box. This will help ensurethat you can document that the requiredprocedures have been performed tokeep your warranties in effect. This isespecially important when service isnot performed by an authorizedHyundai dealer.

o If you choose to do your own mainte-nance and repairs, you may find ithelpful to have an official Hyundai ShopManual. A copy of this publication maybe purchased at your Hyundai dealer'sparts department.


4 SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE

F030B01TG-AAT

R :Replace I : Inspect and, after Inspection, clean, adjust, repair or replace if necessary.

F030A01A-AAT

The following maintenance services must be performed to ensure good emission control and performance. Keep receipts for all vehicleemission services to protect your warranty. Where both mileage and time are shown, the frequency of service is determined by whicheveroccurs first.

DESCRIPTION

EMISSION CONTROL ITEMS

ENGINE OIL AND FILTER

FUEL FILTER

FUEL LINES, FUEL HOSES AND CONNECTIONS

VACUUM HOSE

CRANKCASE VENTILATION HOSE

VAPOR HOSE AND FUEL FILLER CAP

AIR CLEANER FILTER

SPARK PLUGS (IRIDIUM COATED)

VALVE CLEARANCE

FUEL TANK AIR FILTER

ELECTRONIC THROTTLE CONTROL

No.

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

MILES X 1000

KILOMETERS X 1000

MONTHS

7.5

12

6

R

I

I

I

15

24

12

R

I

I

I

I

I

I

22.5

36

18

R

I

I

I

30

48

24

R

I

I

I

I

R

R

I

37.5

60

30

R

R

I

I

I

45

72

36

R

I

I

I

I

I

I

52.5

84

42

R

I

I

I

60

96

48

R

I

I

I

I

R

I

R

I

67.5

108

54

R

I

I

I

75

120

60

R

R

I

I

I

I

I

I

82.5

132

66

R

I

I

I

90

144

72

R

I

I

I

I

R

R

I

97.5

156

78

R

I

I

I

R

105

168

84

R

I

I

I

I

I

I

112.5

180

90

R

R

I

I

I

120

192

96

R

I

I

I

I

R

I

R

I

127.5

204

102

R

I

I

I

135

216

108

R

I

I

I

I

I

I

142.5

228

114

R

I

I

I

150

240

120

R

R

I

I

I

I

R

R

I


5

See Note *1

See Note *2

F030C01TG-AAT

R : Replace I : Inspect and, after inspection, clean, adjust, repair or replace if necessary

GENERAL ITEMS

DRIVE BELT (AUTO-TENSIONER, ALT, P/STR'G, A/CON, W/PUMP)

COOLANT

AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE FLUID

BRAKE FLUID

BRAKE HOSES AND LINES

REAR DISC BRAKE/LININGS, PARKING BRAKE

BRAKE PADS, CALIPERS AND ROTORS

EXHAUST PIPE AND MUFFLER

SUSPENSION MOUNTING BOLTS

STEERING GEAR BOX, LINKAGE & BOOTS

/LOWER ARM BALL JOINT, UPPER ARM BALL JOINT

POWER STEERING PUMP, BELT AND HOSES

DRIVE SHAFTS AND BOOTS

AIR CONDITIONING REFRIGERANT

AIR CONDITIONER FILTER (FOR EVAPORATOR AND BLOWER UNIT)

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

No. DESCRIPTION

MILES X 1000

KILOMETERS X 1000

MONTHS

7.5

12

6

I

I

15

24

12

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

22.5

36

18

I

I

30

48

24

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

37.5

60

30

I

I

45

72

36

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

52.5

84

42

I

I

60

96

48

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

67.5

108

54

I

I

75

120

60

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

82.5

132

66

I

I

90

144

72

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

97.5

156

78

I

I

105

168

84

R

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

112.5

180

90

I

I

120

192

96

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

127.5

204

102

I

I

135

216

108

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

142.5

228

114

I

I

150

240

120

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

Note:*1. FOR THE FIRST TIME, REPLACE THE COOLANT AT 60,000 MILES (96,000 KM) OR 60 MONTHS.

AFTER THAT, REPLACE IT EVERY 30,000 MILES (48,000 KM) OR 24 MONTHS.*2. FOR EVERY 12 MONTHS OR 10,000 MILES (15,000 KM), WHICHEVER OCCURS FIRST : "R"


6 MAINTENANCE UNDER SEVERE USAGE CONDITIONS

SEVERE DRIVING CONDITIONS

A - Repeatedly driving short distance of less than 5miles (8km) innormal temperature or less than 10miles (16km) in freezing tem-perature

B - Extensive engine idling or low speed driving for long distancesC - Driving on rough, dusty, muddy, unpaved, graveled or salt- spread

roadsD - Driving in areas using salt or other corrosive materials or in very cold

weather

F040A01TG-AAT

The following items must be serviced more frequently on cars normally used under severe driving conditions. Refer to the chart belowfor the appropriate maintenance intervals.

R : Replace I : Inspect and, after inspection, clean, adjust, repair or replace if necessary

E - Driving in sandy areasF - Driving in heavy traffic area over 90°F (32°C)G - Driving on uphill, downhill, or mountain roadH - Towing a Trailer, or using a camper, or roof rackI - Driving as a patrol car, taxi, other commercial use or vehicle

towingJ - Driving over 100 MPH (170 Km/h)K - Frequently driving in stop-and-go conditions

ENGINE OIL AND FILTER

AIR CLEANER FILTER

SPARK PLUGS

BRAKE PADS, CALIPERS AND ROTORS

REAR DISC BRAKE/LININGS, PARKING BRAKE

STEERING GEAR BOX, LINKAGE & BOOTS/

LOWER ARM BALL JOINT, UPPER ARM BALL JOINT

DRIVE SHAFTS AND BOOTS

AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE FLUID

AIR CONDITIONER FILTER (FOR EVAPORATOR AND BLOWER UNIT)

MAINTENANCE ITEM

R

I

I

I

I

I

I

R

R

EVERY 3,000 MILES (4,800 KM) OR 3 MONTHS

MORE FREQUENTLY

MORE FREQUENTLY

MORE FREQUENTLY

MORE FREQUENTLY

MORE FREQUENTLY

EVERY 7,500 MILES (12,000 KM) OR 6 MONTHS

EVERY 30,000 MILES (48,000 KM)

MORE FREQUENTLY

DRIVINGCONDITION

MAINTENANCEINTERVALS

MAINTENANCEOPERATION

A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, K

C, E

B, H

C, D, G, H

C, D, G, H

C, D, E, F, G, H, I

C, D, E, F, H

A, C, E, F, G, H, I

C, E


7

F060D01A-AAT

o Fuel Lines, Fuel Hoses and Con-nections

Check the fuel lines, fuel hoses and con-nections for leakage and damage. Have atrained technician replace any damagedor leaking parts immediately.

F060B01NF-GAT

o Drive Belts

Inspect all drive belts for evidence of cuts,cracks, excessive wear or oil saturationand replace if necessary. Drive belts shouldbe checked periodically for proper ten-sion.

F060M01A-AAT

o Engine Oil and Filter

The engine oil and filter should be changedat the intervals specified in the mainte-nance schedule. If the car is being drivenin severe conditions, more frequent oil andfilter changes are required.

F060C01A-AAT

o Fuel Filter

A clogged filter can limit the speed at whichthe vehicle may be driven, damage theemission system and cause hard starting.If an excessive amount of foreign matteraccumulates in the fuel tank, the filter mayrequire replacement more frequently.After installing a new filter, run the enginefor several minutes, and check for leaks atthe connections. Fuel filters should beinstalled by trained technicians.

F060F01A-AAT

o Vacuum, Crankcase VentilationHoses

Inspect the surface of hoses for evidenceof heat and/or mechanical damage. Hardand brittle rubber, cracking, tears, cuts,abrasions, and excessive swelling indi-cate deterioration. Particular attentionshould be paid to examine those hosesurfaces nearest to high heat sources,such as the exhaust manifold.Inspect the hose routing to assure that thehoses do not come in contact with any heatsource, sharp edges or moving compo-nent which might cause heat damage ormechanical wear. Inspect all hose con-nections, such as clamps and couplings,to make sure they are secure, and that noleaks are present. Hoses should be re-placed immediately if there is any evi-dence of deterioration or damage.

EXPLANATION OF SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE ITEMS


8

F070G02A-AAT

o Brake Fluid

Check brake fluid level in the brake fluidreservoir. The level should be between"MIN" and "MAX" marks on the side of thereservoir. Use only hydraulic brake fluidconforming to DOT 3 or DOT 4.

F070F01A-AAT

o Brake Hoses and Lines

Visually check for proper installation, chaf-ing, cracks, deterioration and any leak-age. Replace any deteriorated or dam-aged parts immediately.

F070E06A-AAT

o Automatic Transaxle Fluid

The fluid level should be in the “HOT”range of the dipstick, after the engine andtransaxle are at normal operating tem-perature. Check the automatic transaxlefluid level with the engine running and thetransaxle in neutral, with the parking brakeproperly applied. Use HYUNDAI GENU-INE ATF SP III, DIAMOND ATF SP III, SKATF SP III or other brands meeting the SPIII specification approved by Hyundai MotorCo. when adding or changing fluid. Usingthe wrong ATF may result in damage to theATM.

F070C01A-AAT

o Coolant

The coolant should be changed at theintervals specified in the maintenanceschedule.

F060J01A-AAT

o Spark Plugs

Make sure to install new spark plugs of thecorrect heat range.

F060H01A-AAT

o Air Cleaner Filter

A Genuine Hyundai air cleaner filter isrecommended when the filter is replaced.

F060G01A-AAT

o Vapor Hose and Fuel Filler Cap

The vapor hose and fuel filler cap shouldbe inspected at those intervals specified inthe maintenance schedule. Make sure thata new vapor hose or fuel filler cap is cor-rectly replaced.

F060N02E-AAT

o Valve Clearance

Inspect excessive valve noise and/or en-gine vibration and adjust if necessary. Aqualified technician should perform theoperation.

F070H01TG-AAT

o Rear Disc Brake /Linings, Parking Brake

Check the rear disc brake and linings forscoring, burning, leaking fluid, broken parts,and excessive wear. Inspect the parkingbrake system including the parking brakepedal and cables. For detailed serviceprocedures, refer to the Shop Manual.


9

F070L01A-AAT

o Suspension Mounting Bolts

Check the suspension connections forlooseness or damage. Retighten to thespecified torque.

F070K01A-AAT

o Exhaust Pipe and Muffler

Visually inspect the exhaust pipes, mufflerand hangers for cracks, deterioration, ordamage. Start the engine and listen care-fully for any exhaust gas leakage. Tightenconnections or replace parts as neces-sary.

F070J01A-AAT

o Brake Pads, Calipers and Rotors

Check the pads for excessive wear, discsfor run out and wear, and calipers for fluidleakage.

F070Q01A-AAT

o Air Conditioning Refrigerant

Check the air conditioning lines and con-nections for leakage and damage. Checkair conditioning performance according tothe relevant shop manual if necessary.

F070P01A-AAT

o Drive Shafts and Boots

Check the drive shafts, boots and clampsfor cracks, deterioration, or damage. Re-place any damaged parts and, if neces-sary, repack the grease.

F070N01A-AAT

o Power Steering Pump, Belt andHoses

Check the power steering pump and hosesfor leakage and damage. Replace anydamaged or leaking parts immediately.Inspect the power steering belt for evi-dence of cuts, cracks, excessive wear,oiliness and proper tension. Replace oradjust it if necessary.

F070M01Y-AAT

o Steering Gear Box, Linkage &Boots/Lower Arm Ball Joint, Up-per Arm Ball Joint

With the vehicle stopped and engine off,check for excessive free-play in the steer-ing wheel. Check the linkage for bends ordamage. Check the dust boots and balljoints for deterioration, cracks, or damage.Replace any damaged parts.

6Engine Compartment .................................................... 6-2General Checks ............................................................ 6-3Maintenance Precautions ............................................. 6-4Checking the Engine Oil ............................................... 6-4Checking and Changing the Engine Coolant ................ 6-6Spark Plugs .................................................................. 6-8Changing the Air Cleaner Filter ..................................... 6-8Windshield Wiper Blades .............................................. 6-9Checking the Transaxle Fluid (Automatic) .................. 6-13Checking the Brakes .................................................. 6-15Air Conditioning Care .................................................. 6-16Changing the Air Conditioner Filter ............................. 6-17Checking Parking Brake Pedal ................................... 6-18Checking and Replacing Fuses .................................. 6-19Checking the Battery .................................................. 6-21Power Steering Fluid Level ......................................... 6-23Replacement of Light Bulbs ........................................ 6-24Bulb Wattages ............................................................. 6-32Fuse Panel Description ............................................... 6-33

DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE

6

6 DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE

2

G010A01TG-AAT

ENGINE COMPARTMENT

G010A01TG-A

CAUTION:When inspecting or servicing theengine, you should handle toolsand other heavy objects care-fully so that the plastic cover ofthe engine is not damaged.

!

1. Coolant reservoir cap2. Engine oil filler cap3. Air cleaner4. Brake fluid reservoir

5. Fuse and relay box6. Windshield washer fluid reservoir7. Power steering fluid reservoir8. Engine oil level dipstick

9. Automatic transaxle oil level dipstick10. Radiator cap11. Battery

6DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE

3

G020C01TG-AAT

Vehicle Interior

The following should be checked eachtime when the vehicle is driven:

o Lights operationo Windshield wiper operationo Horn operationo Defroster, heating system operation

(and air conditioning, if installed)o Steering operation and conditiono Mirror condition and operationo Turn signal operationo Accelerator pedal operationo Brake operation, including parking

brakeo Automatic transaxle operation, includ-

ing "Park" mechanism operationo Seat control condition and operationo Seat belt condition and operationo Sun visor operation

If you notice anything that does not operatecorrectly or appears to be functioning cor-rectly, inspect it carefully and seek assis-tance from your Hyundai dealer if serviceis needed.

G020B01A-AAT

Vehicle Exterior

The following should be checked monthly:

o Overall appearance and conditiono Wheel condition and wheel nut torqueo Exhaust system conditiono Light condition and operationo Windshield glass conditiono Wiper blade conditiono Paint condition and body corrosiono Fluid leakso Door and hood lock conditiono Tire pressure and condition

(including spare tire)

GENERAL CHECKS

G020A01NF-AAT

Engine Compartment

The following should be checked regu-larly:

o Engine oil level and conditiono Transaxle fluid level and conditiono Brake fluid levelo Engine coolant levelo Windshield washer fluid levelo Accessory drive belt conditiono Engine coolant hose conditiono Fluid leaks (on or below components)o Power steering fluid levelo Battery conditiono Air filter conditiono Engine vibration


4 CHECKING THE ENGINE OIL

G030B01O-AAT

Recommended Oil

The engine oil quality should meet thefollowing classification.

API SJ, SL or ABOVE,ILSAC GF-3 or ABOVE

G030B01JM-U

G030A01A-AAT

Engine oil is essential to the performanceand service of the engine. It is suggestedthat you check the oil level at least once aweek in normal use and more often if youare on a trip or driving in severe conditions.

MAINTENANCE PRECAU-TIONS

!G020D01TG-GAT

Improper or incomplete service may resultin problems. This section gives instruc-tions only for the maintenance items thatare easy to perform.Several procedures should be done by anauthorized Hyundai dealer.

NOTE:Improper owner maintenance during thewarranty period may affect warrantycoverage.

WARNING:o Performing maintenance work on a

vehicle can be dangerous. You can beseriously injured while performingsome maintenance procedures. If youlack sufficient knowledge and experi-ence or the proper tools and equip-ment to do the work, have it done by anauthorized Hyundai dealer.

o Working under the hood with the en-gine running is dangerous. It becomeseven more dangerous when you wearjewelry or loose clothing. These canbecome entangled in moving partsand result in injury. Therefore, if youmust run the engine while workingunder the hood, make certain that youremove all jewelry (especially rings,bracelets, watches, and necklaces)and all neckties, scarves, and similarloose clothing before getting near theengine or cooling fans.


5

G030C01JM-AAT

To Check the Oil Level

Before checking the oil, warm up the en-gine to the normal operating temperatureand be sure your car is parked on levelground. Turn the engine off.

Wait five minutes, then remove the dip-stick, wipe it off, fully reinsert the dipstickand withdraw it again. Then note the high-est level the oil has reached on the dip-stick. It should be between the upper ("F")and lower ("L") range.

!

G030C01TG

NOTE:o For good fuel economy, SAE 5W-20

(5W-30), ILSAC GF-3 engine oil is pre-ferred regardless of regional optionand engine variation.

o If SAE 5W-20, ILSAC GF-3 engine oil isnot available, secondary recom-mended engine oil for correspondingtemperature range can be used.

G030D01TG-AAT

Adding Oil

If the oil level is close to or below the "L"mark, add oil until it reaches the "F" mark.To add oil:

1. Remove the oil filler cap by turning itcounterclockwise.

G030D01TG-A

WARNING:Be very careful not to touch the radiatorhose when checking the engine oil as itmay be hot enough to burn you.


6 CHECKING AND CHANGINGTHE ENGINE COOLANT

!

G050A01TG-AAT

WARNING:Do not remove the radiator cap when theengine is hot. When the engine is hot, theengine coolant is under pressure andmay erupt through the opening if the capis removed. You could be seriouslyburned if you do not observe this precau-tion. Do not remove the radiator cap untilthe radiator is cool to the touch.

!

NOTE:Always dispose of used engine oil in anenvironmentally acceptable manner. Itis suggested that it be placed in a sealedcontainer and taken to a service stationfor reclamation. Do not pour the oil on theground or put it into the household trash.

PROPOSITION 65 WARNING:Used engine oil may cause irritation orcancer of the skin if left in contact withthe skin for prolonged periods of time.Used engine oil contains chemicals thathave caused cancer in laboratory ani-mals. Always protect your skin by wash-ing your hands thoroughly with soap andwarm water as soon as possible afterhandling used oil.

!

! CAUTION:Slowly pour the recommended oil into afunnel. Do not overfill to avoid damage tothe engine.

WARNING:Be very careful not to touch the radiatorhose when adding the engine oil as it maybe hot enough to burn you.

NOTE:It is recommended that the engine cool-ant should be changed by an authorizedHyundai dealer.

2. Add oil, then check the level again. Donot overfill.

3. Replace the cap by turning it clockwise.

The distance between the "F" and "L" marksis equal to about 1 quart of oil.


7

!

G050B01A-AAT

Recommended Engine Coolant

Use a high quality ethylene-glycol coolantin a 50/50 mix with water. The enginecoolant should be compatible with alumi-num engine parts. Additional corrosioninhibitors or additives should not be used.The cooling system must be maintainedwith the correct concentration and type ofengine coolant to prevent freezing andcorrosion. Never allow the concentrationof antifreeze to exceed the 60% level or gobelow the 35% level, or damage to thecooling system may result. For proper con-centration when adding or replacing theengine coolant, refer to the following table.

Ambient

temperature

°F (°C)

5 (-15)

-13 (-25)

-31 (-35)

-49 (-45)

65%

60%

50%

40%

35%

40%

50%

60%

WaterAntifreeze

solution

Engine Coolant concentration

G050C01TG-GAT

To Check the Coolant Level

The coolant level can be seen on the sideof the plastic coolant reservoir. The level ofthe coolant should be between the "L" and"F" lines on the reservoir when the engineis warm with it at idle . If the level is belowthe "L" mark, add engine coolant to bringit up to "F". If the level is low, inspect forcoolant leaks and recheck the fluid levelfrequently. If the level drops again, visityour Hyundai dealer for an inspection anddiagnosis of the reason.

G050C01TG

! CAUTION:o Engine coolant can damage the finish

of your car. If you spill engine coolanton the car, wash it off thoroughly withclean water.

o The engine in your vehicle has alumi-num engine parts and must be pro-tected by an ethylene-glycol basecoolant to prevent corrosion and freez-ing.Do not use hard water. Hard water cancause engine damage from corro-sion, overheating or freezing.

WARNING:The cooling fan is controlled by enginecoolant temperature and may some-times operate even when the engine isnot running. Use extreme caution whenworking near the blades of the coolantfan so that you are not injured by arotating fan blade. As the engine coolanttemperature decreases, the fan will au-tomatically shut off. This is a normalcondition.


8 CHANGING THE AIRCLEANER FILTER

G070A03Y-AAT

The replacement of the air cleaner filter isperformed in the following manner.

1. Unsnap the clips around the cover.2. When this is done, the cover can be

lifted off, the old filter removed and thenew filter put in its place.

Genuine Hyundai replacement parts arerecommended.

HTG5013

SPARK PLUGS

G060A01NF-AAT

G060A01L

Your engine was originally equipped withIridium-tipped spark plugs.Iridium-tipped spark plugs will last longerthan conventional type spark plugs andcan be identified by blue lines on theceramic shell.

NOTE:Do not clean or regap Iridium-tippedspark plugs.

G060B01TG-AAT

Replacing the Spark Plugs

The spark plugs should be changed at theintervals specified in the vehicle mainte-nance schedule in Section 5 or wheneverengine performance indicates they shouldbe changed. Symptoms that suggest poorspark plug performance include enginemisfiring under load, loss of fuel economy,poor acceleration, etc. When spark plugsare replaced, always use spark plugs rec-ommended by Hyundai. The use of otherspark plugs can result in loss of perfor-mance, radio interference or engine dam-age.

NOTE:o It is recommended that spark plugs

should be changed by an authorizedHyundai dealer.

o When replacing the spark plugs, al-ways use the genuine parts recom-mended.

Recommended Spark Plugs:IFR5G-11

0.03

9 ~

0.0

43 in

.(1

.0~

1.1

mm

)


9

CAUTION:o Operating your vehicle without using

a proper air cleaner filter in place canresult in excessive engine wear.

o When removing the air cleaner filter,be careful that dust or dirt does notenter the air intake. These may resultin damage to the air cleaner filter.

!

WINDSHIELD WIPER BLADES

G080A02A-AAT

The wiper blades should be carefully in-spected from time to time and cleaned toremove accumulations of road film or otherdebris. To clean the wiper blades andarms, use a clean sponge or cloth with amild soap or detergent and water. If thewipers continue to streak or smear theglass, replace them with genuine Hyundaireplacement parts or their equivalent.

! CAUTION:o Do not operate the wipers on dry glass.

This can result in more rapid wear ofthe wiper blades and may scratch theglass.

o Keep the blade rubber out of contactwith petroleum products such as en-gine oil, gasoline, etc.

G080A01TG


10

To install the wiper blade

HHR5049

HHR5050

G080B01TG-GAT

REPLACING THE WINDSHIELDWIPER BLADES

Replacing driver's side windshieldwiper blade

To replace the wiper blades, raise thewiper to the vertical position.

To remove the wiper blade

1. Push down the wiper blade with thelocking clip (1) pressed to detach it fromthe wiper arm.

HHR5048

(1)

2. Raise the wiper blade lightly and pull itup. 1. Put a new wiper blade onto the wiper

arm and lower the wiper blade at thelevel of the wiper arm as shown in thedrawing.


11

Replacing passenger's side wind-shield wiper blade

1. Place the windshield wiper switch to the"OFF" position, raise the windshieldwiper arm about 10 mm from the wind-shield as illustrated.

NOTE:Be careful not to scratch the windshieldwiper arm against the hood.

G080B01TG

2. Pull up the wiper blade until you hear anaudible "click" to engage in the end ofthe wiper arm.

NOTE:Do not allow the wiper arm to fall againstthe windshield.

HHR5051

2. Remove the windshield wiper bladewith the "LOCK" lever pressed.

G080B02TG


12 FILLING THE WASHERRESERVOIR

G090A02NF-AAT

G090A01TG

The washer fluid reservoir supplies fluid tothe windshield washer system.A good quality washer fluid should beused to fill the washer reservoir. The fluidlevel should be checked more frequentlyduring bad weather or whenever thewasher system is in more frequent use.The capacity of the washer reservoir is 3.2U.S. quarts (4.0 liters).

G080B04TG

1. Turn the ignition switch "ON" and placethe windshield wiper switch to the "LO"position. Turn the ignition switch "OFF"when the windshield wiper is in the fullyup position. The windshield wiper willstop as illustrated.

2. Replace the wiper blade as describedin the section of the driver's side re-placement.

NOTE:Remove any dirt or ice on the windshieldbefore turning on the wipers. Damage tothe wiper blade rubber and windshieldcould occur.

G080B03TG

3. Replace with a new wiper blade.

Alternatively, you can replace the wind-shield wiper blade as follows.


13

G110A01E-AAT

Transaxle fluid in the automatic transaxleshould be checked at those intervals speci-fied in the vehicle maintenance schedulein Section 5.

NOTE:Automatic transaxle fluid is basicallyred in color. As driving distance in-creases, the fluid color turns darkish redgradually. It is a normal condition andyou should not judge the need to replacebased upon the changing color.You must replace the automatictransaxle fluid in accordance with inter-vals specified in the vehicle maintenanceschedule in section 5.

!

G110B05A-AAT

Recommended Fluid

Your Hyundai automatic transaxle is spe-cially designed to operate with HYUNDAIGENUINE ATF SP III, DIAMOND ATF SP III,SK ATF SP III or other brands meeting theSP III specification approved by HyundaiMotor Co.. Damage caused by anonspecified fluid is not covered by yournew vehicle limited warranty.

CAUTION:Use of aftermarket ATF additives maycause damage to the automatictransaxle.Only use HYUNDAI GENUINE ATF SP III,DIAMOND ATF SP III, SK ATF SP III orother brands meeting the SP III specifi-cation approved by Hyundai Motor Co..If you are having your vehicle servicedat a facility other than a Hyundai dealer,verify that the correct ATF is used foryour vehicle.

CAUTION:o Radiator antifreeze (engine coolant)

should not be used in the washer sys-tem because it will damage the car'sfinish.

o The washer lever should not be pulledand the washer should not be oper-ated if the washer reservoir is empty.This can damage the washer fluidpump.

!

! WARNING:o Windshield washer fluid agents con-

tain some amounts of alcohol and canbe flammable under certain circum-stances. Do not allow sparks or flameto contact the washer fluid or thewasher fluid reservoir. Damage tothe vehicle or its occupants couldoccur.

o Windshield washer fluid is poisonousto humans and animals. Do not drinkwindshield washer fluid. Serious in-jury or death could occur.

CHECKING THE TRANSAXLEFLUID (AUTOMATIC)


14

2. Remove the transaxle dipstick, wipe itclean, reinsert the dipstick as far as it willgo, then remove it again. Now check thefluid level on the dipstick. It should be inthe "HOT" range on the dipstick.

G110D02O-AAT

To Check the Transaxle Fluid Level

Park the car on level ground with the park-ing brake engaged. When the transaxlefluid level is checked, the transaxle fluidshould be at normal operating tempera-ture and the engine idling.

While the engine is idling, apply the brakesand move the gear selector lever from "P"to each of its other positions — "R", "N", "D"— and then return to "N" or "P". With theengine still idling:

1. Open the hood, being careful to keephands, long hair and clothing clear ofany moving parts.

!

G110C01TG-AAT

Transaxle Fluid Capacity

The fluid capacity of the automatictransaxle is 11.52 U.S. quarts (10.9 liters).

WARNING:The transaxle fluid level should bechecked when the engine is at normaloperating temperature. This means thatthe engine, radiator, radiator hose, ex-haust system etc., are very hot. Exer-cise great care not to burn yourself dur-ing this procedure.

HTG5012

G110D01TG


15

G110D02NF

CHECKING THE BRAKES

!

G120B01A-AAT

Checking the Brake Fluid Level

WARNING:Use caution when handling brake fluid. Itcan damage your vision if it gets intoyour eyes. It will also damage yourvehicle's paint if spilled on it and notremoved immediately.

! WARNING:The cooling fan is controlled by enginecoolant temperature and may some-times operate even when the engine isnot running. Use extreme caution whenworking near the blades of the coolingfan so that you are not injured by arotating fan blade. As the engine coolanttemperature decreases, the fan will au-tomatically shut off. This is a normalcondition.

Fluid level should be within "HOT" range

G120A01A-AAT

CAUTION:Because brakes are essential to thesafe operation of the car, it is suggestedthat they be checked and inspected byyour Hyundai dealer. The brakes shouldbe checked and inspected for wear atthose intervals specified in the vehiclemaintenance schedule in Section 5.

!

3. If the transaxle fluid level is low, use afunnel to add transaxle fluid through thedipstick tube until the level reaches the"HOT" range. Do not overfill.

G120D01A-AAT

To Check the Fluid Level

The fluid level in the brake fluid reservoirshould be checked periodically. The levelshould be between the "MIN" and "MAX"marks on the side of the reservoir. If thelevel is at or below the "MIN" mark, care-fully add fluid to bring it up to "MAX". Do notoverfill.

G120C02A-AAT

Recommended Brake Fluid

Use only hydraulic brake fluid conformingto DOT 3 or DOT 4 specifications in yourbraking system. Follow the instructionsprinted on the container.


16

!

G120E02A-AAT

Adding Brake Fluid

WARNING:Handle brake fluid carefully. It can dam-age your vision if it gets into your eyes.Use only DOT 3 or DOT 4 specificationfluid from a sealed container. Do notallow the fluid can or reservoir to remainopen any longer than required. This willprevent entry of dirt and moisture whichcan damage the brake system and causeimproper operation.

To add brake fluid, first wipe away any dirtthen unscrew the fluid reservoir cap. Slowlypour the recommended fluid into the res-ervoir. Do not overfill. Carefully replace thecap on the reservoir and tighten.

AIR CONDITIONING CARE

G140A01A-AAT

Keeping the Condenser Clean

The air conditioning condenser (and en-gine radiator) should be checked periodi-cally for accumulation of dirt, dead insects,leaves, etc. These can interfere with maxi-mum cooling efficiency. When removingsuch accumulations, brush or hose themaway carefully to avoid bending the cool-ing fans.

G140B01A-AAT

Checking the Air Conditioning Op-eration

1. Start the engine and let it run at a fast idlefor several minutes with the air condi-tioning set at the maximum cold setting.

2. If the air coming out of the in-dash ventsis not cold, have the air conditioningsystem inspected by your Hyundaidealer.

HTG5015


17

3. Lower the glove box down completelyby pushing both sides of the glove boxinward.

HTG2168

CHANGING THE AIRCONDITIONER FILTER

B145A01TG-AAT

(For Evaporator and Blower Unit)(If Installed)

The air conditioner filter is located in theupper portion of the blower fan.It helps to decrease the amount of pollut-ants entering the car.

1. Open the glove box.2. Pull the glove box cylinder to unlock the

glove box retainer.

HTG2167

G140C01A-AAT

Lubrication

To lubricate the compressor and the sealsin the system, the air conditioning shouldbe run for at least 10 minutes each week.This is particularly important during coolweather when the air conditioning systemis not otherwise in use.

! CAUTION:Running the air conditioning system forextended periods of time with a low re-frigerant level may damage the com-pressor.


18

HNF2165

!

5. Replace the air conditioner filter by lift-ing it.

6. Installation is the reverse order of disas-sembly.

CAUTION:To prevent pollutants from entering thecar, be sure to properly install the airconditioner filter.

The parking brake pedal should bechecked periodically for proper stroke. Ifyou feel loose in the parking brake pedalwhen the parking brake is engaged, haveyour parking brake adjusted by an autho-rized Hyundai dealer.

CHECKING PARKINGBRAKE PEDAL

G185A01TG-GAT

CAUTION:If the parking brake pedal is not adjustedproperly, the vehicle may roll backwardswhen parking on a steep hill.

!

4. Pull out the air conditioner filter with thehooks on both sides pressed.

CAUTION:Be careful not to press the hooks in theopposite direction.

!

HNF2164


19

! CAUTION:When replacing a fusible link, never useanything but a new fusible link with thesame or lower amperage rating. Neveruse a piece of wire or a higher-ratedfusible link. This could result in seriousdamage and create a fire hazard.

G200B01NF-AAT

Replacing Accessory Fuse

G200B01TG-A

The fuse box for the lights and other elec-trical accessories will be found on the leftside of the instrument panel. Inside the boxyou will find a list showing the circuitsprotected by each fuse.If any of your car's lights or other electricalaccessories stop working, a blown (open)fuse could be the reason. If the fuse hasopened, you will see that the metal stripinside the fuse has melted through. If yoususpect a blown fuse, follow this proce-dure:1. Turn off the ignition and all other

switches.

G200A01A-AAT

Replacing a Fusible Link

A fusible link will melt if the electrical cir-cuits from the battery are ever overloaded,thus preventing damage to the entire wir-ing harness. (This could be caused by ashort in the system drawing too much cur-rent.) If this ever happens, have a Hyundaidealer determine the cause, repair thesystem and replace the fusible link. Thefusible links are located in a relay box in theengine compartment for easy inspection.

HNF4004

CHECKING AND REPLAC-ING FUSES


20

!

G200B02L

Good Open-Replace

CAUTION:An open fuse indicates that there is aproblem in the electrical circuit. If youreplace a fuse and it blows as soon as theaccessory is turned on, the problem isserious and should be referred to aHyundai dealer for diagnosis and repair.Never replace a fuse with anything ex-cept a fuse with the same or a loweramperage rating. A higher capacity fusecould cause damage and create a firehazard.

NOTE:See page 6-33 for the fuse panel descrip-tions.

3. Be sure to check all other fuses even ifyou find one that appears to haveopened.

G200B02NF

2. Open the fuse box and examine eachfuse. Remove each fuse by pulling ittoward you (a small "fuse puller" tool iscontained in the relay and fuse box ofthe engine room to simplify this opera-tion).

4. Replace the blown fuse by pressing anew fuse of the same rating into place.The fuse should be a snug fit. If it is not,have the fuse clip repaired or replacedby a Hyundai dealer. If you do not havea spare fuse, you may be able to borrowa fuse of the same or lower rating froman accessory you can temporarily getalong without (the radio or cigarettelighter, for example). Always rememberto replace the borrowed fuse.


21CHECKING THE BATTERY

!

G210A01A-AAT

WARNING:Batteries can be dangerous! When work-ing with batteries, carefully observe thefollowing precautions to avoid seriousinjuries.

The fluid in the battery contains a strongsolution of sulfuric acid, which is poison-ous and highly corrosive. Be careful not tospill it on yourself or the car. If you do spillbattery fluid on yourself, immediately dothe following:

HTG5019

!

G210B04A-AAT

Checking the Battery

Keep the battery clean. Any evidence ofcorrosion around the battery posts or ter-minals should be removed using a solu-tion of household baking soda and warmwater. After the battery terminals are dry,cover them with a light coating of grease.

PROPOSITION 65 WARNING:Battery posts, terminals, and relatedaccessories contain lead and lead com-pounds, chemicals known to the state ofCalifornia to cause cancer and repro-ductive harm.Batteries also contain other chemicalsknown to the state of California to causecancer. Wash hands after handling.

o If battery fluid is on your skin, flush theaffected areas with water for at least 15minutes and then seek medical assis-tance.

o If battery fluid is in your eyes, rinse outyour eyes with water and get medicalassistance as soon as possible. Whileyou are being driven to get medicalassistance, continue to rinse your eyesby using a sponge or soft cloth satu-rated with water.

o If you swallow battery fluid, drink a largequantity of water or milk followed by milkof magnesia, eat a raw egg or drinkvegetable oil. Get medical assistanceas soon as possible.

While batteries are being charged (eitherby a battery charger or by the vehicle'sgenerator), they produce explosive gases.Always observe these warnings to preventinjuries from occurring:

o Charge batteries only in a well venti-lated area.

o Do not permit flames, sparks or smok-ing in the area.

o Keep children away from the area.


22

!!If any electrolyte gets into youreyes, flush your eyes withclean water for at least 15 min-utes and get immediate medi-cal attention. If possible, con-tinue to apply water with asponge or cloth until medicalattention is received.If electrolyte gets on your skin,thoroughly wash the contactedarea.If you feel a pain or a burningsensation, get medical atten-tion immediately.

Wear eye protection whencharging or working near a bat-tery.Always provide ventilationwhen working in an enclosedspace.

WARNING:! WARNING:Always read the following in-structions carefully when han-dling a battery.

Keep lighted cigarettes and allother flames or sparks awayfrom the battery.

Hydrogen, which is a highlycombustible gas, is alwayspresent in battery cells andmay explode if ignited.

Keep batteries out of the reachof children because batteriescontain highly corrosive SUL-FURIC ACID. Do not allow bat-tery acid to contact your skin,eyes, clothing or paint finish.

o When lifting a plastic-cased battery,excessive pressure on the case maycause battery acid to leak, resulting inpersonal injury. Lift with a batterycarrier or with your hands on oppositecorners.

o Never attempt to charge the batterywhen the battery cables are con-nected.

o The electrical ignition system workswith high voltage.Never touch these components withthe engine running or the ignitionswitched on.

WARNING:


23POWER STEERING FLUIDLEVEL

G230A03A-AAT

G230A01TG

The power steering fluid level should bechecked regularly. To check the powersteering fluid level, be sure the engine is"OFF", then check to make certain that thepower steering fluid level is between the"MAX" and "MIN" level markings on thefluid reservoir.

!G220A01A-AAT

WARNING:The cooling fan is controlled by enginecoolant temperature and may some-times operate even when the engine isnot running. Use extreme caution whenworking near the blades of the coolingfan, so that you are not injured by arotating fan blade. As the engine coolanttemperature decreases the fan will au-tomatically shut off. This is a normalcondition.

G220B01NF-GAT

Checking Engine Cooling Fan

The engine cooling fan should come onautomatically if the engine coolant tem-perature is high or whenever the air con-ditioning is in operation.

G240A01A-AAT

POWER STEERING HOSES

It is suggested that you check the powersteering hose connections for fluid leak-age at those intervals specified in the ve-hicle maintenance schedule in Section 5.The power steering hoses should be re-placed if there is severe surface cracking,pulling, scuffing or worn spots. Deteriora-tion of the hose could cause prematurefailure.

NOTE:Grinding noise from the power steeringpump may be heard immediately afterthe engine is started in extremely coldconditions (below - 4°F). If the noise stopsduring warm up, there is no abnormalfunction in the system. It is due to apower steering fluid characteristic inextremely cold conditions.

Recommended FluidUse PSF-3 type fluid

NOTE:Do not start the engine when the powersteering oil reservoir is empty.

CHECKING ELECTRICCOOLING FANS


24 REPLACEMENT OF LIGHTBULBS

G260A01TG-GAT

Before attempting to replace a light bulb,be sure the switch is turned to the "OFF"position.The next paragraph shows how to reachthe light bulbs so they may be changed. Besure to replace the burned-out bulb withone of the same number and wattagerating.See page 6-32 for the wattage descrip-tions.

! CAUTION:o Keep the lights out of contact with

petroleum products, such as oil, gaso-line, etc.

o Be sure to replace the LED typeequipped bulbs with an assembly.

o If you don't have necessary tools, thecorrect bulbs and the expertise, con-sult your authorized Hyundai dealer.

G270A01TG-AAT

HEADLIGHT AND FRONT FOG LIGHT

CAUTION:The headlight aiming should be checkedby an authorized Hyundai dealer afterreplacing the headlight bulbs.

!

FOR MORE INFORMATIONABOUT YOUR HYUNDAI

G250A01A-AAT

If you desire additional information aboutmaintaining and servicing your Hyundai,you may purchase a factory Shop Manualat your Hyundai dealer's parts department.This is the same manual used by dealer-ship technicians and while it is highly tech-nical it can be useful in obtaining a betterunderstanding of your car and how it works.


25

Replacement instructions:

1. Allow the bulb to cool. Wear eye protec-tion.

2. Open the engine hood and disconnectthe negative (-) post of the battery.

3. Always grasp the bulb by its plasticbase, avoid touching the glass.

Headlight

Headlight(High beam)

Headlight(Low beam)

G270A01TG

Front Fog Light

G270A02TG

4. Using a socket wrench of the correctsize, remove the headlight assemblymounting bolts and nut.

G270A03TG

5. Disconnect the power cord from theback of the headlight.

HTG5024


26

! WARNING:This halogen bulb contains gas underpressure and if impacted could shatter,resulting in flying fragments. Alwayswear eye protection when servicing thebulb. Protect the bulb against abrasionsor scratches and against liquids whenlighted. Turn the bulb on only when in-stalling in a headlight. Replace the head-light if damaged or cracked. Keep thebulb out of the reach of children anddispose of the used bulb with care.

G270A03OHTG5026

9. Remove the protective cap from thereplacement bulb and install the newbulb by matching the plastic base withthe headlight hole. Reattach the bulbspring and reconnect the connector.

10. Use the protective cap and carton topromptly dispose of the old bulb.

11. Check for proper headlight aim.

7. Disconnect the connector from the bulbbase in the back of the headlight.

8. Push the bulb spring to remove theheadlight bulb.

6. Turn the plastic cover counterclock-wise and remove it.

HTG5025


27

G275A01TG-GAT

FRONT TURN SIGNAL LIGHT

1. Open the engine hood and disconnectthe negative (-) post of the battery.

HTG5045

2. Turn the wheel inside until the wheelhousing is visible.

3. Remove the mounting screws of thecover with a phillips screwdriver andopen the cover.

4. Take out the bulb from the bulb holderby turning it counterclockwise.

5. Install the new bulb.

HTG5046

Front Fog Light

NOTE:It is recommended that the front fog lightbulb should be replaced by an autho-rized Hyundai dealer.


28

3. To replace the turn signal light and sidemarker light, remove it from the bulbholder and install the new bulb.

(1) Turn signal light(2) Side marker light

G270D03TG-A

Turn Signal Light/Side MarkerLight

1. Open the trunk lid.

2. Remove the cover on the inside of rearluggage trim by turning the knob coun-terclockwise.

G270D02TG-A

G270D01TG-AAT

REAR COMBINATION LIGHT

Stop/Tail Light

NOTE:The stop/tail light should be replaced byan authorized Hyundai dealer becausethe light is LED (Light Emitting Diode)type.

Turn signal light

Side markerlight

G270D01TG-A

Stop/Tail lightStop/Tail light

Back-up light


29

3. To replace the back-up light, removethe socket by turning it counterclock-wise.

4. Install the new bulb.

HTG5030

G270C01TG-AAT

LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT LIGHT


2. Remove the luggage compartment lightcover by pushing the knob.

G270C01TG-AHTG5042

2. Loosen the mounting screws of the trunklid trim with a phillips screwdriver andremove the trunk lid trim.

Back-up Light



30

G270L01TG

G270L02TG

G270L01L-AAT

MAP LIGHT

1. Remove the plastic cover with a flat-head screwdriver.

2. Replace with a new bulb.

G270G01L-AAT

INTERIOR LIGHT

G270G01TG

1. Remove the plastic cover with a flat-head screwdriver.

G270G02TG


HNF5032

3. Disconnect the power cord.

HTB284



31

G270K02TG

G270K01TG-AAT

GLOVE BOX ILLUMINATED LIGHT

1. Open the glove box.

2. Remove the glove box illuminated lightcover with a flat-head screwdriver.

G270K01TG



32 BULB WATTAGES

G280A01TG-AAT

G280A01TG-A

Socket Type

P14,5s

PX26d

BAY15d

W2.1X9.5d

S8.5

BA9s

PGJ19-1

BAY15d

LED Type

Part Name

Door Edge Warning Light

Stop/Tail Light (Outside)

Stop/Tail Light (Inside)

High Mounted Rear Stop Light

Luggage Compartment Light

Rear Side Marker Light

Rear Turn Signal Light

Back-up Light

License Plate Light

Part Name

Headlight

Front Turn Signal Light/

Front Position Light

Front Map Light

Interior Light

Rear Map Light

Front Fog Light

Front Side Marker Light

Side Repeater Light (If Installed)

No.

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

No.

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

Wattage

55

55

28/8

10

10

10

35

8

0.75

Wattage

5

2.4/0.4

2.4/0.4

1

5

5

27

16

5

Socket Type

-

LED Type

LED Type

LED Type

S8.5

W2.1X9.5d

BA15s

W2.1X9.5d

W2.1X9.5d

High Beam

Low Beam


33FUSE PANEL DESCRIPTION

G200C01TG-AAT

Engine Compartment

NOTE:Not all fuse panel descriptions in this manual may be applicable to your vehicle. It is accurate at the time of printing. When youinspect the fuse box on your vehicle, refer to the fuse box label.

HTG4005


34

123456789101112131415161718192021222324

HORNTAILECUIG1DRL

FR FOGA/CON

F/PUMPDIODEATM

STOPH/LP LO RH

S/ROOFH/LP WASHER

H/LP HIECU (B+)SNSR3SNSR1SNSR2B/UP

IGN COILECU (IG1)H/LP LO

ABS

PROTECTED COMPONENTSABS/ESC Control module, Multipurpose check connectorABS/ESC Control module, Multipurpose check connectorFuse(FR P/SEAT, T/LID, T/SIG, TILT, PEDAL, RR CURTAIN)Defogger relayBlower relayFuse(P/WDW LH, P/WDW RH)Start relay, Ignition switch(IG2, START)Engine control unit relayFuse(KEY SOL, ECS/RR FOG), Power connectorIgnition switch(ACC, IG1)Fusible link(ABS1, ABS2, RR HTD, BLOWER)Horn relayTail light relayPCM(Spare)Burglar alarm horn relayFront fog light relayA/C RelayFuel pump relay(Spare)ATM Control relayStop light switchHID RelayOverhead console lampHeadlight washer motorHeadlight relay (HIGH)PCMInjector#1~#6, A/C Relay, Cooling fan relayMass air flow sensor, PCM, Immobilizer control module, Oil control valve#1/#2, Variable intake manifold valveOxygen Sensor#1~#4Back-up light switch, Stop light switch, Transaxle range switch, Vehicle speed sensorIgnition coil#1~#6, CondenserPCMHeadlight relay(LOW)ABS/ESC Control module, Multipurpose check connector

ABS1ABS2

I/P (B+)1RR HTD

BLOWERP/WDW

IGN2ECU RLYI/P (B+)2

IGN1ALT

FUSE RATING40A20A40A40A40A40A40A30A30A30A

150A15A20A10A10A15A15A10A20A

-20A15A15A15A20A20A10A10A15A15A10A20A10A20A10A

DESCRIPTION

FUSIBLELINK

FUSE


35

G200E01TG-AAT

Inner Panel

HTG4003-1


36

FUSE RATING20A30A10A

15A10A30A30A30A10A15A10A20A15A10A15A10A15A10A10A

FUSET/LID

FR P/SEATAUDIO-2

AUDIO-1START

P/WDW LHP/WDW RHRR P/SEATMODULE-1PEDAL ADJMIRR HTDKEY SOLRR FOG

A/BAG INDA/BAG

SPARE-2TILT

TAIL LHTAIL RH

PROTECTED COMPONENTSFuel lid opener & Trunk lid switchFront lumbar support switch, IMS Control module, Driver/Passenger seat manual switchATM Key lock control module, Audio, IMS Switch, Accessory relay, Seat/Power outlet relay,Digital clock & Passenger seat belt IND.AudioTransaxle range switch, Burglar alarm relayLeft front safety window module, Left rear power window switchRight front safety window module, Right rear power window switchRight rear ICM relay boxInstrument cluster, BCM, Rear curtain module, Rain sensor, IMS Control module, Power window main switchBack warning buzzerLeft/Right outside mirror & mirror folding motor, A/C Control moduleKey solenoid, Power window main switchRear fog light relayInstrument clusterAir bag cut off switch, SRS Control module(Spare)Tilt & Telescopic module, Sport mode switchFront fog light relay, Left rear combination light, License plate light, Left headlightRight rear combination light, License plate light, Right headlight


37

PROTECTED COMPONENTSDriver seat warmer switchInstrument cluster, ESC Switch, BCM, ATM Key lock control module, YAW Rate sensor,Multi-function switchA/C Control module, Tilt & Telescopic module, Rheostat, Electric chromic mirror, Overheadconsole lamp(Spare)Cigarette lighterBCMRear curtain moduleHeadlight relay, AQS & Ambient sensor, HID relay, Headlight leveling actuatorA/C Control module, Blower relay, A/C Control module(AUTO)Data link connector, A/C Control module, Instrument cluster, Multi-function switch, Tilt &Telescopic module, BCM, Door warning switch, Room lamp, Left/Right foot lamp, Door lamp(Spare)Rear power outletWasher relay, Wiper relay(High), Wiper relayFuse(MEMORY, AUDIO-1)

FUSE RATING10A10A

10A

10A15A15A10A10A10A15A

15A15A25A30A

FUSES/HTR

MODULE-2

A/CON

DIESELC/LIGHTER

T/SIGRR CURTAIN

H/LPA/CON SWMEMORY

PICACC SOCKET

WIPERPOWER CONN

7Emission Control System ............................................. 7-2Catalytic Converter ....................................................... 7-3

EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEMS

7

7 EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEMS

2 EMISSION CONTROLSYSTEMS

H010B01A-AAT

1. Crankcase Emission Control Sys-tem

The positive crankcase ventilation systemis employed to prevent air pollution causedby blow-by gases being emitted from thecrankcase. This system supplies fresh fil-tered air to the crankcase through the airintake hose. Inside the crankcase, the freshair mixes with blow-by gases, which thenpass through the PCV valve into the induc-tion system.

Canister

Fuel vapors generated inside the fuel tankare absorbed and stored in the onboardcanister. When the engine is running, thefuel vapors absorbed in the canister aredrawn into the surge tank through thepurge control solenoid valve.

Purge Control Solenoid Valve (PCSV)

The purge control solenoid valve is con-trolled by the Engine Control Module(ECM); when the engine coolant tempera-ture is low during idling, the PCSV closesso that evaporated fuel is not taken into theengine. After the engine warms-up duringordinary driving, the PCSV opens to intro-duce evaporated fuel to the engine.

H010D01A-AAT

3. Exhaust Emission ControlSystem

The Exhaust Emission Control System is ahighly effective system which controls ex-haust emissions while maintaining goodvehicle performance.

H010A01NF-AAT

Your Hyundai is equipped with an emis-sion control system to meet all emissionregulations.There are three emission control systemswhich are as follows.

(1) Crankcase emission control system(2) Evaporative emission control system(3) Exhaust emission control system

In order to assure the proper function of theemission control systems, it is recom-mended that you have your car inspectedand maintained by an authorized Hyundaidealer in accordance with the maintenanceschedule in this manual.

Caution for the Inspection and Mainte-nance Test (With Electronic StabilityControl (ESC) system)

o To prevent the vehicle from misfiringduring dynamometer testing, turn theElectronic Stability Control (ESC) sys-tem off by pressing the ESC switch.

o After dynamometer testing is com-pleted, turn the ESC system back onby pressing the ESC switch again.

H010C01S-AAT

2. Evaporative Emission Control (In-cluding ORVR: Onboard Refuel-ing Vapor Recovery) System

The Evaporative Emission Control Sys-tem is designed to prevent fuel vapors fromescaping into the atmosphere.(The ORVR system is designed to allowthe vapors from the fuel tank to be loadedinto a canister while refueling at the gasstation, preventing the escape of fuel va-pors into the atmosphere.)

7EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEMS

3

!!

CATALYTIC CONVERTER

H020A01A-AAT

All Hyundai vehicles are equipped with amonolith type three-way catalytic converterto reduce the carbon monoxide, hydrocar-bons and nitrogen oxides contained in theexhaust gas. Exhaust gases passingthrough the catalytic converter cause it tooperate at a very high temperature. Theintroduction of large amounts of unburnedgasoline into the exhaust may cause thecatalytic converter to overheat and createa fire hazard. This risk may be reduced byobserving the following:

Catalytic Converter

WARNING:o Use unleaded fuel only.o Maintain the engine in good operating

condition. Extremely high catalyticconverter temperatures can resultfrom improper operation of the elec-trical, ignition or multiport electronicfuel injection.

o If your engine stalls, pings, knocks, oris hard to start, have your Hyundaidealer inspect and repair the problemas soon as possible.

o Avoid driving with a very low fuel level.Running out of gasoline may causethe engine to misfire and result indamage to the catalytic converter.

o Avoid idling the engine for periodslonger than 10 minutes.

o The vehicle should not be pushed orpulled to get started. This may causethe catalytic converter to overheatand create a fire hazard.

H020A01TG

o Do not touch the catalytic converteror any other part of the exhaust sys-tem while the catalytic converter ishot. Shut off the engine, wait for atleast one hour before touching thecatalytic converter or any other partof the exhaust system.

o Remember that your Hyundai dealeris your best source of assistance.

o Do not stop your Hyundai over anycombustible material such as grass,paper, leaves or rags. These materi-als might contact the hot catalyticconverter and a fire might result.

WARNING:

Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) .............................. 8-2Engine Number ............................................................. 8-2Tire Information ............................................................. 8-2Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Pressures ............... 8-3Checking Tire Inflation Pressure ................................... 8-5Tire Sidewall Labeling ................................................... 8-5Tire Terminology and Definitions ................................... 8-7All Season Tires ............................................................ 8-9Snow Tires .................................................................... 8-9Tire Chains.................................................................. 8-10Tire Rotation................................................................ 8-10Tire Balancing ............................................................. 8-11Tire Traction ................................................................ 8-11When to Replace Tires ............................................... 8-11Tire Maintenance ........................................................ 8-12Spare Tire and Tools ................................................... 8-12Warranties for Your Hyundai Vehicle .......................... 8-13Consumer Information ................................................. 8-13Reporting Safety Defects ............................................ 8-16Binding Arbitration of Warranty Claims ....................... 8-16

88

CONSUMER INFORMATION, REPORTINGSAFETY DEFECTS & BINDING

ARBITRATION OF WARRANTY CLAIMS

8 CONSUMER INFORMATION, REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS & BINDING ARBITRATION OF WARRANTY CLAIMS

2 ENGINE NUMBERVEHICLE IDENTIFICATIONNUMBER (VIN)

I010B01A-AATI010A01O-AAT

The vehicle identification number (VIN) isthe number used in registering your carand in all legal matters pertaining to itsownership, etc. It can be found in threedifferent places on your car:

1. On the bulkhead between the engineand passenger compartments.

2. On the left top side of the instrumentpanel where it can be seen by lookingdown through the windshield.

3. On the lower side of the center pillarouter panel.

The engine number is stamped on theengine block as shown in the drawing.

TIRES

I020A02A-AAT

TIRE INFORMATION

The tires supplied on your new Hyundaiare chosen to provide the best perfor-mance for normal driving.If you ever have questions about yourtire warranty and where to obtain ser-vice, see the tire manufacturer's book-let included with your vehicle's Owner'sManual Literature Kit.

I010A01TG-A I010B01TG-A

8CONSUMER INFORMATION, REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS & BINDING ARBITRATION OF WARRANTY CLAIMS

3

I030A01TG-AAT

RECOMMENDED COLD TIRE INFLA-TION PRESSURES

Tire label located on the driver's side ofthe center pillar outer panel gives thecold tire pressures recommended foryour vehicle with the original tire size,the number of people that can be in yourvehicle and vehicle capacity weight.

I030A01TG-A

I030A02TG-A

I030A03TG-A

Type A

Type BI030A04TG-A

I030A05TG-A

Type C

Type D


4

!

CAUTION:Always observe the following:

o Check pressures when the tiresare cold. (After the vehicle hasbeen parked for at least three hoursor hasn't been driven more than 1mile (1.6 km) since starting up.)

o Check the pressure of your sparetire each time you check the pres-sure of other tires.

o Worn, old tires can cause acci-dents. If your tread is badly worn,or if your tires have been dam-aged, replace them.

!

WARNING:Overinflation or underinflation canreduce the tire life, adversely affectvehicle handling, and lead to sud-den tire failure. This could rusult inloss of vehicle control and potentialinjury.

These pressures were chosen to pro-vide the most satisfactory combinationof ride comfort, tire wear and stabilityunder normal conditions. Tire pressuresshould be checked at least monthly.Proper tire inflation pressures shouldbe maintained for these reasons:

!WARNING:

Severe underinflation (10 psi (70 kPa)or more) can lead to severe heatbuildup, causing blowouts, treadseparation and other tire failures thatcan result in the loss of vehicle con-trol leading to severe injury or death.This risk is much higher on hot daysand when driving for protracted peri-ods at high speeds.

NOTE:o Underinflation also results in ex-

cessive wear, poor handling andreduced fuel economy. Wheel de-formation also is possible. Keepyour tire pressures at the properlevels. If a tire frequently needsrefilling, have it checked by yourHyundai Dealer.

o Overinflation produces a harshride, excessive wear at the centerof the tire tread, and a greaterpossibility of damage from roadhazards.


5

I035A01JM-AAT

CHECKING TIRE INFLATION PRES-SURE

Check your tires once a month or more.Also, check the tire pressure of thespare tire.

How to Check

Use a good quality gauge to check tirepressure. You cannot tell if your tiresare properly inflated simply by lookingat them. Radial tires may look properlyinflated even when they're underinflated.Check the tire's inflation pressure whenthe tires are cold. - "Cold" means yourvehicle has been sitting for at leastthree hours or driven no more than 1mile (1.6 km).

Remove the valve cap from the tirevalve stem. Press the tire gauge firmlyonto the valve to get a pressure mea-surement. If the cold tire inflation pres-sure matches the recommended pres-sure on the tire and loading informationlabel, no further adjustment is neces-sary. If the pressure is low, add air untilyou reach the recommended amount.If you overfill the tire, release air bypushing on the metal stem in the centerof the tire valve. Recheck the tire pres-sure with the tire gauge. Be sure to putthe valve caps back on the valve stems.They help prevent leaks by keeping outdirt and moisture.

Federal law requires tire manufacturersto place standardized information onthe sidewall of all tires. This informationidentifies and describes the fundamen-tal characteristics of the tire and alsoprovides the tire identification number(TIN) for safety standard certification.The TIN can be used to identify the tirein case of a recall.

I030B01TG-AAT

TIRE SIDEWALL LABELING

I030B04JM

1

23

4

5, 6

7

1


6

o V: Speed Rating. The speed ratingdenotes the speed at which a tire isdesigned to be driven for extendedperiods of time. The ratings rangefrom "A" to "Z" (98 to 186 MPH).

3. TIN (Tire Identification Number) fornew tire (example: DOT XX XX XXXXXXX)o DOT: Abbreviation for the "Depart-

ment of Transportation". The sym-bol can be placed above, below orto the left or right of the Tire Iden-tification Number. It indicates thetire is in compliance with the U.S.Department of Transportation Mo-tor Vehicle Safety Standards.

o 1st two-digit code: Manufacturer'sidentification mark

o 2nd two-digit code: Tire sizeo 3rd three-digit code: Tire type code

(Optional)o 4th four-digit code: Date of Manu-

facture

o Four numbers represent the weekand year the tire was built. Forexample, the numbers 3105 meansthe 31st week of 2005.

4. Tire ply composition and materialThe number of layers or plies ofrubbercoated fabric in the tire. Tiremanufacturers also must indicatethe materials in the tire, which in-clude steel, nylon, polyester, andothers. The letter "R" means radialply construction; the letter "D" meansdiagonal or bias ply construction;and the letter "B" means belted-biasply construction.

5. Maximum permissible inflationpressureThis number is the greatest amountof air pressure that should be put inthe tire. Do not exceed the maximumpermissible inflation pressure. Referto the Tire and Loading Informationlabel for recommended inflation pres-sure.

1. Manufacturer or Brand nameo Manufacturer or Brand name is

shown.2. Tire size

(example: P225/60R16 97V)o The "P" indicates the tire is de-

signed for passenger vehicles.o Three-digit number (225): This num-

ber gives the width in millimetersof the tire from sidewall edge tosidewall edge.

o Two-digit number (60): This num-ber, known as the aspect ratio,gives the tire's ratio of height towidth.

o R: The "R" stands for radial.o Two-digit number (16): This num-

ber is the wheel or rim diameter ininches.

o Two digit number (97): This num-ber is the tire's load index. It is ameasurement of how much weighteach tire can support.


7

6. Maximum load ratingThis number indicates the maximumload in kilograms and pounds thatcan be carried by the tire. Whenreplacing the tires on the vehicle,always use a tire that has the sameload rating as the factory installedtire.

7. Uniform Tire Quality Grading(UTQG):Tire manufacturers are required tograde tires based on three perfor-mance factors: treadwear, tractionand temperature resistance. For moreinformation, see Uniform Tire Qual-ity Grading on page 8-14.

I030D01JM-AAT

TIRE TERMINOLOGY AND DEFINI-TIONS

Air Pressure: The amount of air insidethe tire pressing outward on the tire. Airpressure is expressed in pounds persquare inch (psi) or kilopascal (kPa).Accessory Weight: This means thecombined weight of optional accesso-ries. Some examples of optional ac-cessories are, automatic transmission,power seats, and air conditioning.Aspect Ratio: The relationship of atire's height to its width.Belt: A rubber coated layer of cords thatis located between the plies and thetread. Cords may be made from steel orother reinforcing materials.Bead: The tire bead contains steelwires wrapped by steel cords that holdthe tire onto the rim.Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in whichthe plies are laid at alternate anglesless than 90 degrees to the centerline ofthe tread.

Cold Tire Pressure: The amount of airpressure in a tire, measured in poundsper square inch (psi) or kilopascals(kPa) before a tire has built up heat fromdriving.Curb Weight: This means the weight ofa motor vehicle with standard and op-tional equipment including the maxi-mum capacity of fuel, oil and coolant,but without passengers and cargo.DOT Markings: A code molded into thesidewall of a tire signifying that the tireis in compliance with the U.S. Depart-ment of Transportation motor vehiclesafety standards. The DOT code in-cludes the Tire Identification Number(TIN), an alphanumeric designator whichcan also identify the tire manufacturer,production plant, brand and date ofproduction.GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight RatingGAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight Ratingfor the front Axle.GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight Ratingfor the rear axle.


8

Occupant Distribution: Designatedseating positions.Outward Facing Sidewall: The side ofan asymmetrical tire that has a particu-lar side that faces outward whenmounted on a vehicle. The side of thetire that contains a whitewall, bearswhite lettering or bears manufacturer,brand and or model name molding thatis higher or deeper than the same mold-ings on the other sidewall of the tire.Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A tire usedon passenger cars and some light dutytrucks and multipurpose vehicles.Recommended Inflation Pressure:Vehicle manufacturer's recommendedtire inflation pressure as shown on thetire placard.Radial Ply tire: A pneumatic tire inwhich the ply cords that extend to thebeads are laid at 90 degrees to thecenterline of the tread.Rim: A metal support for a tire uponwhich the tire beads are seated.

Sidewall: The portion of a tire betweenthe tread and the bead.Speed Rating: An alphanumeric codeassigned to a tire indicating the maxi-mum speed at which a tire can operate.Traction: The friction between the tireand the road surface. The amount ofgrip provided.Tread: The portion of a tire that comesinto contact with the road.Treadwear Indicators: Narrow bands,sometimes called "wear bars," that showacross the tread of a tire when only 2/32inch of tread remains.UTQGS: Uniform Tire Quality GradingStandards, a tire information systemthat provides consumers with ratingsfor a tire's traction, temperature andtreadwear. Ratings are determined bytire manufacturers using governmenttesting procedures. The ratings aremolded into the sidewall of the tire.

Intended Outboard Sidewall: The sideof an asymmetrical tire, that must al-ways face outward when mounted on avehicle.Kilopascal (kPa): The metric unit forair pressure.Load Index: An assigned number rang-ing from 1 to 279 that corresponds tothe load carrying capacity of a tire.Maximum Inflation Pressure: Themaximum air pressure to which a coldtire may be inflated. The maximum airpressure is molded onto the sidewall.Maximum Load Rating: The load rat-ing for a tire at the maximum permis-sible inflation pressure for that tire.Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight:The sum of curb weight; accessoryweight; vehicle capacity weight; andproduction options weight.Normal Occupant Weight: The num-ber of occupants a vehicle is designedto seat multiplied by 150 pounds (68kg).


9

Vehicle Capacity Weight: The numberof designated seating positions multi-plied by 150 lbs. (68 kg) plus the ratedcargo and luggage load.Vehicle Maximum Load on the Tire:Load on an individual tire due to curband accessory weight plus maximumoccupant and cargo weight.Vehicle Normal Load on the Tire:That load on an individual tire that isdetermined by distributing to each axleits share of the curb weight, accessoryweight, and normal occupant weightand dividing by 2.Vehicle Placard: A label permanentlyattached to a vehicle showing the origi-nal equipment tire size and recom-mended inflation pressure.

I040B01JM-AAT

ALL SEASON TIRES

Hyundai specifies all season tires onsome models to provide good perfor-mance for use all year round, includingsnowy and icy road conditions. All sea-son tires are identified by ALL SEASONand/or M+S (Mud and Snow) on the tiresidewall. Snow tires have better snowtraction than all season tires an may bemore appropriate in some areas.

I040A01O-AAT

SNOW TIRES

If you equip your car with snow tires,they should be the same size and havethe same load capacity as the originaltires. Snow tires should be installed onall four wheels; otherwise, poor han-dling may result.Snow tires should carry 4 psi (28 kPa)more air pressure than the pressurerecommended for the standard tires onthe tire label on the driver's side of thecenter pillar , or up to the maximumpressure shown on the tire sidewall,whichever is less.Do not drive faster than 75 mph (120km/h) when your car is equipped withsnow tires.


10

I060A02A-AAT

TIRE ROTATION

I060A01TG

! WARNING:o When driving on roads covered

with snow or ice, drive at less than20 mph (30 km/h).

o Use SAE "S" class or wire chains.o Use wire chains less than 15mm to

prevent damage to the chain'sconnection.

o If chains contact the body andcause noise, retighten the chainsto avoid contact with the vehiclebody that may cause damage.

o To prevent body damage, retightenthe chains after driving 0.3~0.6miles.

I050A01TG-AAT

TIRE CHAINS

Tire chains, if necessary, should beinstalled on the front wheels. Be surethat the chains are the proper size andthat they are installed in accordancewith the manufacturer's instructions.To minimize tire and chain wear, do notcontinue to use tire chains when theyare no longer needed.

I060A02TG

Temporary spare tire type

Full size spare tire type


11

I080A01A-AAT

TIRE TRACTION

Tire traction can be reduced if you driveon worn tires, tires that are improperlyinflated or on slippery road surfaces.Tires should be replaced when treadwear indicators appear. To reduce thepossibility of losing control, slow downwhenever there is rain, snow or ice onthe road.

I070A01A-AAT

TIRE BALANCING

A tire that is out of balance may affecthandling and tire wear. The tires on yourHyundai were balanced before the carwas delivered but may need balancingagain during the years you own the car.Whenever a tire is dismounted for re-pair, it should be rebalanced beforebeing reinstalled on the car.

!

Tires should be rotated every 7,500miles (12,000 km). If you notice thattires are wearing unevenly between ro-tations, have the car checked by aHyundai dealer so the cause may becorrected.After rotating, adjust the tire pressuresand be sure to check the wheel nuttorque.

WARNING:o Do not use the temporary spare

tire for tire rotation.o Do not mix bias ply and radial ply

tires under any circumstances.This may cause unusual handlingcharacteristics that could result indeath, serious injury, or propertydamage.

HTG5016

I090A02A-AAT

WHEN TO REPLACE TIRES

The original tires on your car have treadwear indicators. The location of treadwear indicators is shown by the "TWI"or " " marks, etc. The tread wearindicators appear when the tread depthis 0.06 in. (1.6 mm). The tire should bereplaced when these appear as a solidbar across two or more grooves of thetread. Always replace your tires withthose of the recommended size. If youchange wheels, the new wheel's rimwidth and offset must meet Hyundaispecification.

Tread wearindicator

0.06 in. (1.6 mm)


12 SPARE TIRE AND TOOLS

I100A01NF-AAT

Your Hyundai is delivered with the fol-lowing:

Spare tire and wheelWrench bar (1)Jack (2)Wheel nut wrench (3)Tool receptacle (4)

I100A01NF-A

I090B01JM-AAT

TIRE MAINTENANCE

In addition to proper inflation, correctwheel alignment helps to decrease tirewear. If you find a tire is worn unevenly,have your dealer check the wheel align-ment.

When you have new tires installed,make sure they are balanced. This willincrease vehicle ride comfort and tirelife. Additionally, a tire shoud always berebalanced if it is removed from thewheel.

!WARNING:

o Driving on worn-out tires is dan-gerous! Worn-out tires can causeloss of braking effectiveness,steering control and traction. Whenreplacing tires, never mix radialand bias ply tires on the same car.If you replace radial tires with bias-ply tires, they must be installed insets of four.

o Using tires and wheels of otherthan the recommended sizes couldcause unusual handling charac-teristics that could cause death,serious injury, or property dam-age.

o Wheels that do not meet Hyundai'sdimensional specifications mayfit poorly and result in damage tothe vehicle, including brokenwheel studs.


13

I110A01A-AAT

SHOP MANUAL

A Hyundai Shop Manual is available fromyour authorized Hyundai dealer. It's writ-ten for professional technicians, but issimple enough for most mechanically-in-clined owners to understand.

CONSUMER INFORMATION

I130A01A-AAT

This consumer information has been pre-pared in accordance with regulations is-sued by the National Highway Traffic SafetyAdministration of the U.S. Department ofTransportation. It provides the purchasersand/or prospective purchasers of Hyundaiautomobiles with information on uniformtire quality grading. Your Hyundai dealerwill help answer any questions you mayhave as you read this information.

WARRANTIES FOR YOURHYUNDAI VEHICLE

I120A03A-AAT

Please consult your Owner's Handbook& Warranty Information booklet for yourvehicle's specific warranty coverage.


14

Temperature A, B, C - The tempera-ture grades are A (the highest), B, andC, representing the tire's resistance tothe generation of heat and its ability todissipate heat when tested under con-trolled conditions on a specified indoorlaboratory test wheel. Sustained hightemperature can cause the material ofthe tire to degenerate and reduce tirelife, and excessive temperature canlead to sudden tire failure. The grade Ccorresponds to a level of performancewhich all passenger car tires must meetunder the Federal Motor Vehicle SafetyStandard No. 109. Grades B and Arepresent higher levels of performanceon the laboratory test wheel than theminimum required by law.

Traction AA, A, B, C - The tractiongrades, from highest to lowest, are AA,A, B, and C. Those grades representthe tire's ability to stop on wet pave-ment as measured under controlledconditions on specified government testsurfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tiremarked C may have poor traction per-formance.

! WARNING:The traction grade assigned to thistire is based on straight-ahead brak-ing traction tests, and does not in-clude acceleration, cornering, hy-droplaning, or peak traction charac-teristics.

I130B04A-AAT

Tire Quality Grading

Department of Transportation qualitygrades - All passenger vehicle tiresmust conform to Federal Safety Stan-dards in addition to these grades. Thesequality grades are molded on thesidewall.

Treadwear - The treadwear grade is acomparative rating based on the wearrate of the tire when tested under con-trolled conditions on a specified gov-ernment test course. For example, atire graded 150 would wear one and ahalf (1 - 1/2) times as well on thegovernment course as a tire graded100. The relative performance of tiresdepends upon the actual conditions oftheir use, however, and may departsignificantly from the norm due to varia-tions in driving habits, service prac-tices and differences in road character-istics and climate.


15

!WARNING:

The temperature grade for this tire isestablished for a tire that is properlyinflated and not overloaded. Exces-sive speed, underinflation, or exces-sive loading, either separately or incombination, can cause heat buildupand possible tire failure.

Uniform Tire Quality Grading - Qual-ity grades can be found on the tiresidewall between the tread shoulderand the maximum section width.For example :Treadwear 200 Traction AA Tempera-ture A

I130D04A-AAT

Hyundai motor vehicles are designed andmanufactured to meet or exceed all appli-cable safety standards.

For your safety, however, we strongly urgeyou to read and follow all directions in thisOwner's Manual, particularly the informa-tion under the headings "NOTE", "CAU-TION" and "WARNING".

If, after reading this manual, you have anyquestions regarding the operation of yourvehicle, please contact your nearestHyundai Motor America Regional Officeas listed below:

Eastern Region : Connecticut, Delaware,Maine, Maryland, Massachusetts, NewHampshire, New Jersey, New York,Pennsylvanina, Rhode Island, Vermont,Virginia, West Virginia.

Eastern Region1100 Cranbury South River RoadJamesburg, NJ 08831(800) 633-5151

Southern Region: Florida, Georgia, NorthCarolina, South Carolina.

Southern Region270 Riverside Parkway, Suite AAustell, GA 30168(800) 633-5151

South Central Region: Alabama, Arkan-sas, Colorado, Kansas, Louisiana, Missis-sippi, Missouri, New Mexico, Oklahoma,Tennessee, Texas, Wyoming.

South Central Region1421 South Beltline Road, Suite 400Coppell, TX 75019(800) 633-5151

Central Region: Illinois, Indiana, lowa,Kentucky, Michigan, Minnesota, Nebraska,North Dakota, South Dakota, Ohio, Wis-consin.

Central Region1705 Sequoia DriveAurora, Illinois 60506(800) 633-5151


16

I140A01A-AAT

Any claim or dispute you may haverelated to your vehicle's warranty or theduties contemplated under the warranty,including claims related to the refund orpartial refund of your vehicle's purchaseprice (excluding personal injury or prod-uct liability claims), shall be resolvedby binding arbitration. Binding arbitra-tion shall be administered by and throughthe National Arbitration Forum (NAF) orthe American Arbitration Association(AAA), under the Code of Procedure ofthe entity you select.You will not be responsible for payingfiling and hearing fees above $275.00.All other arbitration costs shall be borneby Hyundai Motor America. You are notresponsible to pay any of the costsHyundai incurs.This Binding Arbitration Agreement shall

BINDING ARBITRATION(U.S.A only)

REPORTING SAFETYDEFECTS

I130C02A-AAT

If you believe that your vehicle has a defectwhich could cause a crash or could causeinjury or death, you should immediatelyinform the National Highway Traffic SafetyAdministration (NHTSA) in addition tonotifying HYUNDAI MOTOR AMERICA. IfNHTSA receives similar complaints, it mayopen an investigation, and if it finds that asafety defect exists in a group of vehicles,it may order a recall and remedy cam-paign. However, NHTSA cannot becomeinvolved in individual problems betweenyou, your dealer, or HYUNDAI MOTORAMERICA.To contact NHTSA, you may call the Ve-hicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administra-tor, NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street, SW.,Washington, DC 20590. You can alsoobtain other information about motor ve-hicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.

Western Region: Alaska, Hawaii, Arizona,California, ldaho, Montana, Nevada, Or-egon, Texas, Utah, Washington.

Western Region10550 Talbert AvenueP.O.Box 20850Fountain Valley, California 92728-0850(800) 633-5151


17

not deprive you of any remedies avail-able to you under applicable law. Theparties are waiving their right to seekremedies in court, including the right toa jury trial.This Binding Arbitration Agreement shallbe governed by and interpreted underthe Federal Arbitration Act, 9 U.S.C.sections 1-16. Judgment upon any awardmay be entered in any court havingjurisdiction.You may revoke this Arbitration Agree-ment by (1) written notice or (2) elec-tronic notice. Written notice must bedelivered (via certified mail) to HyundaiMotor America, Attn: Consumer Af-fairs, 10550 Talbert Avenue, P.O. Box20849, Fountain Valley, CA 92728-0849.Electronic notice must be submitted atthe following website address: http://warranty-arbitration.hyundaiUSA.com.Notice must be received within 90 daysafter you purchase your vehicle.

9Measurement ................................................................ 9-2Engine ........................................................................... 9-3Lubrication Chart ........................................................... 9-4

VEHICLE SPECIFICATIONS

9

9 VEHICLE SPECIFICATIONS

2

J010A01TG-AAT

MEASUREMENT

J060A01TG-AAT

FUEL SYSTEM

J020A01TG-AAT

POWER STEERING

J030A01TG-AAT

TIRE

Battery

Alternator

J040A01TG-AAT

ELECTRICAL

in.(mm)

Fuel tank capacity 19.8 U.S.gal (16.4 Imp.gal, 75 liter)

CMF80AH

130A (13.5V)

J050A01TG-AAT

BRAKE

Dual hydraulic with brake booster

Ventilated disc

Solid disc

Cable operated on rear wheel

Type

Front brake type

Rear brake type

Parking brake

Type

Wheel free play

Rack stroke

Oil pump type

Rack and pinion

0 ~ 1.18 in. (0 ~ 30 mm)

5.74 in. (146 mm)

Vane type

192.7 (4895)

72.8 (1850)

58.6 (1490)

109.4 (2780)

62.2 (1580)

61.6 (1565)

Overall length

Overall width

Overall height

Wheel base

Wheel tread Front

Rear

Standard

Option

P225/60R16

P235/55R17

J035A01TG-AAT

SPARE TIRE

Standard

Option

Temporary (T125/80D16)

Full size

9VEHICLE SPECIFICATIONS

3

3.8L

6-Cyl., V-type DOHC

3.77 x 3.42 (96.0 x 87.0)

230.5 (3,778)

1 - 2 - 3 - 4 - 5 - 6

IFR5G-11

720 ± 100

BTDC 10° ± 5°

0.006 ~ 0.009 in. (0.17 ~ 0.23 mm)

0.01 ~ 0.012 in. (0.27 ~ 0.33 mm)

0.039 ~ 0.043 in. (1.0 - 1.1 mm)

ENGINE

J070A01TG-AAT

ITEMS

Engine Type

Bore x Stroke in.(mm)

Displacement cu.in.(cc)

Firing order

Valve clearance (warm engine) Intake

Exhaust

Spark plug

Spark plug gap

Idle speed (rpm)

Ignition timing (Base)

9 VEHICLE SPECIFICATIONS

4

Oil & Grease Standard

API SJ, SL or ABOVE, SAE 5W-20, SAE 5W-30 (ALL TEMP. RANGE)

ILSAC GF-3 or ABOVE SAE 10W-30 (ABOVE 0°F(-18°C))

HYUNDAI GENUINE ATF SP III, DIAMOND ATF SP III, SK ATF SP III or other

brands meeting the SP III specification approved by Hyundai Motor Co..

Ethylene glycol base for aluminum radiator

PSF-3 TYPE FLUID

DOT 3 or DOT 4 Equivalent

LUBRICATION CHART

J080A01TG-AAT

Quantity (Us. qts)(Imp. qts, Liter)

Drain and refill ;

With oil filter : 5.91 (4.92, 5.6)

Without oil filter : 5.49 (4.57, 5.2)

11.51 (9.59, 10.9)

8.77 (7.3, 8.3)

0.95 (0.79, 0.9)

As required

Item

Engine Oil

Recommends

Transaxle

Coolant

Power steering

Brake fluid

Automatic

10

INDEX

10

10 INDEX

2

AAccessory Box .................................................................... 1-97Advanced Supplemental Restraint (AIRBAG)System (SRS) .................................................................... 1-44

Curtain airbag ................................................................. 1-57Driver's and passenger's front airbag ............................ 1-45Occupant classification system ...................................... 1-52Side impact airbag ......................................................... 1-56

Air Cleaner Filter .................................................................. 6-8Air Conditioning

Care ................................................................................. 6-16Filter ..................................................................... 1-132, 6-17Operation ............................................................ 1-125, 6-16Switch ............................................................................ 1-128

Antenna ............................................................................ 1-166Ashtray ................................................................................ 1-88Audio System ................................................................... 1-136

Audio remote control switch ......................................... 1-121Cassette tape player operation (M455) ....................... 1-146Cassette tape player operation (M465) ....................... 1-156Compact disc player operation (M445) ....................... 1-139Compact disc player operation (M455) ....................... 1-149Compact disc player operation (M465) ....................... 1-159Stereo radio operation (M445) ..................................... 1-136Stereo radio operation (M455) ..................................... 1-143Stereo radio operation (M465) ..................................... 1-153

Automatic Heating and Cooling Control System ............ 1-124Automatic-Dimming Mirror with Z-Nav™ Electronic Compass

Display and HomeLink® .................................................................................. 1-101

BBattery ................................................................................. 6-21Binding Arbitration ............................................................. 8-16Brake

Anti-lock brake system (ABS) ......................................... 2-11Checking the brakes ...................................................... 6-15Fluid ................................................................................. 6-15Practices .......................................................................... 2-13

Breaking-In your New Hyundai ........................................... 1-3

CCare of Cassette Tapes ................................................... 1-164Care of Discs .................................................................... 1-164Catalytic Converter ............................................................... 7-3Child Restraint System ...................................................... 1-34

Installing a child restraint system with "Tether Anchorage" system ........................................... 1-36Securing a child restraint system with "ISOFIX" system 1-37

Child-Protector Rear Door Lock .......................................... 1-9Cigarette Lighter ................................................................ 1-87Clock ................................................................................... 1-87

10INDEX

3

Combination LightAuto Light ........................................................................ 1-82Headlight flasher ............................................................ 1-83Headlight switch ............................................................. 1-81High-beam switch ........................................................... 1-83Lane change signal ........................................................ 1-81Parking light auto off ...................................................... 1-82Turn signal operation ..................................................... 1-81

Console Box ....................................................................... 1-97Consumer Information ....................................................... 8-13Cooling Fans ...................................................................... 6-23Corrosion Protection

Cleaning the interior ......................................................... 4-6Protecting your Hyundai from corrosion .......................... 4-2Washing and waxing ........................................................ 4-4

Cruise Control .................................................................. 1-118

DDefrosting/Defogging ....................................................... 1-133Door

Central door locks .......................................................... 1-10Door locks ......................................................................... 1-7Door warning light ........................................................ 1-116Locking and unlocking front door with a key .................. 1-8

Drink Holder ....................................................................... 1-89Driving

Economical driving ......................................................... 2-14Smooth cornering ........................................................... 2-15Winter driving .................................................................. 2-16

EElectronic Stability Control (ESC) System ........................ 2-11Emission Control System ..................................................... 7-2Engine

Before starting the engine ................................................ 2-3Compartment .................................................................... 6-2Coolant .............................................................................. 6-6Coolant temperature gauge ........................................... 1-74If the engine overheats ..................................................... 3-4Number ............................................................................. 8-2Oil ...................................................................................... 6-4Starting .............................................................................. 2-5

Engine Exhaust Can Be Dangerous! .................................. 2-2

FFan Speed Control Switch ............................................... 1-126Fog Light

Front ................................................................................ 1-83

10 INDEX

4

Front SeatsActive headrests ............................................................. 1-21Adjustable headrests ...................................................... 1-20Adjusting seat forward and rearward ............................ 1-19Adjusting seatback angle ............................................... 1-19Seat cushion height adjustment ................................... 1-22Seat warmer .................................................................... 1-24

FuelCapacity ............................................................................ 9-2Gauge .............................................................................. 1-74Recommendations ............................................................ 1-2

Fuel Filler LidRemote release ............................................................ 1-111

Fuse Panel Description ..................................................... 6-33Fuses .................................................................................. 6-19

GGeneral Checks ................................................................... 6-3Glove Box ........................................................................... 1-96

HHazard Warning System .................................................... 1-86Headlight

Replacement ................................................................... 6-25Switch .............................................................................. 1-81

Heating and Cooling Control .......................................... 1-122Air flow control ............................................................. 1-129Air intake control switch ............................................... 1-127Air quality control system ............................................. 1-127Defrosting/Defogging .................................................... 1-133Dual temperature control .............................................. 1-129Fan speed control switch ............................................. 1-126

High-Mounted Rear Stop Light ....................................... 1-110Homelink Mirror ................................................................ 1-101Hood Release .................................................................. 1-113Horn .................................................................................. 1-116

IIgnition Switch ...................................................................... 2-4Immobilizer System .............................................................. 1-3Instrument Cluster and Indicator Lights ............................ 1-62Instrument Panel Light Control (Rheostat) ....................... 1-87Integrated Memory System ................................................ 1-22Interior Light ....................................................................... 1-94

JJump Starting ....................................................................... 3-3

KKey ........................................................................................ 1-4

If you lose your keys ...................................................... 3-14Positions ............................................................................ 2-4

10INDEX

5

LLight Bulb Watages ............................................................ 6-32Light Bulbs Replacement .................................................. 6-24Lubrication Chart .................................................................. 9-4Luggage Net .................................................................... 1-110

MMaintenance Intervals .......................................................... 5-2

Explanation of scheduled maintenance items ................ 5-7Maintenance under severe usage conditions ................. 5-6Scheduled maintenance .................................................. 5-4Service requirements ........................................................ 5-2

Maintenance Precautions .................................................... 6-4Mirrors

Homelink mirror ............................................................ 1-101Outside rearview ............................................................. 1-98Outside rearview mirror folding switch ........................ 1-100Outside rearview mirror heater ...................................... 1-99

OOdometer ............................................................................ 1-76Outside Rearview Mirror .................................................... 1-98

PParking Brake ................................................................... 1-107

Checking parking brake pedal ....................................... 6-18Power Adjustable Pedals .................................................. 2-10Power Outlets ..................................................................... 1-88Power Steering Fluid Level ............................................... 6-23

RRear Seat

Armrest .......................................................................... 1-116Folding rear seatbacks ................................................... 1-25Rear seatback safety lock .............................................. 1-26Warning ........................................................................... 1-26

Rear Window Curtain ...................................................... 1-117Rear Window Defroster Switch ......................................... 1-86Reporting Safety Defects ................................................... 8-16

SSeat

Front ................................................................................ 1-19Rear ................................................................................. 1-25

Seat Belts ........................................................................... 1-273-Point system ................................................................ 1-30Adjusting your seat belt .................................................. 1-32Care of seat belts ........................................................... 1-29Pre-tensioner seat belt ................................................... 1-40Precautions ..................................................................... 1-27

10 INDEX

6

Seatback Pocket ................................................................ 1-90Spark Plugs .......................................................................... 6-8Spectacle Case .................................................................. 1-96Speedometer ...................................................................... 1-76Starting Procedure ............................................................... 2-5Steering Wheel Tilt & Telescopic .................................... 1-117Stereo Sound System ...................................................... 1-134Sun Visor .......................................................................... 1-114Sunroof ............................................................................... 1-91

TTachometer ......................................................................... 1-75Theft-Alarm System ............................................................ 1-11Ticket Holder .................................................................... 1-115Tires

All season tires ................................................................. 8-9Balancing ........................................................................ 8-11Chains ............................................................................. 8-10Changing a flat tire ........................................................... 3-6Checking the inflation pressure ....................................... 8-5If you have a flat tire ......................................................... 3-6Information ........................................................................ 8-2Maintenance ................................................................... 8-12Pressure ............................................................................ 8-3Replacement ................................................................... 8-11Rotation ........................................................................... 8-10

Sidewall labeling .............................................................. 8-5Snow tires ......................................................................... 8-9Spare tire .......................................................................... 3-5Terminology and definitions ............................................. 8-7Traction ........................................................................... 8-10

TowingA trailer (or vehicle) ........................................................ 2-19Emergency ...................................................................... 3-13If your vehicle must be towed ........................................ 3-11

TransaxleAutomatic .......................................................................... 2-5Automatic transaxle fluid checking ................................ 6-13

Trip Computer .................................................................... 1-77Trunk Lid .......................................................................... 1-107

Trunk lid control button ................................................. 1-108

VVehicle Identification Number (VIN) .................................... 8-2Vehicle Load Limit ............................................................. 2-22Vehicle Specifications .......................................................... 9-1

WWarning and Indicator Lights ............................................ 1-66Warranties for Your Hyundai Vehicle ............................... 8-13Windows ............................................................................. 1-14

Window lock .................................................................... 1-16

10INDEX

7

Windshield Wiper and Washer .......................................... 1-76Auto wiper operation ...................................................... 1-84Intermittent wiper operation ............................................ 1-85Mist wiper operation ....................................................... 1-85Windshield washer operation ........................................ 1-85

Windshield Wiper Blades .................................................... 6-9

A000A01A-AAT

This Owner's Manual should be considered a part of the car and remain with it when it is sold for the use of the next owner.

OWNER'S I.D.

ORIGINAL OWNER

ADDRESS

CITY STATE ZIP CODE

DELIVERY DATE

(Date Sold to Original Retail Purchaser)

DEALER NAME DEALER NO.

ADDRESS

CITY STATE ZIP CODE

Seoul Korea

Printing: AUG. 25, 2005Publication No.: A3LO-EU58APrinted in Korea

SERVICE STATION INFORMATIONFUEL:UNLEADED gasoline onlyPump Octane Rating of 87 (Research Octane Number 91) or higher.

FUEL TANK CAPACITYUS.gal (Imp.gal., liter) 19.8 (16.4, 75)

TIRE PRESSURE:See the label on the driver's side of the center pillar outer panel.

OTHER TIRE INFORMATION:See pages 8-2 through 8-13.

HOOD RELEASE:Pull handle under left side of dash.

ENGINE OIL:API grade SJ, SL or ABOVE / ILSAC grade GF-3 or ABOVE and fuel efficientoil. Use SAE 5W-20, 5W-30 or 10W-30 if normal temperatures are above0°F (-18°C). See page 6-4 or 9-4.

AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE:Apply the parking brake, with the engine running, shift the selector leverthrough all ranges and return to "N" (Neutral) position. Then check the levelof fluid on the dipstick. Use only HYUNDAI GENUINE ATF SP III,DIAMOND ATF SP III, SK ATF SP III or other brands meeting the SP IIIspecification approved by Hyundai Motor Co..

QUICK INDEXo Car will not start ....................................................................... 3-2o Flat tire ...................................................................................... 3-6o Warning light/chime comes on ...................................... 1-66 ~ 1-74o Engine overheats ....................................................................... 3-4o Towing of your vehicle ........................................................... 3-11o Starting the engine ..................................................................... 2-4o Driving tips for first 1,200 miles (2,000 km) ............................ 1-3o Scheduled maintenance .............................................................. 5-4o Reporting safety defects ......................................................... 8-16

2006 hyundai azera owners manual

Documents

bias ply construction

legs comfortably

pump octane

license plate

static electricity

pass air bag

average fuel

file search